Man Hinh GOT. 2

1
OVERVIEW
5.8 Security Function
10
11
12
13
14
15
COMMON SETTING
Security level is not set.
Authentic method
The authentic method for changing security levels includes the following types.
Operator authentication
Security level authentication
For the authentic method, refer to the following.
Section 3.5 Security Setting
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5 - 84
ALARM
Security level 0
High
The authority of security level
Low
2
SPECIFICATIONS
This function determines which screen is displayed depending on the security level.
The security level can be changed by inputting the password corresponding to each level.
The security level (0 to 15) can be set for each screen and object.
The security level can be set to each object function (excluding document display), window screen and base
screen.
1 Example
Change the contents that can be operated by each user in the screen for setting plural objects.
The switch action set for the special function switch that is used for changing user's security level varies
according to the authentic method.
For special function switches, refer to the following.
Section 6.2 Touch Switch
Display product volume
(security level: 4)
Display product volume
condition(Window screen 2)
(security level: 4)
150
Line 1 control screen
St.
Production volume
150
Switch to Mt. screen

(base screen 10)(security level: 4)
Mt.
St.
Mt.
Security
Display login/logout screen (Operator authentication),

Display password input screen (Security level authentication)
(Security level: 0)
Security
Base secreen 1
Screen design example
Used objects and security levels
Screen example for each security level

Mt.screen
Production volume
Production volume
150
Security
Base secreen 1
(Security level: 0)
Window secreen 2
(Security level: 8)
Base secreen 10
(Security level: 15)
: Enabled
User's
User
security
level
Operator
Supervisor
Maintenance
3
Others
5 - 85
staff
15
Production volume
150
St.
Mt.
Security
: Not enabled
Maintenance
screen
(a) Changing displays and operations of objects with changing security levels
The following example shows the object display and operation changed from 0 to 4 of the
security level.
Production volume
Production volume
150
Security
Security
Security level: 0
Security level: 4
Security level
SPECIFICATIONS
Mt.
Screen
status
Operation contents
The object function on the screen cannot be used,
Production volume
because the security level is in a low status

Level 0
Base screen 1 (security level 0)
Each object function (security level 4)
Security
Base screen 1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Display the screen for

changing security levels.
The first touch: Log out of the GOT.
Production volume
The second touch: The screen for login is

displayed.
Level 0
The screen for changing security levels is

Security
Base screen 1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
displayed.
Input the operator

name and password
of the security level 4.
COMMON SETTING
St.
OVERVIEW
(1) Operation example
Setting the security level of each
screen/object in this section)
Input the external

authentication ID of the
security level 4 operator.
Operator authentication (Password
authentication):
Input the operator name and password of the
Input the external authentication ID of the
RFID
(Password authentication)
security level 4 using the external authentication
(External authentication)
Level 4
Input a fingerprint of the
security level 4 user.
Input the password

of security level 4.
device to login.
Operator authentication (Fingerprint
authentication):
Input a fingerprint of the security level 4 user
using the fingerprint unit to login.
Input the password, and change the security
level into 4.
1
(Fingerprint authentication)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(Continued to next page)

5 - 86
ALARM
Level 0
LAMP, SWITCH
security level 4 to login.

Operator authentication (External authentication):
Security level
Screen
status
Operation contents
(From previous page)

Numerlc value
display
Display the object function corresponding to security
Production volume
Level 4
level 4.
150
St.
Mt.
Security
Base screen 1
Remark
Display touch switch
(1) The security level set in the numerical input, the ASCII input and the touch switch.
2 types of security levels (for input and display) can be set in the numerical input,
the ASCII input and the touch switch.
Example: When the security level is set in the numerical input function.
[Security level 5]
Production
volume
600
Security level
For display: 5 For input:10
Production
volume
600
[Security level 10]

Production
volume
Numeric value can be

displayed only.
Numeric value cannot be input.
600 The input cursor is displayed in

order numeric value can be input.
(2) The movement of the input cursor when setting the security function
The cursor will move to the currently available numerical input box or ASCII input
box, when setting security level respectively in plural numerical input and ASCII
input.
Example: Input numeric value when the base screen security level is "2".
150
Security level: 2 Cursor skips the numerical input

Security level: 8 box with security level set as 8.
200
Security level: 2
1500
(b) Displaying window screen with changing security levels

security level.
Production volume screen
Production volume
me
150
St.
5 - 87
150
Mt.
St.
Mt.
Security
Security
Security level: 4
Security level: 8
Security level
Screen
status
Operation contents
OVERVIEW

Production volume
150
Level 4
Mt.
Security
Window screen 2 (security level 8)
Do not display the window screen.
Display window screen

through operating touch
switch.
Base screen 1
SPECIFICATIONS
St.

Production volume
150
Level 4
COMMON SETTING
Mt.
St.
Security
Base screen 1
Display the security
level change screen
Production volume
Touch a touch switch, and then the screen for
150
Level 4
Mt.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
changing security levels is displayed.

The first touch: Log out of the GOT.
Security
The second touch: The screen for login is
displayed.
Base screen 1
The screen for changing security levels is
Change method of the security level in
this section)
1
1
RFID
Level 4
authentication):

Input the password

Level 8

device to login.

authentication):

COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
Input the external

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Input the operator

name and password
5 - 88
ALARM
St.
Security level
Screen
status
Operation contents
(From previous page)
Production volume
Level 8
screen
150
Mt.
St.
Security
Window screen 2
5 - 89
Display a window screen.
Maintenance screen
150
St.
Mt.
Power
supply
Circuit
Oper
Stop
Security
Security
Security level: 8
Security level: 15
Security level
Screen
status
SPECIFICATIONS
Production volume
1
OVERVIEW
(c) Switching base screen with changing security levels

security level.
Operation contents
3
COMMON SETTING
Production volume
150
Level 8
St.
Mt.
Password
Input the external


authentication):
3
3
RFID
device to login.

authentication):
Level 8
Input the password


Level 15
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Input the operator

name and password
Switch screen through

operating touch switch
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Base screen 1
Display the security level change screen

Input the password, and change the security
level into 15.
LAMP, SWITCH
automatically.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Maintenance screen
Switch to base screen 10

Power
supply
Circuit
Oper
Stop
Level 15
Password
5 - 90
ALARM
Base screen 10
2 Change method of the security level

The method for changing security levels differs depending on authentic methods.
The following shows the method for changing security levels for each authentic method.
(1) Operator authentication
To change security levels, log out of the GOT and log in the GOT again using an operator name
with a different security level.
The screens for login and logout can be displayed with the following.
Touch a touch switch (special function switch: set [Log-in/Log-out (Operator Authentication)] ) for
switching to screens for login and logout.
Touch [Login/Logout] in the utility.
The following shows how to change security levels.
1 The screen for logout is displayed, and then touch the OK button.
2 The screen for login is displayed.
3 Log into the GOT as an operator with a different security level.
The method for login varies according to the authentic type.
Password authentication
Input the operator name and the password, and then touch Enter .
External authentication
Input the external authentication ID using the external authentication device.
Fingerprint authentication
Press the finger on the fingerprint reader of the fingerprint unit.
4 To close the screens for login and logout, perform the following operation.
The operation varies according to the authentic type.
Password authentication
Touch
at the top-right of the screens for login and logout.
External authentication/fingerprint authentication
Touch Cancel .
Screen for login (Password authentication)
Screen for login (External authentication/

fingerprint authentication)
5 - 91
1 Display the security level change screen.

2 On the security level change screen, enter the password for the target security level and
touch Enter .
3
COMMON SETTING
at the top-right of the password display
SPECIFICATIONS
The following indicates how to change the security level.
3 To close the security level change screen, touch

window.
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Security level authentication

In order to change the security level, the password of each security level needs to be input on the
security level change screen.
Either of the following methods is available to display the security level change screen.
Use the touch switch for switching to the security level change screen. (Extension: Password)
Display the GOT utility, and touch [security level change]
The level of security is stored in the device storing "security level status" (Level
device) (
Section 3.5 Security Setting)
Current security level can be changed by directly changing the level device value
from the controller.
Sta.
Security level "10" in

current situation
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Vol.
Level device
Production
volume D100
"1" Status Change
into D100 "10"
Line control
500
Oper.
Sta.
Change the display according to the changed security level.
When the value stored in the level device is set to below the security level for the
base screen currently displayed, a screen for changing security levels is displayed.
For returning to the previous screen, input the password for the set security level or
higher.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Line control
5 - 92
ALARM
Security level "1" in

current situation
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Changing security levels with controllers (Security level authentication only)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
To undo temporarily-raised security level (Security level authentication only)

The security level that is increased temporarily for maintenance and inspection
tasks can be restored back to its original state easily.
(a) Inform the users of the normal security level password to restore the security
level through the normal password input operation.
(b) Create the touch switch for restoring the security level to normal level.
Example: When changing the security level to "0" with the touch switch.
Level device: D30
Touch switch: Write "0" into level device D30
Level device
D30 "15"
Control menu
Line 1
All lines
Line 2
Change
Change into
D30 "0"
Write "0" into

level device
Security level: 15
D30
15
Control menu
Line 1
Line 2
Security level: 0
D30 0
Restore to the display of security level 0.
5 - 93
5.8.1
Security function setting
OVERVIEW
The following setting is needed when using the security function.
1 Setting authentic method

Set the authentic method.
Select an authentic method, and then set the settings for the authentic method.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 3.5 Security Setting
2 Setting the security level of each screen/object

Set security level in the screen (using security function) and object function.
(1) Object function
Set the security levels in the setting dialogue box for each object function.
(2) Screen
1 In the workspace (the project tab), select the screen whose security function is to be set, and
right click the mouse to select [Property] in the menu.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5.8.1 Security function setting
5 - 94
ALARM
2 Display the Screen Property dialogue box.

Set the security level (that is set to the screen) in [Security] of the basic tab.
Set security level
5.8.2
Precautions
1 Precautions for drawing

When the GOT is started up, a screen always appears regardless of the screen security settings and
security level.
Make sure to design screens so that the screen without security settings will appear at GOT start up
and it will be switched to the screen with security settings by performing screen switching.
2 Making a note of the password

The already registered password cannot be checked later. Therefore, always make a note of the
password.
When passwords are forgotten, the following operations cannot be executed.
Changing security levels on the GOT
Deleting or changing passwords on GT Designer2
Deleting or changing the operator information on the GOT
For solutions when forgetting passwords, refer to the following.
Section 3.5.6 Precautions
5 - 95

5.8.2 Precautions
8.
ALARM
This chapter explains the functions that display following alarms.
1 Alarm types
The GOT can detect the alarms as shown below.
(1) Displaying the user-created comment as an alarm message
It is possible to display the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
This feature is specific to user alarm and advanced user alarm, and suitable for the case in which
the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
M100: OFF
M101: OFF
ON
ON
M100 Temp. error
M100Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
M101
of theFuse
powererror
Replace the fuse

module with
new one.
Detail
Detail
Touch!
(2) Displaying an error of GOT, controller or network as an alarm

It is possible to display the error code and error message when an error occurs on the GOT,
controller or network.
This feature is specific to system alarm and advanced system alarm, and suitable for the case in
which the GOT, controller or network error needs to be displayed.
Error
occurance
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
8-1
1
2 Functions for displaying alarms
Alarm function
Section 8.1.1 Alarm function
Advanced alarm function
Section 8.1.2 Advanced alarm function
OVERVIEW
The functions for displaying alarms are as shown below.
(1) When using GT11 or GT10

The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000
only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Comment displayed when an alarm occurs

To display the user-created comments as alarm messages, it is necessary to
register the comments in advance.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration)
Alarm list display

Alarm function
Alarm history display
Display comment
Register to the basic comment.

Register to the basic comment or the
comment group
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Function
Scrolling alarm display

Register to the comment group.
Advanced system alarm

Advanced alarm popup display
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
function
Advanced user alarm
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Advanced alarm
8-2
ALARM
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

This section explains the alarm-relevant functions, and differences between the alarm function and
advanced alarm function.
Select the alarm by referring this section.
to Advanced
Description with Specific
applies to the advanced alarm function only.
Alarm Function
Description without icon is common to the alarm function and advanced alarm function.
1 Displaying preset comments at alarm occurrence

Any comment can be registered for displaying as a user alarm.
Set a comment
M100 : OFF
M101 : OFF
ON
ON
Display
Temp. error
Fuse error
Detail
Detailed Display
Temp. error
Replace the fuse
of theFuse
powererror
module with
new one.
Detail
Touch!
Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function
(a) Displaying the comments for each hierarchy

The different comments for an alarm can be displayed on the three hierarchies (higher, middle
and general), respectively.
(
Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm))
Therefore, it is possible to provide the alarm information ranging from simple to details, in the
hierarchical order.
8-3
Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1
Line1
Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Display of higher
hierarchy alarms
Comment
Check
The alarms occurred

on the factory lines
are displayed.
Line2
OVERVIEW
Factory
Touch!
Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1
Equipment A
Equipment B
Display of middle
hierarchy alarms
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
The alarms occurred

on line 2 are
displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Switching from higher hierarchy

to middle hierarchy
3
Switching from middle
hierarchy to general hierarchy
Occurred
Error
occurrence
Control
module
Error
occurrence
04/6/1
04/6/1
Pwr. module error

Control module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
The module on which

the alarm occurred
actually is displayed
with details.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Driving
module
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Power
module
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Error
occurrence
Control
module
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Driving
module
8-4
ALARM
Power
module
Display of general
alarm
Comment
COMMON SETTING
Touch!
Alarm Function
(b) Switching the language

The language of the comment displayed on the screen can be switched by the device value
(language switching device).
Comment group settings
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Japanese
Language Switching Device :
Remark
English
Language switching
For details, refer to the following.
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device
8-5
Japanese
English
(1) Settings for displaying the comment on each of three hierarchies.

The comments can be set in a single group or divided into multiple groups.
Therefore, it is possible to classify the comments for each hierarchy by dividing
into multiple comment groups.
OVERVIEW
Setting the comments of higher, middle and

general hierarchies in a comment group.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting and dividing the comments of

higher, middle and general hierarchies
into multiple comment groups.
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Hierarchy displayed when an alarm occurs

The hierarchy of the comments displayed at alarm occurrence (initial display
hierarchy) can be set.
Use the touch switch or similar to move to upper or lower hierarchy.
2 Confirming device status by displaying information on alarms occurred (occurrence

time and so on)
Restored time
Occurred frequency
The above information help to confirm the device statuses and determine the cause of productivity
deterioration.
Alarm Function
In addition, the following items are available.

Alarm status
Down time*2
Level*3
Group*3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Cumulative time
*1
*1
Total alarm occurrence time (including the time when alarms occurred in the past)
*2
Time from alarm occurrence to restoration
*3
It is possible to decide the contents to be displayed for each level and group by setting these items for each
alarm.
LAMP, SWITCH
Checked time
Comment
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8-6
ALARM
Occurred time
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The alarm function can display the following items (6 types).
3 Alarm display operation

(1) Change the display order by the settings
Set the order in which alarms will be displayed.
It can be set in the ascending/descending order of the occurrence date or device.
When displaying alarms in the descending order of occurrence date
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
The display items can be

changed by the settings.
The display order can be set.
Alarm Function
The display content can be sorted in the ascending/descending order of occurred date, comment,
alarm status, restored date, checked date, occurred frequency, cumulative time, down time, level,
or group.
D10 : 1
D10 : 0
Occurred
Comment Restore
Comment Restore
11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 11:50:57
04/6/1
02:30:16
Motor error
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 13:30:14
04/6/1
04:33:12
In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 09:30:18
04/6/1
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1
05:22:35
Fuel error
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1
11:35:52
04/6/1
04:33:12
In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49
04/6/1
05:22:35
Fuel error
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1
02:30:16
Motor error
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 09:30:18
04/6/1 19:18:20
Displaying alarms in the order of occurrence date
Remark
Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1 19:18:20
04/6/1 13:30:14
04/6/1 11:50:57
Displaying alarms in the order of recovery date
The display order can be changed by using the device value as well.
(
The following Section (2) Using the device to operate the alarm display)
(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display

(a) Displaying/Hiding an alarm
An alarm can be displayed or hidden using the device.
M100 : OFF
ON
M100 : ON
OFF
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error
Alarms are displayed.
8-7
Alarms are hidden.
(b) Refining the display content

It is possible to refine and decide the display content using the device.
(Display content can be refined according to the hierarchy, level, group, display order and the
alarm ID and comment group set in the advanced user alarm.)
Comment
Group
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Oil error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuel error
SPECIFICATIONS
When refining to the alarms of group 2
Occurred
1
OVERVIEW
Alarm Function
COMMON SETTING
As level or group can be set for alarms, the display content can be refined for each level or
group. (Also, two or more items can be specified as refinement conditions.)
Alarm Status (Occur, Check, Restored),
Function
Level, Group
Group comment
Alarm list display

Alarm function
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(3) Setting the display color according to alarm types

The alarm types and others can be identified visually when different font colors are displayed on
each alarm comment.
Font color settings for the each alarm function are shown below.
: Applicable : Not applicable
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example)
Set device A to group 1,
and device B to group 2.

Advanced user alarm

LAMP, SWITCH
Advanced alarm popup

display
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Comment
Alarm types and so on can

be identified visually!
8-8
ALARM
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52
4 Display alarm only when alarm occurs

By using the advanced alarm popup display function and the scrolling alarm display function, the GOT
can display an alarm without alarm display objects. (only when the alarm occurs.)
The GOT displays alarms even some objects are placed on the alarm display position on the screen.
Alarm Function
For the advanced alarm function, the screen switching, stage hierarchy switching, and detailed display
are possible when touching the advanced alarm popup display that is displayed on the screen.
X1 : OFF
ON
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
Error
Alarm Processing Screen

Occurred
Displaying an alarm regardless of

the screen (scrolled from right to left)
Touch!
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
Upper hierarchy
Error occurrence
Comment
04/6/1
Check
Screen Switching/
Stage hierarchy switching is possible.
(1) Availability of this function

(a) For GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000
Only the advanced alarm popup display function can display alarms
regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the advanced
alarm popup display function.
(b) For GT11 and GT10
Only the scrolling alarm display function can display alarms regardless of the
screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the scrolling alarm
display function.
(2) Scrolling alarm display function of the GOT900 series
(a) For GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000
GT15 and SoftGOT1000 do not support the scrolling alarm display function
that is supported by the GOT900 series. Therefore, use the advanced alarm
popup display function instead of it.
(
Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display)
(b) For GT11 and GT10
Use the scrolling alarm display function of the GOT 900 series.
(
8-9
Section 8.9 Scrolling Alarm Display)
Comments can be scrolled across the screen from right to left when an alarm occurs.
This floating alarm display is suitable when displaying an alarm in small area, as all the parts of the
comment can be scrolled and completely displayed on the screen.
Restore Check
04/6/1
Error occurred on
04/6/1
Drive
04/6/1
04/6/1
Control
04/6/1
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
P/S module
Error occurred on
04/6/1
drive module
Error occurred on
04/6/1
control module
Restore Check
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred Comment
P/S
Scrolling comments across the screen from left to right.
For each alarm function, whether or not to set the scrolling alarm display is shown below.
: Applicable : Not applicable
Function
Alarm list display

Alarm function
Alarm history display *1,
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Advanced user alarm,

Advanced system alarm,

Advanced alarm popup display
GT10 is available only.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*1
COMMON SETTING
Restore
04/6/1
8 - 10
ALARM
Occurred Comment
OVERVIEW
5 Scrolling comments on screen
6 Writing alarm information to device

The total No. of alarms which occurred so far and which are currently occurring can be output to the
device.
D200 : 15
D201 : 3
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Details
Total alarms : 15
Current alarms : 3
Alarm Function
The alarm information can be written to the device by touching the corresponding part.
The following shows the information (15 types) that can be written.
Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Occurred Date
Occurred Time
Restored Date
RestoredTime
Checked Date
Checked Time
Level
Group
Occurred Frequency
Cumulative Time
Down Time
This enables the detailed message on the selected alarm to appear as a comment.
The data, which cannot be displayed due to insufficient screen area, can be written in the device.
Alarm on line 1 being selected

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!
8 - 11
Switching the comment on the screen

according to the value written in the
device (comment display is used.)
1
The alarm monitoring device can be set freely by the user.
In the alarm function, the monitoring device and alarm display can be set on a single setting screen.
(The monitoring device can be set for each object placed.)
Monitoring device settings
OVERVIEW
7 User-Setting of alarm monitoring device
Alarm display settings
M100
M101
SPECIFICATIONS
Display
Temp. error
Fuse error
Alarm Function
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3
Advanced Alarm Display
Display
Make the settings so that

the alarm will be displayed
as alarm ID1.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
In addition, set the switching

device of alarm ID (advanced
user alarm observation) to
GD0.
Switch
GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.

Number of objects that can be set

Advanced user alarm: up to 255
Advanced system alarm: up to one
Make multiple monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation), and switch the alarms on the screen.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
Make the settings so that the

alarm will appear as alarm
ID1 (single-line display).
the alarm will appear as
alarm ID1 (multiple-line
display).
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm ID1
LAMP, SWITCH
Display
Advanced Alarm Observation
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The monitoring device (advanced alarm observation) and alarm display (advanced alarm display) are
set on the respective screens.
This enables the following settings to be made.
COMMON SETTING
Single-line display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
8 - 12
ALARM
Multiple-line display
Providing different displays based on the same monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation).
8 Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure) and utilization of stored data
(1) Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure)
By storing alarm data in the memory card as an alarm log file, alarm history can be retained when
GOT is powered off.
The history of user alarms can be stored in the memory card.
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
Alarm data can be stored

in the memory card!
Alarm Function
The advanced alarm function supports the following operations.

Storing system alarm history in a memory card.
Selecting whether to store alarm data or not for each monitoring device setting (advanced alarm
observation).
Setting a folder to store alarm data and the file name for each monitoring device setting
(advanced alarm observation).
Storing alarm data at an arbitrary timing using the device (rise, fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and
OFF Sampling).
Automatically reading alarm data from the memory card that includes an alarm log file when the
GOT is power off and on.
8 - 13
Occurred
OVERVIEW
(2) Output to a CSV file

Alarm data can be output to a CSV file.
The alarm data output to a CSV file can be displayed by on PC and so on.
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 8.8 Uploading

Resource Data [GOT to PC])
Reading out the CSV file stored in a memory card using a PC.
Alarm Function
Alarm data can be converted into a text file as well.

(3) Converting alarm log file
Alarm log files can be converted to CSV files or Unicode text files.
The following methods are available.
Converting with GOT utility
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Store the output data within a PC in either of the following methods.

Uploading resource data by GT Designer2.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
6
LAMP, SWITCH
GT16 User's Manual

GT15 User's Manual
Converting with Convert Trigger
8.2.5 Setting items
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8 - 14
ALARM
Alarm Function
(4) Utilization of the alarm data stored in the memory card

The stored alarm data can be displayed in graph form on the GOT.
Historical graph
Total graph
The history of alarm occurrence is displayed in a historical
The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed in a
graph.
total graph.
Alarm history is displayed as the symbols below.

: Occurred time
: Checked time
: Restored time
8 - 15
Alarm function
OVERVIEW
8.1.1
This section explains alarm functions by the type and differences among the functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Alarm function types

The alarm functions are classified as shown below.
Alarm Function
3
Alarm History Display
(1)Alarm list
User
User
Alarm
User
Alarm
This section (2)Alarm

history display
COMMON SETTING
This section
display
System
Alarm
This section (3)

Select an alarm function from the display alarms, the display items, and the features.
Function
Alarm list display
(User alarm)
Alarm list display
(System alarm)
Display alarm
User alarm
Display item
monitored by each device.
Alarm list display
(1)
User alarm
Restored, Checked,
Cumulative Time,
Displaying an alarm history and

storing data into a memory
This section
card are available.
(2)
With or without objects, alarms

User alarm
Comment, Occurred
can be displayed on the
This section
screen.
(3)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
display
This section
Occurred Time
Occurred Frequency
Scrolling alarm
5
Display each object that is
Error message,
Comment, Occurred,
Reference
Comment, Occurred
Error code,
System alarm
Feature
LAMP, SWITCH
User
Alarm
User
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
System

8.1.1 Alarm function
8 - 16
ALARM
User
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm List Display
(1) Alarm list display

The function that displays the alarms created by the user (user alarms) and system errors (system
alarms).
Use this function when displaying alarms that are currently occurring.
(a) User alarm display
The function that displays the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm
occurs.
Suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
M100: OFF
M101: OFF
ON
ON
M100 Temp. error
M100Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
M101
of theFuse
powererror
Replace the fuse

module with
new one.
Detail
Detail
Touch!
(b) System alarm display

The function that displays the error code and error message when an error occurs on the
controller, GOT or network.
Use this function when displaying an error on the controller, GOT or network.
Error
occurance
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
8 - 17

Up Down Check
M100 : OFF
ON
Occurred
Message
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
10:45
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm
Occurred
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Alarm history display

When a user alarm occurs, this function stores the user-created comments, occurred time, restored
time, checked time, cumulative time (time from alarm occurrence to fixing), and occurred frequency
and displays the alarm history in list.
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.
3
Alarm Detail
Display
Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Replace the fuse of

the power module in
Line1 with new one.
Up Down Check
Alarm details are displayed on the comment window, base screen or window screen.
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
10:45
12:10
Alarm checked time is

displayed by the touch switch.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Create the touch switch by setting a key code on it.
System Restoration
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
12:45
10:45
12:10
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Up Down Check
Message
The restoration time

is displayed.
M100 : ON
OFF
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
After System
Restoration
Occurred

8 - 18
ALARM
Alarm
Checked
Time
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(3) Scrolling alarm display

This function displays the user-created comments and the occurred time when a user alarm
occurs.
Even if the alarm display object is not allocated on the screen, the GOT can display long comments
that extend the alarm display area.
X1:OFF
ON
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
Error
occurrence
Error occurrence
(1) Comments need to be set

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
Function
Alarm list display
Alarm function

Display comment
Register to the basic comment.
Register to the basic comment or the
comment group
Register to the comment group.
(2) Alarms that can be stored in a memory card

Alarms can be stored by the alarm history display function only.
However, the system alarm history cannot be stored in a memory card, as the
system alarm history settings cannot be made using the alarm history display.
Use the advanced alarm function when storing the system alarm history.
(3) Using alarm list display and alarm history display together
The alarm list display and alarm history display can be used together.
Remark
(1) Details and usage of each function

For the details and usage, refer to the following.
Section 8.6 User Alarm Display
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display
Section 8.8 Alarm History Display
Section 8.9 Scrolling Alarm Display
(2) Differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm function
For the differences, refer to the following.
Section 8.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms
8 - 19

OVERVIEW
8.1.2
When using GT11 or GT10

The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000
only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Advanced alarm function types

Make the settings of the advanced alarm function in the advanced alarm observation.
The set alarms are displayed as the advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup display.
Advanced Alarm Function
Advanced Alarm Settings

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
Advanced Alarm Popup Display

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
A series of operations from advanced alarm settings to display is shown below.

1 Settings in the advanced alarm observation
Advanced alarm observation

(Advanced User Alarms) settings
[Advanced Alarm Observation] of GT Designer2.

(Advanced System Alarms) settings
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Make the settings in advance in the [Common]
Alarm ID1
Advanced System Alarm
Alarm ID2
Advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms)

can be set for multiple user IDs (Up to 255 objects).
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
this section
Only one advanced alarm observation (advanced

system alarm) objects can be set.
(Continued to the next page)

8.1.2 Advanced alarm function
8 - 20
ALARM
this section
SPECIFICATIONS
The advanced alarm functions are more advanced than the alarm functions
2 Object Placement
Place objects of the alarms that are set in section
on the previous page.
Perform placement in the [Object]

[Advanced Alarm Display] of GT Designer2.
Set the touch mode, display items, display conditions and so forth on the placed objects.
In addition, to display alarms regardless of the presence/absence of the object (regardless of the display
screen), make the settings in the [Common]
[Advanced Alarm Popup Display] of GT Designer2.
Placement as Advanced Alarm

Placement as Advanced Alarm
Display (Advanced User Alarms) *1 Display (Advanced System Alarms)*2
Base screen 1 (The occurrence date,
comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID1 are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore
Base screen 3 (The system alarms of all

statuses are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore
Setting of Advanced
Alarm Popup Display
Alarms are displayed on the screen
regardless of the presence/absence of the
object for the advanced alarm display.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

alarm ID1 will appear.
Base screen 2 (The occurrence date,

comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID2 are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.
An error has occurred
Window screen 2 (The system alarms that

are currently occurring are displayed.)
Set the method for displaying alarms from

the following.
Display advanced user alarms only
Display advanced system alarms only
Display advanced user alarms or
advanced system alarms
Occurred
Comment Restore

Window screen 1 (The comment, level, and

group of the alarm set as alarm ID1 are
displayed.)
Comment Level
Group

Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display content
can be set for each object.
Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display
content can be set for each object.
To display advanced alarms on the screen

regardless of the presence/absence of
display objects for advanced alarms, make
the settings of advanced alarm popup
display.
*1
Select the advanced alarm display (advanced user alarms) when displaying the alarms set in the advanced alarm
*2
Select the advanced alarm display (advanced system alarms) when displaying the alarms set in the advanced
observation (advanced user alarms).

alarm observation (advanced system alarms).
8 - 21

1
As the multiple sets of alarm settings can be made on the advanced alarm
observation (advanced user alarm), each of the sets should be identified by the
alarm ID.
Specify the alarm ID for each set when placing the object as the advanced alarm
display (advanced user alarm); the alarms will appear based on specified alarm IDs.
OVERVIEW
Alarm ID
Advanced user alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
Advanced alarm observation settings

Advanced system alarms
Alarm ID2
Multiple sets of alarm settings!
Place as advanced alarm display

Occurred

Restore
Occurred

Base screen 1 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID1 are displayed.)
Comment
Comment
Level

Window screen 1 (The comment,

level, and group of the alarm set as
alarm ID1 are displayed.)
Restore

Base screen 2 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID2 are displayed.)
Group
Comment
Occurred
Base screen 3 (The system alarms

of all statuses are displayed.)
Comment
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Restore
Restore

Window screen 2 (The system

alarms that are currently occurring
are displayed.)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Comment
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 22
ALARM
Occurred
COMMON SETTING
Alarm ID1
2 Relation between advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display

(advanced alarm popup display)
Advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display (advanced alarm popup display) can be set
separately.
The following setting patterns are available.
(1) Placing different display contents based on a set of advanced alarm observation settings
Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
Placement as
advanced alarm display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Display on a line according to the

settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)
Alarm ID1
Display on multiple lines according

to the settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)
Temp. error
Single-line display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Multiple-line display
Different settings can be made for each display
object! (initial display hierarchy, touch mode,
display item, display condition and so on)
(2) Switching the display on the object according to the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation.
Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
Alarm ID1
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)
Placement as
advanced alarm display
Set the switching device
of alarm ID (advanced user
alarm observation) to GD0
Alarm ID2
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Switch

Switching the display on a screen according to
the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation!
8 - 23

(3) Settings for whether to popup or hide advanced alarms

Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
OVERVIEW
Alarm ID1
Settings of advanced alarm

popup display
(Settings in the advanced
alarm popup display)
B 348 B 348
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 13:20 Advanced a
Only the errors of alarm ID1 and

alarm ID3 are popped up.
Alarm ID3
(Popup)
Whether to popup or hide can be

set for each set of advanced alarm
observation settings!
(1) When only advanced alarm observation settings are made

When only advanced alarm observation settings are made, no alarm is displayed.
However, the device is monitored and saved based on the advanced alarm
observation settings.
To display alarms, select either advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup
display.
Use a set of settings throughout the project
Make the settings for each screen
COMMON SETTING
(Hide)
A 1254 A 1254
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Alarm ID2

Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display)

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 13:20 Power module
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Restore
11:25
Check
Pop up generated alarms

regardless of the screen.
10:45
Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm

the details of the alarms and take measures.
(2) Comments displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object

The comments that will be displayed on the advanced user alarm observation
object must be registered in advance.
(Register the comments as a comment group.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
04/6/1 10:25
04/6/1 8:05
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

8 - 24
ALARM
(Popup)
Settings in the
advanced alarm popup display
Remark
Details and usage of advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display
For details and usage, refer to the following.
Section 8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User Alarm)
Section 8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)
Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced
System Alarm)
Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
8 - 25

1
OVERVIEW
8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation

(Advanced User Alarm)
The advanced alarm observation is the function that saves the alarm occurrence time when the condition of
the device set for alarm detection is met (the bit turns OFF to ON/word device range) and the comments in
the GOT internal memory, and displays these information as alarm history in list format.
Before setting advanced user alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
This section explains the advanced user alarms of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced user alarms.

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User Alarm)
8 - 26
ALARM
8.2.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
For advanced user alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
Make the settings by referring to the following description, if necessary.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only
Relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) and others
Confirm the relevant functions when making settings.
For those functions, refer to the corresponding sections.
1 Auxiliary settings (
Section 4.4 Auxiliary Settings)
Check for overlapping objects
If objects are overlapping each other, a message is displayed on the GOT.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
As GOT may not display the overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen data.
Setting items
[Carry out check for overlapping
objects within GOT]
Setting the order of displaying objects on the GOT

The order of displaying objects on the GOT can be adjusted to that of the overlapped
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
objects on GT Designer2.
<Order of overlapped objects on GT Designer2>
2)
<Order of displaying objects on the GOT>
1)
Setting items
2)
3)
3)
1)
[Adjust object display order in

GOT to the one in GT
Designer2]
8 - 27

8.2.1 Relevant settings
1
2 System information (
Section 3.6 System Information Setting)
Drive A/B Full Signal*1
(Write device: System signal 2-2. b0, b1)
Notifies of the status of access to the drive.
Notifies that the drive is short of capacty.
2
Drive A
Drive A
Available capacity is
less than 1KB
The file is being accessed
SPECIFICATIONS
Drive A/B File Accessing Signal*1
OVERVIEW
3
COMMON SETTING
Drive A/B File Access Error Signal*1*2

Notifies that access to the drive has failed.
Drive A
*1
The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full,
however, operate differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
Secton8.2.6
*2
(8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
The drive A/B file access error signal is reset by the file access error reset signal (read device: system signals
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
File access error
3 GOT internal devices (
Secton2.9.1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
1-2.b0).
GOT special register (GS))
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only
Buffer Flash Forced Saving Signal (GS520.b0)
Saves the data in the buffering area to a memory card.*1
Alarm data are saved only when the "Save Alarm Log File" item is checked on the File Save tab.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 28
ALARM
*1
LAMP, SWITCH
Buffering area
8.2.2
Before setting
This section describes the settings and function needed for using the advanced user alarm display.
1 Alarm detection conditions and range

(1) Detection conditions
Rising (OFF
ON) or falling (ON
Value of the word device
OFF) of the bit device
(2) Collection timing (watch cycle)

Alarms are collected in the GOT buffering area and updated in the cycle set by the user (1 to
3600s), regardless of the screen displayed.
(3) Setting range
(a) Number of device points that can be monitored (alarm (device) points): 32767 max.
(b) Alarm collection pattern (alarm ID)
For advanced user alarms, multiple sets of alarm collection settings are made for each alarm
purpose (255 max.).
Set the alarm condition and collection timing (watch cycle)
/alarm (device) points for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID : 10
(Alarms for maintenance)
D10
D20
Settings
40 "Oil refill"
500 "Fuel refill"
Alarm condition
: Word device value
Watch cycle
: 3600s
Alarm (Device) points : 50
Alarm ID : 50
(Alarms for emergency use)
M10:OFF
M20:OFF
M30:OFF
M40:OFF
ON "Line A error stop"

ON "Line B error stop"
ON "Line C error stop"
ON "Line D error stop"
Settings
Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 2s
Alarm ID : 255 max.

(Alarm ID number can be set in the
range of 1 to 32767.)
Alarm (Device) Points : 32767 max.
(Total number of alarm (device)
points set to alarm IDs)
Alarm ID : 900
M80:OFF
M81:OFF
M82:OFF
M83:OFF
ON "Confirm the battery"

ON "Confirm hydraulic pressure"
ON "Confirm internal pressure"
ON "Confirm the fuse"
Settings
Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 60s
(1) Settings for each alarm ID

The functions set for the advanced user alarm operate for each alarm ID.
When displaying alarms and saving the history simultaneously, set them with an
alarm ID.
(2) Display of advanced user alarms
Display advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm display.
System Alarm)
8 - 29

8.2.2 Before setting
1
(1) Collection flow
Advanced user alarms are collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory) in the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s) regardless of the screen displayed.
The collected user alarm data are temporarily saved in the buffering area, and then displayed as
alarms on the GOT.
User area
(C drive + add-on memory)
Comment
3
COMMON SETTING
Buffering area
The advanced user alarm data

collected in the buffering area
are displayed as alarms.
This section
Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory)
Data to be collected differ depending on the collection mode.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Clearing data in the buffering area

COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark

8 - 30
ALARM
Occurred
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error

04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm data are collected in the buffering area in

the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s), regardless
of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
OVERVIEW
2 Collection flow and collection mode
(2) Alarm collection modes

The collection mode is selected from three options: historical mode, cumulative mode, and no
alarm collection. (
Secton8.2.5
(1) Basic tab)
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
Example: When displaying data by advanced alarm display
Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 20:00 P/S module error
04/06/01 18:30 Hydraulic pressure error Chk
04/06/01 16:10 Drive moduIe error
Chk
1)
2)
Restore Check OccurFreq DownTime Cum.Time Level Group

2
1
1
2
1
1
18:50
16:30
2
00:20
00:40
2
1
16:20
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Description
Info
displayed
Historical mode
Cumulative mode
1) Occurred
The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Comment
The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
No alarm collection
The status of the alarm on the screen is displayed.

3) Status
4) Restore
Ocr
: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk
: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr
: Alarm has been restored
The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.
Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
(
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display)
5) Check
Comment
Pwr. module error
Restore Check
Comment
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00
Check
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)

The number of alarm occurrence times is
6) Occur Freq
displayed.
Time from alarm occurrence to restoration is
7) Down Time
displayed
Total alarm occurrence time including the past
alarm occurrence time (total down time) is
displayed.
Cumulative Time
8) Cum. Time
A/O
status
(M10) OFF
A/O
(1st)
ON
OFF
D/T A
A/O
(3rd)
ON
A/O
(2nd)
ON
OFF
D/T B
A/O : Alarm occurrence status

D/T : Down time
D/T C
time
The level set to the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified according to the alarm level.
9) Level
Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or alarms at particular level only can be displayed.
(
Secton8.2.3
Hierarchical alarm example)
The group set on the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified into some groups according to the content.
10) Group
Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or alarms in a particular group only can be displayed.
(
8 - 31
Secton8.2.3
Hierarchical alarm example)

(b) Cumulative mode

In this mode, the information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time collected for each alarm type.
1
OVERVIEW
(a) Historical mode

In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the user area (C drive + add-on memory) every
time an alarm occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(c) No alarm collection

In this mode, only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed.
The display disappears when the alarm is restored.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 32
ALARM
(3) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced alarm display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
ON
ON
OFF
"Temp. error"
(M10 : OFF ON)
OFF
ON
"Fuse error"
(M20 : OFF ON)
11:30
1)
*1
12:00
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user *1
15:30
3)
18:25
4)
19:00
5)
Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.

(
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display )
(a) Historical mode

The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
Not collected in the historical mode.
1) "Temp. error" occurs.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Restore
Check
OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time
"Temp. error" occurs!
Temp. error
Fuse error
2) "Temp. error" is checked.

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Restore
Temp. error
Fuse error
Check
"Temp. error" is
checked.
12:00
Check
3) Restored from "Temp. error"
Occurred
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)
Comment
Restore
Check
Temp. error
Fuse error
15:30
12:00
Restoration date/time
is displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error
10:25 Fuse error
Restore
Check
15:30
12:00
Restore
Check
19:00
15:30
12:00
A new line is added

and displayed.
5) "Temp. error" restored

Occurred
8 - 33
Comment
04/06/01
04/06/01
18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01
10:25 Fuse error

is displayed.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
04/06/01
10:25
Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time
Temp. error
Fuse error
1
1
00:00
00:00
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
SPECIFICATIONS
2) "Temp. error" is checked

Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
1
1
00:00
00:00
"Temp. error" is
checked
Check

04/06/01
04/06/01
11:30
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
15:30 12:00
12:00
1
1
04:00
04:00
00:00
Restoration date/time,
down time, and cumulative
time are displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
18:25
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
04:00
00:00
2
1
The occurrence time when the

alarm occurred again is displayed
on the same line of the alarm.
Frequency is increased by one.

18:25
04/06/01
10:25
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
19:00
2
12:00
00:35
04:35
00:00
Restoration date/time and

down time are displayed.
The time when the alarm occurred
is added to the cumulative time.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
04/06/01
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
11:30
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Comment
04/06/01

8 - 34
ALARM
Occurred
1
OVERVIEW
(b) Cumulative mode

The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
(c) No alarm collection

Only the alarms that are currently occurring are collected.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Alarms are not collected in the no alarm collection.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
"Temp. error" is
checked.
Check

Occurred
04/06/01
Comment
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)

Fuse error
The restored alarm

is cleared.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurs again.

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
18:25
10:25
The alarm that occurred

again is displayed.
Temp. error
Fuse error

Occurred
04/06/01
Comment
10:25
The restored alarm

is cleared.
Fuse error
Display of advanced user alarms

Advanced user alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
System Alarm)
8 - 35

1
3 Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data
OVERVIEW
Advanced alarm data are saved in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory).
Advanced alarm data are cleared at the following timings.
(1) Power-off or reset of GOT
(2) When the following settings are made within utilities
2
Description
Communication setting
[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]
Display
[Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]
Operation
[Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]
Self check
[I/O check]
GOT setup
Program/data control
Debug & self check
OS installation, project download
Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button

COMMON SETTING
Main menu
(3) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
(4) Setting and operations by the user
The history of restored alarms can be freely cleared by the user.
(a) Clear by device
All restored alarm data are cleared by turning on the "buffer clear."
(1) Basic tab)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Secton8.2.5
(b) Clear by touch switch
10:25
09:10
Drive module error

Restore
15:30
Delete
Occurred
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10
Comment
Restore
Drive module error
(Key code: clear one log FFB6H

clear all logs FFB7H)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
Hydraulic error
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
One or all restored alarm logs can be cleared. (

switches for advanced alarm display)

8 - 36
ALARM
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
4 Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure

(1) Outline of data retention under power failure
By saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card as alarm log file, the data are retained
even when GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the alarm log file is read
out automatically, and the historical status of the advanced user alarm saved before GOT power-off
is restored.
Memory card
Data
are
stored
The timing of saving data in the memory card can be set freely
(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can be saved by pressing the touch switch as well.
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
DDD EEE FFF
DDD EEE FFF
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
Power off
The status saved

before power-off
Current status
Power on
The status saved before power-off
and the current status are displayed.
Precautions for starting up the GOT

When restoring the advanced user alarm data by reading it out from a memory card,
insert the memory card to the GOT before turning ON for the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned ON, the data by reading out the data from the memory card
can not be restored.
Also when the memory card is inserted after turning ON, the advanced user alarm
data in the memory card is overwritten at saving its data to memory card.
Remark
Advanced alarm data saved in the memory card

Advanced alarm data are created in the memory card for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3
8 - 37
File name (can be changed freely)

AAM00001.G1A
AAM00002.G1A
AAM00003.G1A

(2) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced user alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)

OVERVIEW
monitored using the device.(
writing
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Writing
Write error
COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14
Save
4
File name to be saved and saving timing
A file can be named freely for each alarm ID.
(
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
Save by the store trigger device (
(3) File save tab)
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced
Save by buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0) (

register (GS))
6
Secton2.9.1
GOT special
LAMP, SWITCH
Save by the touch switch (

alarm display)
Secton8.2.5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Method of data retention under power failure

Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the following
methods. The file names and so forth need to be set on the File Save tab in advance.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(4)

8 - 38
ALARM
(3)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Status during writing can be monitored.
(5) Required memory capacity

For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure,
refer to the following.
(
Section 2.4 Specifications of Available Object Functions)

(1) Information to be saved
The alarm log file content to be saved in the memory card varies depending on
the collection mode. (
Secton8.2.2
Collection flow and collection mode)
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the memory card
After advanced user alarm data is stored as alarm log file in the memory card, the
file can be utilized as follows.
The occurrence history of advanced user alarms can be displayed as a graph.
In the historical mode
: Displayed as a historical graph
In the cumulative mode
: Displayed as a total graph
For a display on personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to CSV
file/Unicode text file with GOT utility or Convert Trigger.
Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file
By checking "Auto Backup at Save" on the File Save tab, the alarm log file just
before saved can be saved as a backup file.
Secton8.2.5
8 - 39
(3) File save tab

1
5 Converting alarm log files
OVERVIEW
The alarm log files created with the advanced user alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to CSV files or Unicode text files for displaying and editing the files on the
personal computer.
The following explains how to convert alarm log files.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) How to create CSV files or Unicode text files with utility
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to CSV files or Unicode text files with the utility.
1 Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch G1A->CSV or
G1A->TXT button for converting the file.
COMMON SETTING
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2 Store the CSV file or Unicode text file on the personal computer with one of the following
methods.
Transferring files with GT Designer2
Select [Communication]
[To/From GOT...] from the menu, and transfer the file in the
Resourse Upload -> Computer tab.
Storing files in CF card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or
USB memory using the personal computer.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
LAMP, SWITCH
CF card/
USB memory
CF card/
USB memory
Alarm log file
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm log file
3 Edit the converted CSV file or Unicode text file displayed on the personal computer.
How to operate utility
Refer to the following manual for the details.

GT16 User's Manual (Section 14.2 Various Data Control)

8 - 40
ALARM
GT15 User's Manual (Section 13.4 Alarm Information)
(2) How to create CSV files or Unicode text files with device
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a memory card to CSV files or Unicode text files with
turning on the specified device.
When converting the files to CSV files or Unicode text files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to CSV files or Unicode text files with turning on the
convert trigger device.
Advanced alarm common setting
File conversion (the File Save tab in the Advanced User Alarm Observation screen)
Section 8.2.5 Setting items
Precautions for file conversion with external control device

Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced user alarm
observation that creates a file to be converted into the alarm ID device. (For the
advanced user alarm observation: 1 to 32767)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the
advanced user alarm observation, the alarm log file cannot be converted to a CSV
file or Unicode text file.
8 - 41

8.2.3
Useful information
The figure below shows an example of the system in which alarms are hierarchized. The comment
registration required for the system and the application example are explained in this section.
Line1
Higher Alarm
Line2
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A
Middle Alarm
Equipment B
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Hierarchical alarm example
OVERVIEW
This section explains some useful functions when using advanced user alarms.
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
General Alarm
Setting example
Set comments that will be displayed at alarm occurrence for each hierarchy (Higher hierarchy, Middle
hierarchy, and General hierarchy) as shown below.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Settings in the Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box (device tab)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Higher Comment No.
Middle Comment No.
M10
ON
1 Pwr. module error
1 Equipment A error
1 Line1 error
M11
ON
M12
ON
2 Drive module error

3 Control module error
1 Equipment A error
1 Equipment A error
1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error
4
5
M13
M14
ON
ON
1 Pwr. module error

2 Drive module error
2 Equipment B error
2 Equipment B error
1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error
Detail Type
Reset
Detail No.
Level
Group
Comment Window
1 Hydraulic pressure error
YES
Base Screen
Window Screen
YES
YES
Comment Window
4 Low coolant water pressure YES

YES
5 Refill fuel
0
0
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
Comment Window

8.2.3 Useful information
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
General Comment No.
8 - 42
ALARM
Device Alarm Range
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Alarm location refinement

The alarm information can be displayed ranging from summary to details in the hierarchical order.
Switching from higher hierarchy to middle hierarchy
Switching from middle hierarchy to general
Lower
hierarchy
(FFB8H)
Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Check
Pwr. module error

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Check
(FFC2H)
Switching from general to middle hierarchy
(FFC2H)
Switching from middle hierarchy to higher hierarchy
Display higher hierarchy alarms
(Alarm status in factory
line is displayed.)
(FFB8H)
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle hierarchy alarms

(Alarm status in line 2 is displayed.)
Display general alarms

(The faulty module in system B
and the details are displayed.)
(2) Simultaneous execution of the operations of Check (FFB4H) and Delete (FFB6H) for multiple
alarms
The following operations can be executed simultaneously for multiple alarms included in the lower
hierarchy.
Check : The time when the alarm occurrence was confirmed is recorded.
Delete : The history of restored alarms is cleared.
(a)
When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for higher hierarchy alarms
A batch of alarms of the middle and general hierarchies, located below the higher hierarchy
can be operated.
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Equipment A
Powe
module
Drive
module
Equipment B
Control
module
Line2 error
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Display
general alarms
Delete
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
Restored alarm
Occurred alarm
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Equipment A
Powe
module
Drive
module
Line2 error
Delete
Equipment B error
Equipment B
Control
module
Powe
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Display
general alarms
Drive module error
A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.
8 - 43

Touch Delete
(FFB6H)
1
OVERVIEW
(b) When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for middle hierarchy alarms
A batch of general alarms located below the middle hierarchy can be operated.
Line2
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Touch Delete
Delete
(FFB6H)
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
COMMON SETTING
Control
module
Restored alarm
Posted alarm
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment B
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Control
module
Delete
Display
general alarms
Drive module error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Equipment A
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Line2
A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.
Reset operation
The reset operation of restoring an alarm manually (ON
OFF/reset value) by the
Reset (FFB9H) button is not usable for a batch of alarms.
Perform reset operation when general alarms are displayed.

Comment
Occurred
04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35
Occurred
Comment
Restore Check
04/06/01 12:35
Reset
Restore Check
13:00
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
LAMP, SWITCH
Drive
module
(FFB9H)
Perform the reset operation for each alarm.

8 - 44
ALARM
Power
module
Display
general alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Alarm Classification according to the level or group

Alarms can be classified according to the level or group.
The contents displayed at alarm occurrence can refined according to the level or type.
Example: Refine the alarms to be displayed by changing the switching device (level switching:
D32, group switching: D33).
Display in order of alarm occurrence
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
12:25
09:40
07:35
Comment
Level
Hydraulic pressure error
1
Low coolant pressure

Oil refill
Little material remaining
Fuel refill
2
1
1
2
Group
1
1
2
2
2
Level
switching device
(D32)
0
Group
switching device
(D33)
0
Display level 1 alarms only

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 12:25
04/06/01 09:40
Comment
Level Group Level
switching device
Hydraulic pressure error
1
1
Oil refill
1
1
2
2
(D32)
Group
switching device
(D33)
0
Display level 2 alarms only

Occurred
04/06/01 12:25
04/06/01
09:40
Comment
Oil refill
Level Group
1
2
Level
switching device
(D32)
1
Group
switching device
(D33)
2
Remark
Switching device
Set the switching device as shown below by the advanced alarm display function.
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab
Example:
Extended tab of Advanced User Alarm Display dialog box
8 - 45

1
2 Display example of general alarms (Detailed display)
OVERVIEW
General alarm's details such as causes or corrective actions can be displayed on another screen
(comment window, base screen or window screen).
Setting example
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Comment window

Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the
comment window.
COMMON SETTING
Example) Advanced alarm display

Oil pressure error.
Base Screen1
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
16:13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01
15:51 Drive module error
04/06/01
10:25 Control module error
Base Screen1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Comment Window
(2) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Tank A
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
6
90
40
60
Run Stop
Run Stop
Run Stop
Base Screen1
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
Base Screen5
(3) Window screen

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Feed material from the

feed opening.
Feed opening
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
16:13
15:51
10:25
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Base Screen1
Occurred Date
04/06/01 1 6: 13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error
Base Screen1

Window Screen10
8 - 46
ALARM
Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25
3 Action when buffer is full

If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or
almost reaches the "Stored Number", the status can be notified using a device.
(1) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored
and confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be
confirmed.
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Confirm the historical number

and occurring number
Full
notification:
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49
Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14
Fuse error
(2) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
Issue the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity"
on the Basic tab.)
Select the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in "Action When Buffer is Full" on the
Basic tab.)
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Full
notification:
Full notification
Occurred Comment
Remark
04/6/1 14:46:49
Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14
Fuse error
(1) Settings
Secton8.2.5
(1) Basic tab
(2) Buffering area

Secton8.2.2
8 - 47
Collection flow and collection mode

1
OVERVIEW
(3) Buffering size

The buffering size required for advanced user alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the user area (C drive + add-on memory) of the GOT, decreases.
Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the user area.
(a) Settings relevant to buffering area size
Number of device points set for the alarm ("Alarm (Device) Points" of the Device
tab)
Total number of alarms saved (Stored Number)
Cumulative
No alarm collection
Number of device points set for the alarm ("Alarm (Device) Points" of the Device
tab)
(b) Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced user alarms
The buffering area size for the alarm ID being set can be confirmed in the "Buffering Area Size"
on the Basic tab.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Buffering Area Size
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 48
ALARM
Historical
SPECIFICATIONS
Settings relevant to buffering area size
COMMON SETTING
Collection mode
8.2.4
Placement and settings
1 Register comments in advance.

Register alarm messages in a comment group. (
comment group)
Secton4.1.4
Registering comments as
2 Perform either of the following operations.

Select the Advanced Alarm Observation menu
[Common]
[Advanced Alarm Observation]
[Advanced Alarm Common]
Click
(Advanced User Alarm Observation)
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings by referring to the description below.
(
Section 8.2.5 Setting items)
Remark
When setting from Workspace(Project)

(1) Advanced Alarm Common
Double-clicking the
setting dialog box.
in Workspace(Project) displays the
Double-click
(2) Advanced User Alarm Observation

Right-clicking the
in Workspace(Project) and selecting
[New...] displays the setting dialog box.
8 - 49

8.2.4 Placement and settings
8.2.5
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Advanced Alarm Common

Set this item to control alarm log file conversion with a device.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Item
Buffering Area Size
Displays the memory capacity required for alarm log file conversion.
Convert Trigger
Set trigger device for file conversion.
Alarm ID Device
Convert-in-motion Notification
Device
The file to be converted is created with the advanced alarm observation. Set the device that
specifies the ID for the advanced alarm observation.
Set a device to notify that a file is during conversion.

Set a column No. for comment group used for file conversion.
Synchronize with Language Switching::
File Convert Language
Check this item to control alarm log file conversion with a device.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Setting
Model
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
File Convert External Control
Description
Select this item to switch the column No. using Language Switching Device.
(Advanced User Alarm)

Fixed Column No.:: Select this item to fix the column No. to be used.
After the selection, set a column No. to be used. (1 to 10)
Set system language used for file conversion.

System Language Switching Interlock :
LAMP, SWITCH
Select this item to convert a file in system language displayed on the GOT.
(Advanced System Alarm)

Fixed Language:
Select this item to convert a file in specified language.

After the selection, specify the language.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
To control alarm log file conversion with a device

When using Advanced User Alarm Observation
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is
required in the File Save tab of [Advanced User Alarm Observation].
(3) File save tab
When using Advanced System Alarm Observation
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is
required in the File Save tab of [Advanced System Alarm Observation].
(2) File Save tab

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 50
ALARM
File Convert Language
2 Advanced user alarm observation (Alarm ID list)

Make the settings of advanced user alarms (devices, watch cycle, and collection mode) for each alarm
ID.
Up to 255 alarm IDs can be set.
This screen is displayed only when [Common]
[Advanced User
Alarm] menu is selected.
Note that it is not displayed when setting is attempted from the project workspace.
Item
Description
Click this button when setting a new alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
New
This section
Advanced user alarm observation)
Click this button to when editing the selected alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
Edit
Copy
Paste
This section
Advanced user alarm observation)
Click this button to copy the selected alarm ID.

Click this button when pasting the copied alarm ID to the alarm ID list.
The destination of the alarm ID can be set.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected alarm ID.
Delete All
Click this button to delete all alarm IDs.
Close
Click this button to close the setting dialog box of advanced user alarm observation.
8 - 51

8.2.5 Setting items
Model
1
3 Advanced user alarm observation
OVERVIEW
Set advanced user alarms.

(1) Basic tab
Set the collection mode and buffering for saving the alarm history.
SPECIFICATIONS
File Save
Item
Description
Alarm ID
Set the alarm ID No. (1 to 32767) and name of the advanced user alarm.
Observation Alarm Name
Up to 32 characters can be entered for the alarm name.

Select a mode to collect advanced user alarms. (
Secton8.2.2
Model
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device
Collection flow and collection
mode)
Historical
Collection
:Data of advanced user alarms are collected as history. Historical data is added
Mode
Cumulative
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
every time an advanced user alarm occurs.

:The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each
alarm type.
No Alarm Collection :Only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed. The history of restored
alarms is not saved.
Check this item when displaying collected advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm popup display
Basic
function.
(

LAMP, SWITCH
Popup Display
Check this item when storing the total number of advanced user alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of occurrence,
Device for
check, and restoration.
Historical
This item is available only when "Collection Mode" is "Historical."

After checking this item, click the Dev...
(
button to set the device for storing that number.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Number
Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item when storing the number of advanced user alarms that are currently occurring in the word
Device for
Occurring
Number
device.
(
button to set the device for storing that number.

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 52
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
Set the buffering for saving the history of collected advanced user alarms.
This item is available only when "Historical" or "Cumulative" is selected as the collection mode.
Buffering
Secton8.2.2
Secton8.2.3
Action when buffer is full
Set the number of advanced user alarms to be saved as history (32767 max.).
Stored Number
This item is available only when the collection mode is "Historical."

Set the number greater than or equal to the "Alarm (Device) Points" on the Device tab.
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation to be performed when the number of the advanced user alarms stored in the
buffering area reaches the "Stored Number"
Action When
Buffer is Full
Delete Old Data
:The oldest one is deleted from the restored advanced user alarms and the
Stop New Addition
:The collection of advanced user alarms is interrupted. Even if a new advanced
data of the new advanced user alarm are added.

user alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Check this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable advanced
user alarms reaches below the number set in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity."
Full Notification
Signal Device

(
button to set the full alert signal device.
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area has decreased
(storable advanced user alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical" and a check mark is placed for "Full
Notification Signal Device" is checked.
Buffer Full Alert
When the number of storable advanced user alarms is equal to or less than the number set here, the
Capacity
"Full Notification Signal Device" turns on.

Example :Setting "Stored Number" to 1000 and "Buffer Full Alert Capacity" to 10
The full notification signal device turns on when the number of total saved advanced user
alarms is 990 or more.
Check this time to delete the restored advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area by the device.
Buffer Clear

(
button to set the Buffer Clear.
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Buffer Clear
Completed
Signal Device

(
button to set the buffer clear completed signal device.
This item can be set only when "Buffer Clear" is check-marked.
8 - 53

8.2.5 Setting items
Model
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Device tab

Set the timing for collecting advanced user alarms and make the settings of advanced user alarms
(device settings for advanced user alarms, comments displayed when advanced user alarms
occur, resetting of advanced user alarms, and the level/group settings).
SPECIFICATIONS
File Save
Description
Model
Watch Cycle
Set a cycle to monitor the device (1 to 3600s).
Alarm (Device) Points
Set the number of device points (1 to 32767 points).

The maximum points (32767) are the total alarm (device) points set on all alarm IDs.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit
:Select the item when monitoring a bit device by the ON/OFF change.
Signed BIN16
:The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary.
Device No.
Detail
No.*3
:The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
:The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
BCD32
Real
:The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Unsigned BIN16
Select a method to set the device No.

Continuous
:Devices are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:Devices are numbered at random.
Fixed
:In the word device setting, multiple occurrence ranges are set by the same
word device.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Device Type
Select a method of setting the comment No., base screen and window screen in the comment group to
be displayed with details.
Continuous
:The comments/screens are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:The comments/screens are numbered at random.
General Comment
Middle Comment
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
Select a method of setting the comments in the comment group to be displayed for general alarms,
middle alarms, and higher alarms.
Continuous
:The comments are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:The comments are numbered at random.
Higher Comment
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 54
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
Model
Set a group No. of the comment group displayed with the comments of general alarms, middle alarms,
Comment Group*1
higher alarms, and detailed display.
Alarm setup list
Set up a device for the alarm and comments displayed when an alarm occurs.
Device
Set up a device for the alarm. (
Set the device value condition for displaying an alarm.

When [Device Type] is set to [Bit]
Alarm Range
ON
: Alarms are displayed by the rising (OFF
ON) of the bit device.
OFF
: Alarms are displayed by the falling (ON
OFF) of the bit device.
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit]

Click the Exp. button to set up the range of the values of the word device to display the alarm.
(
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
General
Comment
No.*1*2
Set the comment to be displayed when the alarm occurs by the comment No. of the comment group.
Middle
For an alarm, specify the comment Nos. of the comment groups used for the higher alarm, middle alarm,
Comment No.
*1*2
and general alarm, respectively.

Specify "0" when not displaying the middle or higher alarm.
Higher
Comment No.
*1*2
Select a method of detailed display.

Set the comment No., base screen No., and window screen No. of the comment group displayed in
"Detail No."
Detail Type*3*4
Not Display
:Details are not displayed.
Comment Window*3
:Details are displayed on the window for detail display. Registered
Base Screen
:The base screen is displayed as detail display. The base screen set to
Window Screen
:The window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed as detail display.
comments are displayed on the comment window.

the detail No. of the device is displayed.
The window screen set to the device's detail No. is displayed.
Detail No.
Set the comment No., window screen No., and base screen No. of the comment group displayed in
details when an alarm occurs.
Select whether or not to enable the reset operation of alarm (turn off or reset the device specified for the
alarm by the touch switch for resetting).
Reset

YES
:The device specified for the alarm will be turned off or set to the reset value.
NO
:The device specified for the alarm will not be turned off or set to the reset value.
If device is a word device, set a reset value after selecting this option.
Set a level (1 to 255) to the alarm.

Level
Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or only the alarms at the particular level
can be displayed.
Group
(Import)*5
(Export)*5
Set a group (1 to 255) on the alarm.

Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or only the alarms of the particular group can be displayed.
Reads out the advanced user alarm observation settings that have been edited in a CSV file / Unicode
text file to GT Designer2.
Saves the advanced user alarm observation settings that have been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file /
Unicode text file.
8 - 55

8.2.5 Setting items
Device
File Save
Description
Ladder Search Settings*6

Ladder Search
Mode
Model
OVERVIEW
Item
Check this item to search selected alarm device at ladder monitor start.
Select a search method from coil-search or defect search.
This setting is valid only for the QCPU and QnACPU.
File
After the check, specify a file name.
SPECIFICATIONS
Check this item to specify a program file to be searched.

Specify Search
(Up to eight characters can be set.)
For details of *1 to *6, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 56
ALARM
Basic
*1 Method of setting the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs

A setting example for displaying comments in comment groups as higher alarms, middle alarms, general
alarms, and detail display is provided below.
Register the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs as a comment group.
Comment group No.1

(for higher alarms)
Register a comment group for

each alarm hierarchy.
Comment group No.2
(for middle alarms)
Comment group No.3

(for general alarms)
Comment group No.4

(for detail display)
Set the comments registered at step 1 as follows by the advanced user alarm observation function.
1) Set the comment group No. to be displayed for each hierarchy.
2) Set the comments to be displayed for each hierarchy (general alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detail display) of the alarm.
Comment displayed
for alarm M10
Comment displayed
for alarm M11
Comment displayed
for alarm M12
Set the comment No. of

comment group No.3.

comment group No.2.

comment group No.1.

comment group No.4.
Example) Comment display when alarm M10 occurs

Display of general alarms
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
8 - 57
Check
Display of middle alarms

Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment C error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Display of higher alarms
Detail display
Line1 error
Line2 error
Line1 error
Oil supply
Equipment B error
Equipment C error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

8.2.5 Setting items
Check
Check
When the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs is set as follows, "No Message" is displayed
when an alarm occurs.
Comment settings have not been performed (comment No. remains "0.")
No comment has been registered for the comment No.
In addition, when alarms are hierarchized and comments are not set for some hierarchies, it is
recommended to set blank comments (enter space only) so that "No Message" is not displayed.
OVERVIEW
*2 When "No Message" is displayed as comment
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Example 1: When no comment is specified

No comment is set.
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
"No message"
is displayed.
Check
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Line1 error
No message
No message
Equipment A error
No message
No message
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
COMMON SETTING
Example 2: When a blank comment is specified

Set a blank comment
(comment No.2).
"
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
" Enter a space character.
Register a blank comment as shown

above.
A blank comment is displayed.

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
LAMP, SWITCH
Check
Line1 error
*3 Detail type settings
All alarms are displayed on the same destination specified on "Detail Type" (not display, comment
window, base screen, or window screen) when "Detail No." is set to "Continuous."
To change the "Detail Type" settings, set "Detail No." to "Random."
In addition, when changing the settings from "Random" to "Continuous," the destinations of all
alarms set on "Detail Type" are changed to the same destination as the top alarm.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Equipment A error

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 58
ALARM
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
*4 Method of displaying the comment window

1) Display the detail display screen
by the one-touch operation
Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
2) Display the detail display screen

by the touch switch
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28
Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28
Details
Display on the comment window
Display on the window screen

(overlap window)
Check line 2
Display on the base screen
Check line 2
Check line 2
Alarm historical display
The specified comment is displayed.
Alarm historical display
The specified base screen and window screen are displayed.
(a) Number of characters available for comment window

39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
(b) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
(c) Comment text is displayed as follows
Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse, blink and HQ fonts are not supported, regardless of the comment
registration settings.
(d) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a
new line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line
feed for the comment.
Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

When a comment is registered
8 - 59

8.2.5 Setting items
Comment window display
*5 Import/Export
OVERVIEW
The exported CSV file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software.
The CSV file, after editing, can be imported to and opened by GT Designer2.
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Exported in CSV file
Editing the exported file
Add the setting using applications

R
such as Microsoft Excel.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Importing to GT Designer2
LAMP, SWITCH
6
The added contents
are displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment.

Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is
used.

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 60
ALARM
Import/export in multilingual environment
*6 Starting ladder monitor

To start ladder monitor, touch switch setting is required.
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display
8 - 61

8.2.5 Setting items
Secton8.2.2
1
OVERVIEW
(3) File save tab

Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the memory
card.
Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure)
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic
Device
COMMON SETTING
File Save
Item
Description
Model
card as an alarm log file.

The data are written to the memory card as a binary format file (*.G1A).
This item can be checked only when "Historical" or "Cumulative" is selected for "Collection Mode."
The destination drive is displayed.
Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.
[System Environment] is preset.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
By default, the "Project Folder" from [Common]
Access
File
Folder Name*2
Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
File Name*2
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.

By default, the file name is set to AAM
Select a timing at which the advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the memory
card.
When "Sampling," "ON Sampling," or "OFF Sampling" is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to 1440
Store
minutes).
Trigger
Rise
Sampling
Fall
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Type
Specify the store trigger device.

Device
(
Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
Writing Notification Device

(
Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Writing Error Notification
Device
This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is
restored.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Drive Name

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 62
ALARM
Save Alarm Log File*1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Check the box when writing the advanced user alarm history saved in the buffering area to the memory
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
Model
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
Auto Backup at Save*1
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is
not displayed on the GOT utility.)
Ex.: AAM00001.G1A -> AAM00001.G1A.BAK
Make setting to convert a file.
File Convert*3
This can be set only when [Save Alarm Log File] is checked.
Convert
Select a file format after conversion. (CSV/Unicode Text)
Format
Date
Information
This can be set only when [Change Save Path] is checked.
is added to
Check this item to add date information to the converted file's name.
File Name
Change
Check this item to change save destination for the converted file.
Save Path
After the check, select the names of the drive and folder where the file is to be stored.
*1 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the
following status, system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file is present (check "Auto Backup at Save"), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no
system alarm occurs.)
8 - 63

8.2.5 Setting items
*2 Folder name and file name
OVERVIEW
(1) Number of characters set for folder or file name.

GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below.
Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters.
Users only can rename folder or file name.
(Other than folder and file name are automatically added.)
2
\
Folder Name
(2 characters)
File Name
(1 character)
Drive name
(1 character)
.G1A
Extension
(4 characters)
COMMON SETTING
3
Max. 78 characters
When setting hierarchy to the folder
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
When setting [Folder Name], enter \ between folders.

(\ is counted as one character.)
The maximum number of hierarchy levels for creating folders is 20.
(Setting example)
[Folder Name] : Project1 \ abc
(2) Character strings that cannot be set

The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. (They cannot be
used irrespective of upper-case or lower-case characters.)
COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
Also, folder and file name as shown below cannot be used.
Folder name starting as G1
Folder and file name starting from . (period) or \
Folder and file name ending at . (period) or \
Folder and file name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)
*3 Advanced Alarm Common
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, set "Advanced Alarm Common".
For setting items of Advanced Alarm Common, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.5
Setting items
6
LAMP, SWITCH
abc
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Project1

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 64
ALARM
Remark
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
A:\
SPECIFICATIONS
G1A file Path in memory card (for GT15)
8.2.6
Precautions
The following provides the precautions on use of advanced user alarms.
1 Precautions for use

(1) If the same data are in the memory card
Overwritten!
Save
Occurred Comment
Status
04/06/01
04/06/01
Temp. error
Fuse error
Ocr.
Ocr.
04/06/01
Oil error
Ocr.
AAM00000.G1A
AAM00000.G1A
Save
Touch
Key code: FFBBH
or
store trigger device
The data in the memory card are overwritten. Therefore, if the data needs be kept unchanged,
move the data from the memory card to the PC by either of the following methods.
Upload resource data by GT Designer2.
Read out the CSV file saved in the memory card by PC.
8 - 65

8.2.6 Precautions
While saving an alarm log file in the memory card, the observation of the advanced user alarm with
the alarm ID corresponding to the log file is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced user alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Example: When saving advanced user alarm data with alarm ID1
OVERVIEW
(2) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file
2
SPECIFICATIONS
While saving an alarm log file in the memory

card, the observation of the advanced user
alarm with the alarm ID corresponding to
the log file is interrupted temporarily!
Alarm ID1
Comment
Alarm ID2
Buffering area
Save
Alarm ID3
(3) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all the advanced alarms
(advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms) to be saved as an alarm log file (set on the
File Save tab) are saved in the memory card.
(4) When turning off from on the CF card access switch of the used drive
When turning off from on the CF card access switch while memory card is ejected from the drive,
data in the memory card are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the memory card from the drive until the following LED or signal turns off and file
saving is completed.
CF card access LED on the used drive turns off
Drive status notification signal of the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
(
Section 3.6
(2) Write device)
Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and
advanced system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set on the File Save tab).
(5) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match with the project in the GOT,
the file cannot be read out of the memory card. (Alarm history before the GOT is powered off
cannot be restored.)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
"Writing Error Notification Device" turns on in the File Save tab.
System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.
8 - 66
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.

8.2.6 Precautions
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Temp. error
Fuse error
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14
COMMON SETTING
GOT internal memory
ALARM
Saving...
(6) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed based on settings
made in the "Action When Buffer is Full" on the Basic tab.
Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.
Not collect advanced user alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set "Full Notification Signal Device" on the Basic tab, and clear the
restored alarm when the device turns on. (
advanced alarm data)
Secton8.2.2
Retention and clear of collected
Action When Buffer is Full

Full Notification Signal Device
(7) Error when the alarm log file is saved

If an error occurs when a file is saved, "Writing Error Notification Device" on the File Save tab turns
on.
Confirm the following.
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".
The memory card is full.
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification
signal, operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced user alarm observation
function.
Operation (difference)
Item
Difference between "Full Notification Signal
Turns on when the number of alarms saved
Device" set by advanced alarm observation
has reached that set in "Stored Number
and drive status notification signal (system
".(when the buffering area reserved for
signal 2-2.b4, b5)
advanced user alarms is full).
Difference between "Writing Notification

Turns on when advanced user alarm data
are being written in the memory card.
signal 2-2.b0, b1)
Drive status notification signal
Turns on when the memory card is full.
Turns on when data are being written in the

memory card (also when data other than
advanced user alarms are being written.)
Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm

log file in the memory card is accessed
Difference between "Writing Error Notification
signal 2-2.b7, b8)
(for example, the project of the alarm log

file in the memory card does not match
with the project in GOT).
Turns on when the memory card cannot
be accessed (for example, the memory
card is not set, or the CF card access
switch is set to "transfer prohibited").
8 - 67

8.2.6 Precautions
Turns on when the memory card cannot be

accessed (for example, the memory card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set
to "transfer prohibited").
Section 2.5 Clock Function

(10) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.
For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
1
OVERVIEW
(9) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to
the following.
(11) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with
application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer2.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications,
including text editors.
3
COMMON SETTING
2.11 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File
SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.2.6 Precautions
8 - 68
ALARM
8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System

Alarm)
When an error occurs in the GOT, controller or network, the coadvanced system alarmsrresponding error
code and message are displayed.
Before setting advanced system alarms
This section explains the advanced system alarms of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced system alarms.


System
User
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
Advanced
user alarm
8 - 69
System
User
8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)
Advanced
system alarm
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced system alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced system alarms) only
Relevant to advance alarm observation (advanced system alarms) only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced system alarms) and others
COMMON SETTING
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
2)
Setting items
2)
3)
1)

Designer2]
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1)
3)
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Auxiliary
setting
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings

8 - 70
ALARM
8.3.1
GOT Error Reset Signal
(Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)
Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error
code, GOT error detecting signal).
1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
B 348
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
The system alarm message is cleared.
Drive A/B File Accessing Signal*1
Drive A/B Full Signal*1
Notifies of the status of access to the drive.
Notifies that the drive is short of capacity.
Drive A
Drive A
The file is being accessed.
Available capacity is
less than 1KB.
Drive A/B File Access Error Signal*1*2

Notifies that access to the drive has failed.
Drive A
File access error
*1
The advanced system alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full,
however, operate differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
Section 8.3.6
*2
The drive A/B file access error signal is reset by the file access error reset signal (read device: system signals
1-2.b0).
8 - 71

1
Section 2.9.1

OVERVIEW
Buffer Flash Forced Saving Signal (GS520.b0)*3
Saves the data in the buffering area in a memory card.*1
*3
SPECIFICATIONS
Buffering area
Alarm data are saved only when "Save Alarm Log File" is check-marked on the File Save tab.
If not checked, the advanced system alarms are not saved.
Section 8.3.5
File Save tab)
COMMON SETTING
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced system alarm) and others
System alarm GOT error channel No.
System alarm CPU error channel No.

(Write device: GS263)
Stores the channel number where system alarm (GOT
Stores the channel number where system alarm (CPU
error) occurred.
error) occurred.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
System alarm network error channel No.

Stores the channel number where system alarm (network
error) occurred.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 72
ALARM
8.3.2
Before setting
This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced system alarm.
1 Monitored alarm types and setting

(1) Alarm types
The following alarms can be monitored in the advanced system alarm.
1) CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm.
2) GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm.
3) Network error : A network module error is displayed as an alarm.
The types of the system alarms monitored can be selected by the setting.
Because only particular alarm types can be displayed, alarm details can be observed quickly.
(2) Settings necessary to use advanced system alarms
To use advanced system alarms, check "Use System Alarm" and specify the target.
(
Section 8.3.5
Advanced System Alarm Observation)

1) Check "Use System Alarm."
2) Check the target of monitoring.
In the advanced system alarm (advanced alarm observation), set the types of the alarms collected
and the collection method.
Advanced System Alarms Observation
Types of advanced system alarms monitored

Collection mode
Setting for history saving (alarms collected in the User
area)
Setting for the data retention of advanced system alarms
under power failure (saving on the memory card)
Display of advanced system alarms

Advanced system alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
System Alarm)
8 - 73

1
2 Collection flow and collection mode
Alarm data are collected into the buffering area every 3 s,

regardless of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
User area
Occurred Comment
COMMON SETTING
Buffering area
(b) GOT errors

GOT errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory)
when an alarm occurs.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Deletion of data in the buffering area

This section
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Displays advanced system alarm

data collected into the buffering
area as alarms.
Alarm restoration
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area

Data to be collected differ depending on the history collection mode.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 74
ALARM
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confirm c

04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa
Remark
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) CPU errors and network errors

CPU errors and network errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive +
add-on memory) in cycles of 3 seconds regardless of the displayed screen. (Watch cycle
cannot be changed.)
In the buffering area, collected advanced system alarm data are temporarily saved as
historical data, and they are displayed on the GOT as alarms.
OVERVIEW
(1) Collection flow
(2) Alarm collection modes

The history collection mode is selected from two options: historical mode and no alarm collection.
(
Section 8.3.5
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
Example: When displaying data by advanced alarm display
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
402 Communication timeout. Confirm

70 Battery voltage low or equipment f
803 Transident error
Status Restore Check
1)
2)
Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.
16:30
18:50
16:20
3)
4)
5)
Description
Info. displayed
Historical mode
1) Occurred
No alarm collection
The date/time of the alarm occurrence is displayed.

An error code and an alarm message are displayed when an alarm occurs.
For error codes and corrective actions, refer to the following.
2) Comment
GT1
User's Manual
Alarm messages registered in GOT in advance are displayed.

The status of the alarm is displayed.
3) Alarm status
4) Restore
Ocr.
: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk.
: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr.
: Alarm has been restored
----

5) Check
Message
Restore Check
Check
Message
Restore Check
19:00
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)
(a) Historical mode

In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm
occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
(b) No alarm collection
In this mode, the latest alarms only are displayed.
8 - 75

(3) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced alarm display for each collection mode.
Alarm
occurred
"402 Communication timeout.
Confirm communication
pathway or modules."
OVERVIEW

Alarm
occurred
Restoration*2
Alarm
occurred
11:30
1)
12:00
2)
Alarm checked
by user*1
15:30
3)
SPECIFICATIONS
"500 Warning! Built-in battery

voltage is low."
16:00
18:25
4)
5)
Alarm resetting
by user*2
3
Alarms are checked with the touch switch for confirmation. (
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches
*2
For the GOT error, the alarm status is not changed to "Restored" even when the cause of the alarm is eliminated.
for advanced alarm display)
This section
Alarm restoration)
(a) Historical mode

4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.
COMMON SETTING
*1
Restore Check
"Communication
timeout" occurs!
Restore Check
12:00
"Communication
timeout" is
checked.
Check
(Key code: FFB4H)
Restore Check
12:00
4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
Restore Check
16:00
12:00
"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
Message
Status
"The alarm is
reset".
Reset
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3) Restored from "Communication timeout"
(Key code: FFB9H)
5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
Message
Status
Restore Check
402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.

402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.
16:00
12:00
The alarm status

is changed to
"Restored" on the
GOT and the
restored time is
displayed.
A new line
is added and
displayed.

8 - 76
ALARM
2) "Communication timeout" is checked.

Occurred
Occurrence
Message
Status
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(b) No alarm collection mode

Only the latest alarms of GOT errors, CPU errors, and network errors are displayed.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Not collected in the no
alarm collection mode.
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.
Occurred
Message
"Communication
timeout" occurs!
2) "Communication timeout" is checked.

Occurred
Message
12:00
"Communication
timeout" is checked
Check
(Key code: FFB4H)
3) Restored from "Communication timeout"

Occurred
Message
12:00
4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.
Data are deleted

when the alarm
status is changed
to "Restored."
5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again.

Occurred
Message
The generated
alarm is displayed.
Display of advanced system alarms

Advanced system alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
System Alarm)
8 - 77

1
3 Alarm restoration
(3) GOT error

Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the GOT error.
The alarm status of a GOT error will not be changed to "Restored". Perform either of the following
operations.
4
Occurred
Message
Status
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Cause
eliminated
Error
occurred
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Network error

Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the network error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a network
error will be changed to "Restored".
COMMON SETTING
(1) CPU error

Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the CPU error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a CPU
error will be changed to "Restored".
When using the multi-channel function, all alarm statuses will be changed to "Restored" by
eliminating causes of alarms of all channels.
OVERVIEW
The following shows how to change the alarm status of each error to "Restored".
04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equipm Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error
Ocr.
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.
The display on the GOT shows alarm

occurrences even if the alarm causes
on the GOT, controller and network
are eliminated.
(a) Change the selected alarm status to "Restored" (using the system information)
Change the selected alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored" by the touch switch (key
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.
Reset
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr.
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr.
04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

Ocr.
Ocr.
(Key code: FFB9H)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(b) Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored"

Turn ON the GOT error reset signal (System Signal 1-1.b13) of the system information to
change all the GOT error alarm statuses from "Occurred" to "Restored".
(
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr.
Ocr.
Occurred
Message
Status
Reset
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.

Rstr.
(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)

8 - 78
ALARM
code: FFB9H). (
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(c) Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored" (using the utility)
At the system alarm display of the utility, change all the GOT error alarm statuses from
"Occurred" to "Restored".
GT16 User's Manual (Section 13.1 Diagnostic Functions)
GT15 User's Manual (Section 14.9 System Alarm Display)
4 Clearing alarm data

The "Restored" status alarms can be cleared from the history.
To clear alarm data, perform either of the following operations.
(a) Clear by device
Turning on the device set for [Buffer Clear] clears all the "Restored" alarm data.
(
Section 8.3.5

Occurred
Occurred
Message
Status
Status
Ocr.
Delete

Message
Ocr.
Turn on "Buffer Clear"
(b) Clear by touch switch

By using a touch switch, one or all the "Restored" alarm data are cleared.
(
Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10

Message
Status
402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.
70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.
803 Transient error
Ocr.
Delete
Occurred
Message
Status
Ocr.
(Key code: Clear one FFB6H

Clear all FFB7H)
Remark
Clearing alarm data

The following methods can also be used for clearing alarm data.
(1) Powering off or resetting the GOT

Powering off or resetting the GOT deletes the alarm data.
However, if the advanced system alarm data are saved on the memory card, the data can be
retained even if the GOT is powered off. (
alarm data under power failure)
Section 8.3.2
Retention of advanced system
(2) When the following settings are made within utilities

Item
Description
Display
Operation
GOT setup
Debug & self check
Main menu

Self check
[I/O check]
(3) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
8 - 79

1
Eliminate the alarm causes of the GOT error.
If the alarm status of a GOT error is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored"
without eliminating the alarm cause, the same alarm will occur again.
Status
Reset
Message

04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error
Occurred
Message
Ocr.
Reset the alarms

(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)
Status
Rstr.
Rstr.
All the alarms are

changed to the status
of "Restored."
Status

Ocr.
Rstr.
Rstr.
The same alarm occurs

after resetting.
Displays the date and
time where the alarm is
detected again after it
is reset.
(2) Clearable alarms on the GOT
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Only the "Restored" status alarms can be cleared.

When clearing an alarm, change the alarm status from "Occurred" to
"Restored".
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 80
ALARM
Occurred
Ocr.
COMMON SETTING

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Message
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: When the alarm is reset while "460 Communication unit error" is
occurring
Occurred
OVERVIEW
(1) Before changing the alarm status of a GOT error from "Occurred" to "Restored"
5 Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure

(1) Data retention under power failure
By saving advanced system alarm data in the memory card as alarm log file, the data are retained
even when GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the alarm log file is read
out automatically, and the historical status of the advanced system alarm saved before GOT
power-off is restored.
Memory card
Data
are
stored
The timing of saving data in the memory card can be set freely.
(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can also be saved by pressing the touch switch.
402 Com...
70 Batt...
402 Com...
70 Batt...
803 Tran...
500 Warn...
The status saved

before power-off
Current status
Power on
Power off
The status saved before the power-off

and the current status are displayed.
(2) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced system alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can
be monitored using the device. (
Section 8.3.5
File Save tab)
Writing
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir

04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipmen
Writing
Write error
Save
Status during writing can be monitored.
8 - 81

(3) File name and saving timing
Save by the touch switch (

display)
Section 8.3.5
File Save tab)
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm
Save by the buffer flash forced save signal (GS520.b0) (

register (GS))
Section 2.9.1
GOT special
(5) Required memory capacity

For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure,
refer to the following.
Section 2.4 Specifications of Available Object Functions
COMMON SETTING
Save by the store trigger device (
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Method of data retention under power failure

Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the
following methods. The file names and so forth need to be set on the File Save tab in advance.
OVERVIEW
Any file name can be given. (

Section 8.3.5
File Save tab)
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
the collection mode. (
Section 8.3.2
Collection flow and collection mode)
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the memory card
After advanced user alarm data is stored as alarm log file in the memory card, the
file can be utilized as follows.
(
GT1 Users Manual)
The history of advanced system alarms can be displayed as a historical graph.
For a display on personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to CSV
file/Unicode text file with GOT utility or Convert Trigger.
Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The alarm log file content to be saved in the memory card varies depending on
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Information to be saved
By checking "Auto Backup at Save" on the File Save tab, the alarm log file just
before saved can be saved as a backup file.
File Save tab
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 8.3.5
LAMP, SWITCH
(3) Backup of the alarm log file

8 - 82
ALARM
6 Converting alarm log files

The alarm log files created with the advanced system alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to CSV files or Unicode text files for displaying and editing the files on the
personal computer.
(1) How to create CSV files or Unicode text files with utility
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to CSV files or Unicode text files with the utility.
1 Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch G1A->CSV or
G1A->TXT button for converting the file.
2 Store the CSV file or Unicode text file on the personal computer with one of the following
methods.
Transferring files with GT Designer2
Select [Communication]
[To/From GOT...] from the menu, and transfer the file in the
Resourse Upload -> Computer tab.
Storing files in CF card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or
USB memory using the personal computer.
Alarm log file
CF card/
USB memory
CF card/
USB memory
Alarm log file
3 Edit the converted CSV file or Unicode text file displayed on the personal computer.
How to operate utility
Refer to the following manual for the details.
GT16 User's Manual (Section 14.2 Various Data Control)
GT15 User's Manual (Section 13.4 Alarm Information)
8 - 83

Precautions for file conversion with external control device

Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced system alarm
observation that creates a file to be converted into the alarm ID device. (For the
advanced system alarm observation: 0)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the
advanced system alarm observation, the alarm log file cannot be converted to a
CSV file or Unicode text file.
7 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
OVERVIEW
For details, refer to the manual below.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
User's Manual
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 84
ALARM
GT1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
(2) How to create CSV files or Unicode text files with device
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a memory card to CSV files or Unicode text files with
turning on the specified device.
When converting the files to CSV files or Unicode text files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to CSV files or Unicode text files with turning on the
convert trigger device.
Advanced alarm common setting
File conversion (the File Convert tab in the Advanced System Alarm Observation screen)
8.3.3
Useful information
This section describes some useful functions to know when using the advanced system alarms.
1 Action when buffer is full

If the number of the advanced system alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches
or almost reaches the "Stored Number", the status can be notified using a device.
(1) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored
and confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced system alarms that are currently occurring can also be
confirmed.
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Confirm the historical

number and occurring
number
Full
notification:
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi

(2) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
Issue the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity"
on the Basic tab.)
Select the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in "Action When Buffer is Full" on the
Basic tab.)
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Occurred
Full
notification:
2
Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi

Remark
Full
notification
(1) Settings
Section 8.3.5
Advanced System Alarm Observation
(2) Buffering area

Section 8.3.2
8 - 85

The buffering size required for advanced system alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the area in the GOT internal memory applicable for other objects,
decreases. Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the internal memory.
(a) Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode
Setting related to buffering area size

Total No. of alarms saved (Stored Number)
No alarm collection
SPECIFICATIONS
Historical
OVERVIEW
(3) Buffering size
----
(b) Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced system alarms
The size can be confirmed at [Buffering Area Size] on the Basic tab.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Buffering Area Size
2 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
For details, refer to the manual below.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
User's Manual
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 86
ALARM
GT1
8.3.4

Select the Advanced Alarm Observation menu.
[Common]
Click
[Advanced Alarm Common].

[Advanced System Alarm]
(Advanced System Alarm Observation.)
2 The setup dialog box is displayed. Refer to the later description (

continue the setting.
Remark
Section 8.3.5 Setting items) to

(1) Advanced Alarm Common
Double-click the
dialog box.
in Workspace(Project) displays the setting
Double-click
(2) Advanced System Alarm Observation

Double-clicking the
dialog box.
in Workspace(Project) displays the setting
Double-click
8 - 87

8.3.5
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Advanced Alarm Common

For setting items of the Advanced Alarm Common dialog box, refer to the following.
Setting items
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 8.2.5
COMMON SETTING
2 Advanced System Alarm Observation

(1) Basic tab
Set the types of the advanced system alarms monitored, the collection mode, and the buffering
details for saving historical data.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.3.5 Setting items
8 - 88
ALARM
Basic
File Save
Item
Description
Model
Set whether to enable the advanced system alarm function or not.
Use System Alarm
Check "Use System Alarm," and check any of the checkboxes for the target alarms (CPU error, GOT
error, and network error).
Target
Section 8.3.2
Monitored alarm types and setting)
Select a method for handling advanced system alarms. (
Section 8.3.2
Collection flow and
collection mode)
Collection
Historical
: Data of advanced system alarms are collected as history. Historical
No Alarm Collection
: Only the latest alarms of GOT error, CPU error, and network error are
data is added every time an advanced system alarm occurs.
Mode
collected. When advanced system alarm statuses are changed to

"Restored" on GOT, they are deleted.
Check this item when storing the total number of advanced system alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of occurrence,
Basic
Device for
check, and restoration.
Historical
This item is available only when "Collection Mode" is "Historical."
Number
After checking this item, click the Dev... button to set the device for storing that number.
(
Check this item to store the number of advanced system alarms whose alarm status is "Occurred" in a
Device for
word device.
Occurring
After checking the box, click the Dev... button to set up the device to which the number of the currently
Number
occurred alarms.
(
8 - 89

8.3.5 Setting items
Basic
File Save
Item
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Make buffering settings for saving the collected advanced system alarms.
This item can be set only when "Historical" is selected for "Collection Mode".
Buffering
Section 8.3.2
Section 8.3.3
Set the number of advanced system alarms to be saved (512 to 32767).

This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical."
SPECIFICATIONS
Stored Number
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.

Select the operation performed when the number of the advanced system alarms stored in the buffering
area reaches the "Stored Number."
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical."
Action When Buffer is
Delete Old Data
Full
: The oldest advanced system alarm is deleted from those of in the restored
status, and new alarm data are added.
: The collection of advanced system alarms is stopped. Even if a new
COMMON SETTING
Stop New Addition
advanced system alarm occurs, it is not collected.

Check this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable advanced
system alarms reaches below the number set in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity."
Full Notification Signal
Device

(
button to set the full alert signal device.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area becomes small (No. of
storable advanced system alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical" and a check mark is placed for "Full
Notification Signal Device".
Buffer Full Alert
Capacity
When the number of storable advanced system alarms is equal to or less than the number set here, the
"Full Notification Signal Device" turns on.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example: Setting "Stored Number" to 1000 and "Buffer Full Alert Capacity" to 10
The full notification signal device turns on when the number of total saved advanced system
alarms is 990 or more.
Check this time to delete the restored advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area by the device.
(
button to set the Buffer Clear.
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Device

(
button to set the buffer clear completed signal device.

LAMP, SWITCH
Completed Signal
This item can be set only when "Buffer Clear" is check-marked.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Buffer Clear

8.3.5 Setting items
8 - 90
ALARM
Buffer Clear
(2) File Save tab

The alarm history saved in the buffering area can be stored on the memory card by this tab setting.
(
Basic
Section 8.3.2
Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure)
File Save
Item
Description
Model
Check the box when writing the advanced system alarm history saved in the buffering area to the
Save Alarm Log File*1
memory card as an alarm log file.

The data are written to the memory card as a binary format file ( *.G1A).
This item can be checked only when [Historical] is selected for [Collection Mode.]
Drive Name
The destination drive is displayed (fixed to [A: Standard CF Card]).

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.
File
Folder
Name*2
Access

By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common]
[System Environment] is preset.
Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
File Name*2

By default, the file name is set to AAM00000.
Select a timing at which the advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the
memory card.
When [Sampling,] [ON Sampling,] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to 1440
Trigger Type
Store
minutes).
Trigger
Rise
Sampling
Fall
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Specify the store trigger device.

Device
(
8 - 91

8.3.5 Setting items
Basic
File Save
Item
Description
Model
Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
(
OVERVIEW

Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Device
2
SPECIFICATIONS
restored.
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is
not displayed on the GOT utility.)
AAM00000.G1A.BAK
Make setting to convert a file.
File Convert*3
Convert
COMMON SETTING
This can be set only when [Save Alarm Log File] is checked.
Select a file format after conversion. (CSV/Unicode Text)
Format
Date
Information is
This can be set only when [Change Save Path] is checked.
added to File
Check this item to add date information to the converted file's name.
Name
Check this item to change save destination for the converted file.
Path
After the check, select the names of the drive and folder where the file is to be stored.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Change Save
*1 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the
following status, system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file is present (check "Auto Backup at Save"), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no
system alarm occurs.)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example: AAM00000.G1A
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.3.5 Setting items
8 - 92
ALARM
Auto Backup at Save*1
*2 Folder name and file name

(1) Number of characters set for folder or file name.
GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below.
Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters.
Users only can rename folder or file name.
(Other than folder and file name are automatically added.)
Example: G1A file Path in memory card (for GT15)
A :\
Folder name
(2 characters)
File name
(1 character)
.G1A
Extension
(4 characters)
Drive name
(1 character)
Max. 78 characters
Remark

(Setting example)
[Folder Name] : Project1 \ abc
Project1
abc
(2) Character strings that cannot be set

The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. (They cannot be
used irrespective of upper-case or lower-case characters.)
COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
Also, folder and file name as shown below cannot be used.
Folder and file name starting from . (period) or \
Folder and file name ending at . (period) or \
Folder and file name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)
*3 Advanced Alarm Common
To control alarm log file conversion, setting Advanced Alarm Common is required.
For setting items of Advanced Alarm Common, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.5
8 - 93
Setting items

8.3.5 Setting items
8.3.6
Precautions
(1) Controllers for which advanced system alarms are not displayed on GOT
CPU errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the advanced
system alarm of the GOT.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
YAMATAKE temperature controller
RKC temperature controller
Inverter
Error
occurred
Cause
eliminated
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Alarm resetting

The alarm status of a GOT error is not changed to "Restored" even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW
The following are precautions for using advanced system alarms.
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equi Ocr.
Ocr.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Even if alarm causes on the GOT,

controller, and network are eliminated,
the status of alarm occurrence is still
displayed on the GOT.

Alarm restoration
(3) Network error restoration and clear

The alarm status of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit,
MELSECNET/10 communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be changed
to "Restored" until the GOT is powered OFF or reset even after the alarm cause is eliminated.
When clearing an alarm of the "Restored" status, refer to the following.
Alarm restoration
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 8.3.2

8.3.6 Precautions
8 - 94
ALARM
Section 8.3.2
LAMP, SWITCH
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.
(4) If the same data are in the memory card
Overwritten!
Save
Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. C Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equip Ocr.
AAM00000.G1A
AAM00000.G1A
Ocr.
Save
Touch
Key code: FFBBH
or
Store Trigger device
The data in the memory card are overwritten. Therefore, if the data needs be kept unchanged,
move the data from the memory card to the PC by either of the following methods.
Upload resource data by GT Designer2
Read out the CSV file saved in the memory card by PC.
(5) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file
When an alarm log file is being saved to the memory card, monitoring is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced system alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Saving...
User area
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment
Buffering area
Save
While saving to
memory card, monitoring
is suspended.
(6) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all the advanced alarms
(advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms) to be saved as an alarm log file (set on the
File Save tab) are saved in the memory card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.
8 - 95

8.3.6 Precautions
(8) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match with the project in the GOT,
the file cannot be read out of the memory card. (Alarm history before the GOT is powered off
cannot be restored.)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
"Writing Error Notification Device" turns on in the File Save tab.
System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(
Section 3.6
(2) Write device)
Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and
advanced system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set on the File Save tab).
3
COMMON SETTING
(7) When turning off from on the CF card access switch of the used drive
When turning off from on the CF card access switch while memory card is ejected from the drive,
data in the memory card are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the memory card from the drive until the following LED or signal turns off and file
saving is completed.
CF card access LED on the used drive turns off
Drive status notification signal on the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
Clear restored advanced system alarms and adding new alarms.

Not collect advanced system alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set "Full Notification Signal Device" on the Basic tab, and clear the
Section 8.3.2
Alarm restoration)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
restored alarm when the device turns on. (
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
(9) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full
When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed based on settings
made in the "Action When Buffer is Full" on the Basic tab.
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".

The memory card is full.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(10) Error when the alarm log file is saved

If an error occurs when a file is saved, "Writing Error Notification Device" on the File Save tab turns
on.
Confirm the following.
LAMP, SWITCH

Full notification signal device

8.3.6 Precautions
8 - 96
ALARM
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification
signal, operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced system alarm observation
function.
Operation (Differences)
Item
Difference between "Full Notification

Signal Device" set by advanced alarm
observation and drive status notification
signal (system signal 2-2.b4, b5)
Turns on when the number of alarms saved has reached

that set in "Stored Number ".(when the buffering area
reserved for advanced system alarms is full).
Drive status notification signal

Turns on when the memory card is
full.
Turns on when data are being
Difference between "Writing Notification

Device" set by advanced alarm
Turns on when advanced system alarm data are being
written in the memory card (also
written in the memory card.
when data other than advanced

system alarms are being written.)

Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm log file in
Difference between "Writing Error
Notification Device" set by advanced alarm
the memory card is accessed (for example, the project
Turns on when the memory card
of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match
cannot be accessed (for example,
with the project in GOT).
the memory card is not set, or the
Turns on when the memory card cannot be accessed

(for example, the memory card is not set, or the CF
CF card access switch is set to

"transfer prohibited").
card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited").
(12) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
the following.
(13) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.
For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
2.11 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File
8 - 97

8.3.6 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
8.4 Advanced Alarm Display

(Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm)
Before setting advanced alarm display

This section explains the advanced alarm display of the advanced alarm function.
Read the section below before setting the advanced alarm display.
3
COMMON SETTING
The status of occurrence of the advanced alarms (advanced user alarm/advanced system alarm), set by
advanced alarm observation, is displayed in a list.
SPECIFICATIONS

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
System
User
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
6
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm)
8 - 98
ALARM
Application example
Starting the ladder monitor function on advanced user
alarm display and searching a device automatically
from specified program file
(One-touch ladder jump function)
Touch Switch(Section 6.2.9)
Make setting with Advanced Alarm Observation
(Advanced User Alarm)(Section 8.2.5)
02/02/01 10:25 Machine error
02/02/01 13:25 Line 1 error
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder
display
Display the ladder

monitor function with
the touch switch.
8 - 99
A device corresponding
to a cause of an alarm is
automatically searched.
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced alarm display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display and others

3
COMMON SETTING
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display only

Relevant to advanced alarm display only.
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
The order of displaying objects on the GOT can be adjusted to that of the overlapped objects
objects within GOT]
Setting for
each project
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting for
each screen
on GT Designer2.
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)
6
Setting items
LAMP, SWITCH
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Designer2]
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 100
ALARM
8.4.1
2 System information(
(1) Functions relevant to other than advanced alarm display

Key Code Read Complete Signal
Key-In Disable Signal
Turns off the key input signal.
Disables all key inputs.
A 1254
Input disabled
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
Key input signal OFF

Key Code Input
Key Input Signal
(Write device)
(Write device: System Signal 2-1. b3)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key
Notifies the key input.
when a value is entered by the ASCII input or touch

switch.
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
B
A B C
348 B
348
The key code is notified
Section 2.9.1
(1) Functions relevant to system alarm and others


Stores the channel number where system alarm (GOT error)
Stores the channel number where system alarm
occurred.
(CPU error) occurred.

(network error) occurred.
8 - 101

8.4.2
Before setting
OVERVIEW
This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced alarm display function.
1 Method of displaying alarm

(1) Types of alarm displayed (
Section 8.4.5
Basic tab)
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
All alarm: Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
Occurring alarm: Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
--
--
-12:05
-10:14
09:45
12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15
12:05
Internal pressure error
Light error
10:14
09:45
12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15
Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is

displayed.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error
Restored Checked
12:25
10:55
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Restored Checked
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
In case of "Occurring alarm"
In case of "All alarm"

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Light error
(Checked)
The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light

error are deleted because these alarms have been restored.
(2) Comment display methods

The display methods below can be selected.(
5
Section 8.4.5
Basic tab)
(a) Fixed
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
(b) Float
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left.
If display the comment by flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width
or a comment in multiple lines can be displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58
(Restored)
COMMON SETTING
Alarm status
(Comment)
(Occurred)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment contents displayed

1)Comment No.1 (comment group)
Comment
Pwr. module
Check oil pre
Motor error
Restored Checked
Pwr. module temp. error.

12:05
12:25
11:50
Displayed as a flow from right to left.
Check fuse.
Comment over
multiple lines
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
Check oil pressure.

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
Comment Restored Checked

temp. error.
12:25
ssure.
12:05
11:50
error
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
error. Check
Check
Motor

Motor error
Restored Checked
12:05
12:25
11:50

8 - 102
ALARM
A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.
(3) Alarm display order (sort)

Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:
1 Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.
The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest
Sort in the descending order of occurrence date/time
Occurred
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 13:30
Comment
Pwr. module error
Oil pressure error
Drive module error
Motor error
Light error
Status
Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Restored Checked OccurFreq

--1
-2
18:50
16:30
5
16:20
14:10
4
15:00
1
14:30
13:50
Cum.Time Down Time Level

--1
-00:20
1
04:10
2
00:20
01:00
02:30
2
2
01:00
01:00
Setting example) Specify the settings as follows on the attribute tab.
Items displayed by the advanced

alarm display function
Select an item for sort

(Occurred).
8 - 103
Select a display order

(descending or ascending).

Group
2
1
1
1
1
1
2 By setting the switching device, the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on [Switching Device]
on the [Extended] tab))
Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency
OVERVIEW
For the details of the switching device, refer to the following.
Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time

16:20
16:30
5
04:10
15:00
4
02:30
14:10
-18:50
2
00:20
---1
1
01:00
14:30
13:50
Down Time
00:20
01:00
--01:00
Level
2
2
1
1
2
Group
1
1
1
2
1
3
COMMON SETTING
Status
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Ocr.
Chk.
Setting example) Set the items as follows on the Extended tab.

Switching device
D100
The sort condition can be changed by the value

of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).
(
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab)
: Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)

: Occurrence date/time
: Restoration date/time
: Check date/time
: Comment (displayed comment No.)
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
(Ascending:check
restore occur)
(Descending:occur
restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
11 : Down Time
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified
at the same time
If both of the [Sort] item on the Attribute tab and the [Priority Level Attribute] of the
[Switching Device] item on the Extended tab are specified, data are displayed in the
order specified by [Priority Level Attribute.]
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment
Drive module error
Motor error
Oil pressure error
Pwr. module error
Light error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 104
ALARM
Occurred
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 13:30
SPECIFICATIONS
Change the item for sorting to the occurrence frequency (descending order).
2 Operations by touch switches

Various operations are usable for displayed alarms by the touch switches for advanced alarm display.
These touch switches can be arranged easily by GT Designer2.
Touch switches for advanced alarm display
Remark
Details of the touch switches for advanced alarm display

8 - 105

8.4.3
Useful information
OVERVIEW
This section describes useful functions to know before using advanced alarm display.
1 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms displayed)

For advanced alarm display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods.
However, the display scope differs depending on the switching method
Drive
module
"Pwr. module error"

(group 1)
Equipment B
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment A
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Power
module
Control
module
"Control module error"

(group 3)

(group 3)
Middle Alarm
Equipment B
Drive
module
"Pwr. module error"

(group 4)
Control
module
General Alarm

(group 6)
: The alarm is occurring

: No alarm (normal run)
(1) Switch alarm hierarchies by touching the advanced alarm display directly or using the touch
switches.
Display the hierarchies below the selected alarm.
The following is the case that [Initial Display Hierarchy] on the Basic tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1)The alarm hierarchy specified for initial display
hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.
Occurred
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
Restored
All higher alarms are displayed
Checked
Line1
Equipment A
Line2
Equipment B
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Equipment A
Equipment B
2)Select an alarm to switch to middle alarms.

Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
Restored
Power
Checked
Control
Control
Power
Control
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
Display scope
3)The middle alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Comment
Restored Checked
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment A
Power
Control
Equipment B
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
Control
4)Select an alarm to switch to general alarms.

Occurred
Comment
Restored Checked
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display scope
5)The general alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.

Comment
Occurred
Restored Checked
12:25
Power
Control

8 - 106
ALARM
Power
module
Higher Alarm
Line2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Line1
COMMON SETTING
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch the advanced alarm display directly or switch the hierarchy by the touch switches
Use the device specified on[Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the Extended tab
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a

specified scope is being displayed
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an
alarm belonging to the higher/middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is
not displayed.
A specified scope is being displayed.

Occurred
Comment
Restored
Display scope
Checked
12:25
Power
Control
Display scope
Occurred
Comment
Restored
Checked
12:25
Power
The new alarm is not displayed!
Control
An alarm belonging to another

higher/middle hierarchy has occurred!
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified
hierarchy.(
This section
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device
specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching device" on the Extended tab)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)
8 - 107

1
OVERVIEW
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching device" on the
Extended tab
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device.
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
---
Restored Checked
-----
Line1
Equipment A
Power
Control
Line2
Equipment B
Control
Equipment B
Power
SPECIFICATIONS
GD110
Occurred
---
Control
Displays all middle alarms
----
Equipment A
Power
Control
Equipment B
Control
Equipment B
Power
Control
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Displays all general alarms
Display scope
GD110
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
12:10
10:00
09:15
08:35
Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
12:25
11:00
Pwr. module error
10:10
09:55
09:40
Control module error 10:20
Power
Control
Control
Power
Control
(1) Switching method to the upper alarm hierarchy

To switch the hierarchy to the upper alarm hierarchy (general alarms
alarms
middle
higher alarms), operate the touch switches for advanced alarm display.
(
(2) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm
hierarchy as the initial display hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are
displayed with the vertical hierarchies ignored.
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
----
7
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 09:00
04/06/01 08:40
Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
12:25
11:20
09:20
08:50
All the alarms belonging to the general hierarchy are displayed.
(3) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of
the hierarchy being displayed
When the advanced user alarms (alarm ID) to be displayed are switched or
language switching is performed, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified as the
initial display hierarchy are displayed.
8 - 108
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Restored Checked
ALARM
GD110
----
----
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment B error
Occurred
COMMON SETTING
Display scope
2 Setting of display colors for each alarm status, level, and group
The advanced alarm display function allows visually identifying alarms by setting display colors for each
items shown below.(
Section 8.4.5
Text tab)
Alarm status (occurrence, restore, and check)
Level
Group
Occurred
8 - 109
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
Identifies alarm
status visually!

1
3 Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
Setting available for text color,

style, and kanji region!
Comment
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
OVERVIEW
(1) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)

A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.
(2) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the
language switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
(
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device)
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment group settings
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Japanese
English
Japanese
6
LAMP, SWITCH
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
English
The language of the messages of advanced system alarms is set by the utility of the
GOT main unit.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
04/6/1 11:35:52
Language
switching device
Language switching
is available for the
table title since the
comment specified
in a comment
group can be used
for the table title!
Comment

8 - 110
ALARM
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
4 Display switching by device (Specify on [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)

Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
The display shown below is available. (
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab)
Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarms only) specified by
users.
Change the comments displayed according to the target user or purpose.
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and so on).
(1) Items to which a switching device can be set
Switching device
Display alarm
setting usable
Advanced user alarm
item
All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are
Hierarchy*1
Level
displayed.
*1
Alarms at the specified level are displayed.
Group*1
Alarms of the specified group are displayed.

The display order is changed between ascending order and
The display order is changed between ascending
descending order.
order and descending order.
Priority Level
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time,
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration
Attribute
check date/time, comment No., level, group, alarm status
date/time, check date/time, error code, or alarm
(occurred, checked, or restored), occurrence frequency,
status (occurred, checked, or restored) can be
cumulative time, or down time can be selected.
selected
The setting of advanced user alarm observation (alarm ID)
Advanced
displayed by advanced alarm display can be changed.
User Alarm
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced
Observation
alarm display window.
General Comment
-
Group
The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be changed
Middle Comment
for each comment group.
Group
The comment displayed can be changed according to the user
Higher Comment
or purpose.
Group
*1 The hierarchy, level, and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
8 - 111

Assume that the alarms below occurred.
Comment
Status
Temp. error
Ocr.
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
Oil error
Rstr.
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
Rstr.
Fuse error
Select display
All levels
level
Select sort item Occurred
Major
Middle
Level
Alarm
Level
1
3
3
3
3
2
Minor
Displays all alarms (D102: 0)
All levels
Major
Displays alarms at level 1 (D102: 1)
Middle
Displays alarms at level 2 (D102: 2)
Minor
Display alarms at level 3 (D102: 3)
Change items for sorting alarms.

Occurred
Level
Touch switch for switching the alarm display data

Alarm
Minor
Switch the display depending on the level.
SPECIFICATIONS
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40
Displays alarms in the order of occurrence

date (descending order) (D103: 1)
Displays alarms in the order of level
(descending order) (D103: 5)
Displays alarms in the order of alarm status
(descending order) (D103: 7)
Alarm
"3" is written into D102.
(1)
"7" is written into D103
(2)
Only level 3 alarms are displayed.
Switching device
(priority level
attribute): D103
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Switching device
(level): D102
3
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (level) is set to D102 and the switching
device (priority level attribute) to D103.
7
Alarm display is sorted
by alarm status.
Comment
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Status Level
3
Ocr.
Chk.
3
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3
Only level 3 alarms are displayed.
Comment
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
10:00
08:10
11:20
Motor error
Fuel error
Oil error
Status Level
3
Ocr.
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3
Chk.
3
Alarm display is sorted in the order of

alarm status (occur
restore
check).
Changing the alarm sorting order by "Priority Level Attribute"

Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot
be changed while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment
Status Level
1
Temp. error
Ocr.
3
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
3
Oil error
Rstr.
3
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
3
Rstr.
Fuse error
2
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40

8 - 112
ALARM
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5 Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
(
Section 8.4.5
External output tab)
(1) Alarm data written into the device

Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (15 types).
Alarm ID
Comment group No.
Comment No.
Alarm status
Occurred date
Occurred time
Restored date
Restored time
Checked date
Checked time
Level
Group
Occurred frequency
Cumulative time
Down time
(2) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm display are written.
D200: 0601H
D201: 2004H
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10
Comment
Temp. error
Motor error
The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device.
Touch mode when data are written in the device

When write alarm data into the device, set "Touch mode" on the Basic tab to
"Selection" or "Operation."
8 - 113


Select the [Object]
Alarm] menus.
Click
[Advanced Alarm Display]
(Advanced User Alarm Display) /
[Advanced User Alarm] / [Advanced System
OVERVIEW
(Advanced System Alarm Display).
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Click on the position where advanced alarm display to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged advanced alarm display, the setting dialog box is displayed.
Refer to the following description (
Section 8.4.5 Setting items) to perform the setting.
Easy setting method

The direct setting of object can be made on property sheet.
GT Designer2 Version
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
(Section 12.1.1 Batch setting of multiple objects/figures on the same

screen (Property sheet))
COMMON SETTING
8.4.4
Remark
The adjusting method when shape is set for object.
D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape

after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Object outline frame

Shape
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
Comment
02/03/01 10:25 Error

Detail
Down
Delete
LAMP, SWITCH
Up
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 114
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
4 Set the touch switch for scrolling up and down the advanced alarm display and for displaying alarm data
in detail.
8.4.5
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed (advanced user alarm / advanced system
alarm), message display method and operations when the screen is touched.
Basic
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
User Alarm
: Displays the alarms set by the advanced user alarm observation.

After checking it, select an alarm ID of the advanced user alarm to display.
Display Alarm
(
System Alarm
Section 8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User Alarm))
: Displays the alarms set by the advanced system alarm observation.

(
Section 8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm))
Select how to display collected alarms.

Display Target Status
Section 8.4.2
(1) Types of alarm displayed (Section 8.4.5 Basic tab))
All Alarm
: Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is displayed.
Occurring Alarm
: Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
8 - 115

8.4.5 Setting items
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Basic
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm

(
Section 8.4.2
Fixed
(2) Comment display methods)
: Displays the comment to display when an alarm occurs in a line.
Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line
Display Type
and after of the comment is not displayed.

: Displays the comment flowing it from right to left when an alarm occurs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Float
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting "Float," select a speed to display the comment as a flow by "Flowing
Speed."
If setting "Display Type" to "Float," select a speed for flowing display.
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per
Middle
Low
3
COMMON SETTING
second.
Floating Speed
second.
second.
Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
(This item can be set up only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.)
General
: General alarms are initially displayed.
Middle
: Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Higher
: Higher alarms are initially displayed.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Initial Display Hierarchy
Select the operation when the advanced alarm display screen is touched.
None
: No operation even when touched.
Selection
: The touched alarm is selected.
Operation
: Alarm hierarchies are switched or the detailed screen is displayed for the touched
alarm.
(This item can be selected for advanced user alarms only.)
Touch Mode
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Operations differ depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.

When higher/middle alarm is displayed : The alarm hierarchy is switched to the
lower one.
When general alarms are displayed
: The touched alarm is selected.

When touching the selected alarm again,
the detailed screen is displayed.
Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, no shape will be displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
By clicking on the Others button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected as shape.
(
Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Select the frame color/plate color.
Plate color
Frame
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Format
Plate
Frame color
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.1.2 Batch setting
and managing objects/figures for each purpose (Category workspace))

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 116
ALARM
Shape
Basic
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Layer
Description
When setting an object without superimposing it, set the object by default (Back).
When setting an object with superimposing it, the object has to be set to Front or Back place.
(
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings)
The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer2 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in
Object Name
the operation log.

This Object Name item is displayed in other than the Basic tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
8 - 117

8.4.5 Setting items
Model
1
2 Table tab
OVERVIEW
Set the display format for advanced alarm display (font, Number of rows and line).
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Font
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Gothic
Stroke
16dot HQ Mincho
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced system alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the
standard font.
Size
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

(
Title Format
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select a font of the characters displayed.
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity)
Set the format of the characters displayed on the title of advanced alarm display.
Select a display format for text (Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
(
Solid
Section 2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)
Regular Bold
LAMP, SWITCH
Style
Solid Raised
Select a color of the shadow when the [Style] item is set to [Solid] or [Raised].
Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.
Section 2.3.1 Fonts)

Japan
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
: Display the characters in Japanese kanji.
China(GB)-Mincho : Display the characters in China(GB) kanji.

KANJI Region
China(Big5)-Gothic : Display the characters in China(Big5) kanji.
Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"
Japan
Text
China (GB) -Mincho
Select a color for the text to be displayed.

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 118
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
External Output
Trigger
Item
Description
Model
Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).

Example: When setting the number of rows to 3
Number of Rows
Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25
Temp. error
11:25
10:45
04/11/05 12:05
Fuel error
12:25
12:28
04/11/06 08:30
Motor error
09:45
09:40
Restored Checked
Number of rows
(not including the title row)
Set which alarm is displayed in the top row when the number of alarms exceeds that of rows.
When the number of alarms exceeds the value set for [Display Head Row]
The alarm corresponding to the value set for [Display Head Row] is displayed in the top row.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Head Row] is set to 2, and the number of
alarms is 5
Alarm occurrence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display order
of alarms
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Fuse error
04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number

specified on "Display Head Row."
When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Display Head Row]
The last alarm is displayed in the bottom row.
alarms is 5
Display Head Row*1
Alarm occurrence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display order
of alarms
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Comment
Oil error
Fuel error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.
When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Number of Rows]
The setting for [Display Head Row] becomes invalid, and all the alarms are displayed.
alarms is 2
Alarm occurrence
1. Temp. error
2. Fuse error
Display order
of alarms
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Temp error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
Displays all occurred alarms.
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the
characters such as time display.
X
: 0 to 32 dots (Available in 1-dot units)

According to the setting of "Size" (magnification of character size),
Space
Occurrence date/time
the actual horizontal space is as follows:

"Magnification of character size
set value in Space"
Example:
When "Size" is set to 2 and "Space" to 8, space of 16 dots is
ensured.
Check this item when adding ruled lines to the advanced alarm display.
After checking it, select a "Line style," "Width," and "Color."
Draw Ruled Line
When not draw ruled lines

Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 08:10 Motor error
8 - 119
Restored
11:25
10:00
When draw ruled lines

Checked
10:45
08:45
Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 08:10 Motor error
Restored
11:25
10:00

8.4.5 Setting items
Checked
10:45
08:45
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
Item
Description
Line Style
Select a ruled line type for advanced alarm display.
Width
Select a ruled line width for advanced alarm display (1,2,3,4,5, or 7 dots).
Color
Select a ruled line color for advanced alarm display.
Cursor
External Output
Model
OVERVIEW
Table
Basic
Select a color of the cursor for selecting the alarm.
If the number of alarms becomes higher than the numbers set to [Display Head Row] while Advanced
Alarm is displayed on the GOT, [Display Head Row] setting will not be valid.
To enable [Display Head Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the Advanced
Alarm display screen.
Application example of Display Head Row
If different [Display Head Row] are set on screens, different advanced alarm display
can be displayed for each screen.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
Screen 2
(Display Head Row: 4)
Screen 3
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7th
8th
9th
Screen 1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Alarm occurred number
3
COMMON SETTING
*1 Display head row
SPECIFICATIONS
For details of *1, refer to the following.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 120
ALARM
3 Text tab
Set the character format in the column for displaying alarms.
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Alarm Format
Model
Set the format of the character color in the column for displaying alarms.
Style
(
Solid
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
Fixed
: Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Status
: Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occur,
Level
: Select this item when using different colors depending on level.
Group
: Select this item when using different colors depending on group.
Set the color after selecting "Fixed".

Text Color Switching*1
restored, or checked).
This item is displayed only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
This item is displayed only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
Status
Select character colors for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked).
Level
Select character colors for each level number. (enabled only when advanced user alarm)
Group
Select character colors for each group number. (enabled only when advanced user alarm)
8 - 121

8.4.5 Setting items
2
SPECIFICATIONS
For higher/middle alarm, the character colors specified on "Text Color Switching" are displayed in the
following character colors regardless of alarm status or level/group.
"Fixed"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Fixed."
"Status"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Occurred."
"Level"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Level 1."
"Group"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Group 1."
OVERVIEW
*1 Display of alarm status, level color, and group color for higher/middle alarms
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 122
ALARM
4 Attribute tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (display items and display order).
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
Item
External Output
Description
Model
Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.

Direct
Select this item to enter the characters displayed on the title in [Title (Direct)].
Select this item to display characters displayed on the title in the comment of comment group.
After the selection, set the group No.
Group No.
: Set the comment group where characters displayed on the title has
Adjust Text Size*3
:Check this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
been registered.
Title
Comment
When not checking this item, character string automatically starts a

new line where appropriate for adjustment.
After the check, set the minimum character size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots, default: 8)
Hide
Select this item to hide the title.
8 - 123

8.4.5 Setting items
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
Item
Number of Display
Attributes
External Output
Description
Model
Set the number of the items displayed for the alarm (1 to 10).
OVERVIEW
Table
Select the items displayed for advanced alarm display.

"Occurred"
"Status"
"Comment"
Comment
"Level"
"Cum.Time"
"OccurFreq"
"Down Time"
"Group"
Status Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time Down Time Level Group
-04/06/01 20:00 Oil pressure error Chk.

Chk.
-04/06/01 18:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:10 Oil pressure error Rstr. 16:30
-18:50
16:20
1
2
2
--00:40
--00:20
Occurred
: Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment
: Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Status
: Select when displaying alarm status.
1
1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
"Checked"
"Restored"
2
1
1
The alarm status is displayed as follows.

: An alarm is occurring
Rstr.
: The alarm is restored
Chk.
: Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checked
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the alarm
COMMON SETTING
Ocr.
was checked.
Attribute
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is displayed.
Comment Restored
Motor error
Checked
Check
Comment Restored
Motor error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Checked
12:00
(Key code : FFB4H)
OccurFreq : Select this item when displaying the number of alarm occurrences.
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarm.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Cum.Time : Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm
occurrences in the past (total down time).
Down Time : Select this item when displaying the time from the alarm occurrence to restoration of it.
Leve
: Select this item when displaying the level specified on the alarm.
Group
: Select this item when displaying the group specified on the alarm.
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarms.
LAMP, SWITCH
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarms.
Input the characters of the title of advanced alarm display directly.
Characters for the number specified by "Width" can be input.
The title can be input directly only when "Direct" is selected for "Title."
Title (Comment)
Set the comment No. (comment group) or content of the comment displayed on the title of advanced
alarm display.
(Contents)
Set the comment group on the "Group No." of "Title."
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Title (Direct)

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 124
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
External Output
Trigger
Item
Description
Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.
Example: When the message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
Comment
Motor error
Restored
11:25
Checked
10:45
Displayed in a width of 12 digits
The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Width
Occurred
: This item is set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" to be set up later.
Comment
: 10 to 80 digits
Status
: 6 to 80 digits
Restored
Checked
OccurFreq : 5 to 80 digits
Number of
Cum.Time : 8 to 80 digits
Display
Down Time : 8 to 80 digits
Attributes
Level
: 3 to 80 digits
Group
: 3 to 80 digits
Select format in which the date/time of alarm occurrence (occurred/restored/checked) is set up.
After selecting this item, select the display formats of date and time.
Contents
Date/Time : Select when displaying both date and time.

Date
: Select when displaying date only.
Time
: Select when displaying time only.
Date
Format*1
Set the display format of date by clicking
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Date."
Time
Format*2
Set the display format of time by clicking
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Time."

Select an item and method to sort alarm display.
The same items as "Attribute" can be selected as the items sorted.
Select one of the following 2 methods.
Sort
Ascending
: Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending
: Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.
When selecting "Status" for the item sorted, items are sorted as follows.
Ascending
: Checked
Restored
Occurred
Descending
: Occurred
Restored
Checked
For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following.
(
Section 8.4.2
Method of displaying alarm)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

For details of *3, refer to Section 5.3.3 Object size change.
8 - 125

8.4.5 Setting items
Model
*1 Date settings
OVERVIEW
Set the display type of date.

The display type of date set can be confirmed in the preview area.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Preview area
Item
COMMON SETTING
Description
The result of date setting is displayed as a display example.
(Preview area)
Select a sorting order of year/month/day.

dd/mm/yy: 24/01/04
mm/dd/yy: 01/24/04
Select a display type of date.
Select a display type depending on whether to use upper/lower case for English/alphabetic
expression, presence/absence of day display and a type of Japanese expression.
The display example below shows the case that "Sort" is set to "yy/mm/dd."
Type
: 04/01/24
Type 11
: 2004/JAN/24
Type 2
: Jan/24
Type 12
: 2004/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 3
: JAN/24
Type 13
: 2004/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 4
: Jan/24(FRI)
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 5
: JAN/24(FRI)
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 6
: 04/Jan/24
Type 3 (Japanese)
Type 7
: 04/JAN/24
Type 4 (Japanese)
Type 8
: 04/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 5 (Japanese)
Type 9
: 04/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 6 (Japanese)
Type 10
: 2004/Jan/24
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Type 1
"Type 1 (Japanese)" to "Type 6 (Japanese)" can be selected only when setting "Sort" to "yy/mm/
dd."
Select a delimiter for year, month, and day.
"/"
: 04/01/24
"-"
: 04-01-24
"."
: 04.01.24
Fill with Zeros
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Check when displaying "0" before month and day.

Example: Jan. 24, 2004
When checked
: 04/01/24
When not checked
: 04/1/24

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 126
ALARM
Delimiter
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
yy/mm/dd: 04/01/24
LAMP, SWITCH
Sort
*2 Time settings
Set a display type of time.
The display type of time set can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
Item
Description
The result of time setting is displayed as a display example.
(Preview area)
Select a display type of time.
Select a display type depending on whether to use English expression, presence/absence of am
and pm and a type of Japanese expression.
Type
Type 1
: 16:28
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 2
: 16:28:28
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 3
: 04:28(PM)
Type 3 (Japanese)
Check when displaying "0" before hour, minute, and second.

Fill with Zeros
Example: 5 past 6
06:05 (When checked)
6:5
8 - 127
(When not checked)

8.4.5 Setting items
1
5 Extended tab
OVERVIEW
Set the switching of the data displayed by advanced alarm display using a device.
This tab is displayed by checking the function list at the bottom of the dialog box.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Text
Attribute
Extended
Item
Trigger
External Output
Description
Model
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Table
Check the item whose display is switched by the device.

Switching Device
Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
tab)
Check this item when switching the alarm hierarchy displayed by the value of the device.
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
Hierarchy*1
After checking this item, set the switching device. (
This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.
LAMP, SWITCH
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Level
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.

This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Group
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 128
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Table
Text
Extended
Attribute
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Priority Level
Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.
Attribute*2
Check this item when displaying the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
Advanced User
Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Alarm
When storing "0" in this device, the alarm with the alarm ID set on the "User Alarm" item of
Observation
"Display Alarm" on the Basic tab is displayed.
Switching
If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
Device

Check this item when switching the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarms,
General
middle alarms, or higher alarms by the value of the device.
Comment Group /
After checking the item, set the switching device. (
Middle Comment
When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group set by advanced user alarm observation is
Group / Higher
displayed.
Comment Group
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.

This item can be selected only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
User ID*3
Set a user ID for advanced user alarm display.

Check this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
Operation Log Target

(
Section 15.2 Operation Log Function)
To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).
Display
Set "0" when not setting the security function.
Security
Be sure to set a number for security (Operation) larger than the number for security (Display).
Operation
Section 5.8 Security Function)
*1 Hierarchies
Store values in the device to switch hierarchies.
b15
b14 to b2
b1
b0
b1 to b0
: Specifis the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0)
: General alarms
01(1)
: Middle alarms
10(2)
: Higher alarms
b14 to b2
: Not usable
b15
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control
identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, set this bit to "0."
0
: Switching by the switching device
1
: Switching by touching the display area
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
Section 8.4.7
device
8 - 129
(3) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching

8.4.5 Setting items
*2 Priority level attribute

Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b0
OVERVIEW
b1
: Specifies a sort key. ( : Reserved)
b14 to b4
4H
5H
6H
7H
: Comment No.
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
9H
AH
BH
: OccurFreq
: Cum.Time
: Down Time
2
SPECIFICATIONS
: Regular (Occurred)
: Occurred Date/Time
: Restored Date/Time
: Checked Date/Time
: Not usable
0H
1H
2H
3H
b15
b2
: Specifies ascending order or descending order. ( : Reserved)

0
H : Descending order
8
H : Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
Occur Freq, Cum. Time and Down Time are effective only when the collection mode of
advanced alarm observation is "Cumulative."
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
*3 User ID
When user ID setting is required
If advanced alarm display and alarm history display / alarm list display are set on the same screen,
the touch switches set for advanced alarm display may not operate.
To make the touch switches for advanced alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced
alarm display.
Alarm list display
02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error
04/11/05 12:35
Checked
10:45
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error
Occurred
Comment Restored
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25
04/11/05 12:05 Light error
12:28
Advanced alarm display
Oil pressure error
Cursor ON
Up
Check
Cursor OFF
Down
Delete
Touch switch for advanced

alarm display
LAMP, SWITCH
If the same user ID is set for advanced alarm display and touch switches, the operations of
the touch switches for advanced alarm display are effective for advanced alarm display.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 130
ALARM
b3 to b0
b3
COMMON SETTING
b14 to b4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b15
Setting method
Set a user ID for advanced alarm display.
Set the touch switches for advanced alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
(

Setting of touch switch (Action tab)
8 - 131

8.4.5 Setting items
1
6 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
Set the condition for displaying an object.

This tab is displayed by checking the item of Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
For the details of the display condition, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Specify the device to set on the display/operation condition.
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Device
Model
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Trigger Type
Description
Select a condition to display advanced alarms.

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 132
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7 External output tab

Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm selected on advanced alarm display into the
device.
This tab is displayed by checking the item of Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
Use External Output
Section 8.4.3
Writing alarm data into device
Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary
: Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
ON
: When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into
the device.
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
the device.
When selecting "ON" or "OFF," set the device to be used for trigger.
(
When cursor is
Set the external output when the cursor is hidden.

Clear External Output Device: The external output device value is cleared.
hidden
Output alarm information of the top row: The alarm information displayed in the top row is output.
Device
Set the device to which alarm data are written.

Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
Head Device
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)

(
Alarm ID
Check this item when writing the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
This item can be used only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.

8 - 133

8.4.5 Setting items
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Comment Group
Check this item when writing the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm
No.
into the device. This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.
OVERVIEW
Basic
Check this item when writing the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm into
Comment No.
the device. When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.
Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
b15 to b3
b0
b1
b0
: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
1: Occurring
b1
: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.
b2
: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not.
3
COMMON SETTING
0: Not checked 1: Checked
0: Not effective 1: Effective

This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
Occurred Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.
*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.
Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.
*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.
Checked Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.
Restored Date
Checked Date
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.
Level*1
This item can be used only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.
Group*1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Restored
Occurred
Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the device.
Frequency*1
Cumulative
Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
Time*1,*2
Down Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarm is displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment
group No., and comment No.).
In addition, if the alarm is restored, "0" is written into the down time.
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm
Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device
: Not usable
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b15 to b3
Date*1,*2

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 134
ALARM
Alarm Status*1
b2
SPECIFICATIONS
The following values are written.
*2 Writing format of date and time

Date and time are written in word data of two words.
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
b15
D254
b15
D255
to
b8 b7
Month (1 to 12)
to
to
b0
Day (1 to 31)
b8 b7
to
b0
Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year
(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15
D256
to
b8 b7
to
b0
Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)
b15
D257
to
b8 b7
00H
to
b0
Hour (0 to 23)
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

b15
D254
to
b8 b7
07H
(Month)
b15
to
(Day)
b8 b7
20H
D255
to b0
01H
to
b0
04H
(Dominical year)
b15
D256
to
b8 b7
24H
(Minute)
b15
D257
to
00H
b8 b7
to
56H
b0
(Second)
to
b0
12H
(Hour)
8 - 135

8.4.5 Setting items
Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display
Touch switch for displaying advanced alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced alarm display.
OVERVIEW
8.4.6
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch switch
Key code
COMMON SETTING
Touch switches for advanced alarm display
Description
Show/Hide the Cursor.
FFB0H
Hide cursor
FFB1H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
4
15:10
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Show cursor
14:50
Show the cursor!
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If the cursor is hidden:

The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Move cursor upward
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
FFB2H
6
Restored Checked
14:00
13:15
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 13:54 Fuel error
Rstr.
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error Chk.
Ocr.
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error
Move to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Move cursor downward
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
14:50
FFB3H
15:10
14:50
Move the cursor!

8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display
8 - 136
ALARM
Function
Key code
Description
The alarm status is changed to "checked."
Display date/time of selected data

(check)
FFB4H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Ocr.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Display date/time of all data

(check all)
FFB5H
14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
FFB6H
Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
17:15
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
15:10
14:50
14:50
The restored alarm is deleted!

If touched while general alarms are displayed, the detailed screen of the selected
alarms is displayed.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
Display detail*1
Temp. error on power

module.
Check power module.
15:10
14:50
The detailed screen is displayed!
FFB8H
If touched while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, alarms displayed
are switched to the lower hierarchy.
Occurred
---
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Status
---
Restored Checked
---
---
Move to the lower hierarchy*1
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Status
Restored Checked
Ocr.
Ocr.
The hierarchy is moved to the lower one!

For the details of *1, refer to next page.
8 - 137

Function
Key code
Description
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
17:11
15:10
OVERVIEW
The selected alarm is reset.
14:50
FFB9H
15:10
SPECIFICATIONS
2
Reset the selected alarm data*2
14:50
The selected alarm is reset!

Advanced user alarms
The device value is changed to OFF status/reset value specified on the Device
tab.Resetting is performed only for general alarms.
COMMON SETTING
Advanced system alarms

The alarm status on GOT is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored."
Advanced alarm data are saved in the memory card as an alarm log file.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Save alarm contents to Memory Card
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
FFBBH
The data are saved in the memory card!

A device is automatically searched in specified program file by coil-search/defect
search, and the result is displayed on the ladder monitor screen. (One-touch
Specify the search mode and program file to be searched in the setting dialog box
of the Advanced User Alarm Observation. (
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
6
LAMP, SWITCH
FFBCH
M999
MOV 1 D1
MOV 2 D2
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Displays the ladder monitor screen

(displays the ladder including the specified device)

8 - 138
ALARM
Display ladder
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
ladder jump function)
Function
Key code
Description
The hierarchy of the alarms displayed is switched.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Restored Checked
Comment
Status
-Pwr. module error
-Drive module error
Restored Checked
-----
Move to the upper hierarchy*1

FFC2H
Occurred
---
The hierarchy is moved to the upper one!

For the details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
*1 Alarms for which "Display detail," "Move to the lower hierarchy," and "Move to the upper hierarchy" are
available
"Display detail," "Move to the lower hierarchy," and "Move to the upper hierarchy" are available only for
advanced user alarms but not available for advanced system alarms.
*2 Resetting of advanced user alarms
To change the device value to the OFF status/reset value by the touch switches, "YES" the "Reset" on the
Device tab of advanced alarm observation.
Section 8.2.5
8 - 139
(2) Device tab

(1) Operation method by directly touching Advanced Alarm Display

By setting [Touch Mode] on the Basic tab, the operations below can be used.
Basic tab)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
The touched alarm is selected.

(2) Change of cursor color
The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor]
on the Table tab.
Section 8.4.5
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
The alarm is deselected by touching it

again.
Table tab)
Hierarchy switching and detail display of alarms (Set [Touch mode] to

[Operation])
Alarm hierarchies can be switched and detail screen can be displayed by
touching the advanced alarm display directly. (equivalent operation to
displaying detail or moving to the lower hierarchy)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
Occurredthe fuse ofComment Restored Checked

Change
04/06/01
16:51 Fuse error
the
power supply
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
module.
(2) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor] on the Table tab.
(
Section 8.4.5
Table tab)
(3) Setting method of touch switches
Section 6.2.9 Setting items of key code switch

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When the selected alarm is touched again, display is moved

to the lower alarm hierarchy and detail screen is displayed.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Selection of an alarm (Set [Touch mode" to [Selection.])

Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Section 8.4.5
LAMP, SWITCH
8 - 140
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
Display detail (FFB8H) / Move to the lower hierarchy (FFB8H)

This switch operates in 2 ways for a key code.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, the display is moved to the
lower hierarchy.
When general alarms are displayed, details are displayed on the comment
window.
COMMON SETTING
The touch switches for advanced alarm display operate differently depending on the
display status.
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by
page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).
OVERVIEW
Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status
8.4.7
Precautions
Precautions for using advanced alarm display are as shown below.

(1) Maximum number of the objects that can be placed (set) on a screen
Only one advanced alarm display can be set (placed) on a base screen, an overlap window, or a
superimpose window, respectively.
(2) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device (set on the extended tab) is specified for the objects below,
the objects may not be displayed on the specified initial display hierarchy.
This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching
device when the screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects
above, respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Example: When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)
Setting of advanced user alarm display
Setting of advanced alarm popup display
Hierarchy switching device
: GD10
: GD10
Initial display hierarchy
: General
: Higher
Place on base screen 1
Operations when base screen 1 is displayed
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
Occurred
--
-- Line 1 abend
Comment
Line 1 abend
-- Line 1 abend
Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)
Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)
2 (higher)
Different values are
written into the same device
8 - 141

8.4.7 Precautions
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Corresponding comment No.
Comments displayed
General alarms being displayed.
Middle alarms being displayed.
Higher alarms being displayed.
The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.
Higher alarms being displayed
Occurred
-----
Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy
Touch!
Masking
1
AND
1
Middle alarms being displayed
Occurred
-----
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Mask value (7FFFH)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Value of hierarchy
switching device
1

LAMP, SWITCH
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.7 Precautions
8 - 142
ALARM
SPECIFICATIONS
Value of hierarchy switching device
(a) When masking is applied
1
OVERVIEW
(3) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the Extended tab) is
changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
(b) When masking is not applied

0
Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Touch!
Occurred
-----
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

Occurred
-----

middle hierarchy
0
Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767
The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.
(4) Setting for saving advanced alarm data in the memory card
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save advanced
alarm data.
(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm
display was specified to save the data.
(5) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the text
color is set to Black with [Text Color Switching] of the Text tab. (Characters will be hidden since the
text color and the cursor color are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to
other than Black.
(6) Precautions for setting
(a) Setting number
When object setting exceeds the user area of the GOT in size by the setting in the advanced
recipe setting, the advanced recipe function cannot be used.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method for the setting size of the advanced alarm display, refer to the following.
Section 2.4
8 - 143
Object specifications

8.4.7 Precautions
For free user area available for GOT, refer to the following manual.
OVERVIEW
(Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA)
(b) Saving a file

The memory card must be larger than the file to be saved in size.
For the file size, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure
(7) Precautions for using comment group

When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, "No
message" is displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.7 Precautions
8 - 144
ALARM
Precautions for use

(1) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored
If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in
advanced user alarm observation (
Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on
[Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)), it may take a few minutes to display the data.
(2) Priority of alarm display
(a) When the alarms displayed have not been changed by [Switching Device] on the Extended tab
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
(b) When the alarms displayed have been changed by [Switching Device] on the Extended tab
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.
(3) Display of the comment window and key window
When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
When try to open the detail display (comment
window display) while the key window is displayed.
Key window
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9 AC
6 Del
3 +/Enter

Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!
8 - 145

8.4.7 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
(4) Advanced alarm display when using the set overlay screen function
When setting the advanced alarm display on the called screen, do not set the advanced alarm
display on the base screen.
The called screen cannot display the advanced alarm display when the advanced alarm display is
set on the base screen.
2
Restored

on called screen
SPECIFICATIONS
Comment
Fuel error
Internal pressure error 16:10
Restored
15:10

on base screen
3
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:27 Oil error
For settings of the set overlay screen, refer to the following.

Section 15.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
(5) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time
For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
the following.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
04/06/01 17:24
04/06/01 16:15
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.7 Precautions
8 - 146
ALARM
8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
Alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the
screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since the display can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
.
Before setting advanced alarm popup display
This section explains the advanced alarm popup display of the advanced alarm
function.
Read the following before setting advanced alarm popup display.

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
Advanced user
alarm
User
Advanced user
alarm
8 - 147
System
Advanced
system alarm
System
Advanced
system alarm
Auxiliary
setting
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
Key
window
For advanced alarm popup display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this
section.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display, (advanced alarm popup display,) only
Relevant to advanced alarm popup display, (advanced alarm popup display) only.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display only

Enabling/Disabling advanced alarm popup display
The advanced alarm popup display is enabled or disabled for each screen.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display (advanced alarm popup display) and others
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
SPECIFICATIONS
8.5.1
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
04/10/10 10:30 Emergency stop

A1254 B 348
A 1254 B 348
Setting items
[Carry out display of advanced alarm
pop up]
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The corresponding comment pops up at the top row of the screen

when an alarm occurs
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display and others

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
row.

A 1254
LAMP, SWITCH
Turns off the key input signal
Input disabled
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Key Input Signal
(Write device: System Signal 2-1. b3)
Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error
code, GOT error detecting signal).

1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
B 348
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
8
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348

8 - 148
ALARM
The system alarm message is cleared
Section 2.9.1

Stores the channel number where system alarm (GOT error)
occurred.
(CPU error) occurred.

(network error) occurred.
8 - 149

8.5.2
Before setting
(1) Alarm types

For advanced alarm popup display, advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms can be
displayed.
Advanced alarm popup display is set as follows.
(a) Setting of advanced alarm popup display
Select the alarm type displayed by advanced alarm popup display.
(
Section 8.5.5
Basic tab)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Displayable alarm types and settings
OVERVIEW
This section describes the setting and function needed for using the advanced alarm popup display.
3
COMMON SETTING
Select the alarm type displayed
(b) Auxiliary setting for each screen

Set whether to display popup display and the position of the popup display for each base
screen.
The setting is carried out on the Auxiliary Settings tab of the Base screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3) Select a display position
1) Click
(1) When the display position overlaps other objects

If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display,
the object cannot be operated. Therefore, set the object so that it does not overlap
other objects.
(2) Switching of display position by touch operation
The position of advanced alarm popup display can also be switched by touch
operation.
Section 8.5.3
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2) Check
LAMP, SWITCH
(3) Switching of display position

8 - 150
ALARM
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) Settings required for using advanced alarm popup display

Set the alarm displayed on the advanced alarm observation screen.
(a) To display advanced user alarms
Check "Popup Display" on the advanced user alarm observation screen.
Displays the alarm of the alarm ID on
which "Popup Display" is checked
Purpose of checking "Popup Display"

This setting is to select whether to use popup display when displaying the advanced
user alarms of multiple alarm IDs.
The advanced user alarms can be displayed with one alarm ID refined by using a
device.
Section 8.5.3
Display switching by device
(b) To display advanced system alarms

Check "Target" on the advanced system alarm observation screen.
Displays the advanced system
alarm to which "Target" is checked
8 - 151

1
With the advanced popup display, an alarm of the "Occurred" status (including "Chk") is displayed.
When the alarm becomes "Restored" (including the recovered alarm) status, the display disappears.
Alarm status
Occurred
10:30
Status
Temp. error
Ocr.
Occurred
04/6/1
10:30
Comment
Status
Temp. error
Rstr.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1
Alarm status
Comment
OVERVIEW
2 Alarms displayed by popup display
Restore
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
COMMON SETTING
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The restored alarm is not displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 152
ALARM
A 1254 A 1254
3 Selection of display method

The following display methods are available. (
Section 8.5.5
Basic tab)
(1) Fixed
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed in a fixed line.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms can be switched and displayed automatically. (Set
the "Display Number" on the basic tab to "Plural")
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
The occurring alarms are switched and displayed!

(The cycle for switching display can be set by "Switching Cycle" on the basic tab)
(2) Float
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed as a flow from right to left.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms are displayed in order.
(Set the "Display Number" on the basic tab to "Plural")
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
04/6/1
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
348
10:30
348
Temp. error
348
348
04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
348
348
9:45 Fuse error
The occurring errors are displayed as a flow from right to left

(The flow speed can be specified on "Floating Speed" on the basic tab.)
(1) Display priority (display order) when multiple alarms occur

Section 8.5.6
(3) Alarm display priority
(2) When more than one comment rows are specified
Fixed
: Only the comment of the first row is displayed.
Comments on and after the second row cannot be displayed.
Float
: Displays the comment of the second row as a flow after the comment
of the first row.
(The same applies to the third row and after.)
8 - 153

8.5.3
Useful information
OVERVIEW
This section describes some useful functions to know before using advanced alarm popup display.
1 Operations when touching popup display directly

The following operations are available.
touched. (
Section 8.5.5
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Screen switching

Touching the alarm display can switch the screen to the base screen of the specified No. or
overlapping window 1.
This function allows displaying the detailed alarm process screen when the popup display is
Basic tab)
3
B 348 B 348
Occurred
04/6/1 10:30
04/6/1 9:45
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1 8:15
Oil error
COMMON SETTING
Alarm details display/process screen
A 1254 A 1254
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch!
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Displays the base screen of the specified No.

or overlapping window 1
(2) Stage hierarchy switching/detail display

The display hierarchy of comments can be switched (only when advanced user alarms are
displayed)
Displays middle alarms
Displays general alarms
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348
Touch!
Switches higher
middle hierarchy
- Pwr. module error

Touch!
Switches middle
general hierarchy
04/6/1
B 348
Temp. error
Touch!
Switches general
hierarchy detail
display
Detail display
LAMP, SWITCH
Displays higher alarms
- Line abend
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic tab)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 8.5.5
A 1254 A 1254
B on
348 B 348
Temp. error
power module
Check temperature
04/6/1 Temp. error

8 - 154
ALARM
(1) Hierarchies that can be switched by touch operation

By touch operation, hierarchies can be switched only to the lower ones.
To switch to the upper hierarchy, set "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the
extended tab, and store the hierarchy value in the device.
Section 8.5.5
Extended tab
(2) Difference of display scope depending on the switching hierarchies method
Display scope is different between the case that hierarchies are switched by touch
operation and by switching device. For details, refer to the following.
This section
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user
alarms is displayed)
8 - 155

Displayed on bottom of the screen
Displayed on top of the screen

04/6/1
A 1254 A 1254
Displayed on center of the screen
10:30
Temp.
error
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348
1
OVERVIEW

If any other object is hidden by an advanced alarm popup display, the display position can be
switched by touch operation. (When [Display Position Switching] is set to enabled on the Basic tab
in the Advanced Alarm Popup Display dialog box)
B 348
04/6/1
10:30 Temp. error
Display
position
switching
Display
position
switching
SPECIFICATIONS
A 1254Temp.
A 1254
error
04/6/1 10:30
Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

the display area*1

the display area*1
Display position switching
By touching the leftmost of the advanced alarm popup display area, the display position is switched
to the top, center and bottom of the screen in order.
*1 Screen area for switching display position
The touch operation area for switching display position is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
COMMON SETTING
For the details of *1, refer to the following.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Leftmost 16 dots
Mesh on the GOT screen

A 1254
A 1254
348
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Display position during screen switching
38
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Screen
Switching
Displayed at the position before switching
regardless of the display position setting
The display position set by the Auxiliary Settings of the screen becomes effective
when a new popup is displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

8 - 156
ALARM
A 1254 A 1254
6
LAMP, SWITCH
When screen is switched during popup display, the popup is displayed at the
position before switching. (It is not displayed at the position specified by the auxiliary
settings of the screen.)
2 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is displayed)

For advanced alarm popup display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods.
However, the display scope differs depending on the switching method.
Touch the popup display directly
Use the device specified on "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.
Line1
Higher Alarm
Line2
Middle Alarm
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A
Equipment B
General Alarm
Power
supply
module
Drive
module
"Pwr. module
error"
Control
module
Power
supply
module
Control
module
Drive
module
"Control
module error"
Power
supply
module
Drive
module
Control
module
"Control
module error"
Power
supply
module
"Pwr. module
error"
Drive
module
Control
module
"Control
module error"
: The alarm is occurring
: No alarm (normal run)
(1) Touch the popup display directly

Displays the lower hierarchy of the touched alarm.
The following is the case that "Initial Display Hierarchy" on the basic tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1) The alarm hierarchy specified for initial
display hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.
All higher alarms are displayed

Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
- Line1 error
Power
Touch!
Switches to middle alarms

2) The middle alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
- Equipment A error
Equipment A
Power
Touch!
Switches to general alarms

3) The general alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Line1
Display scope
Equipment A
04/6/1 Pwr. module error
Power
8 - 157

1
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an
alarm belonging to the higher/middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is
not displayed.
OVERVIEW
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a

specified scope is being displayed
A specified scope is
being displayed
Power
SPECIFICATIONS
Display scope
Control
COMMON SETTING
3
Display scope
Control
An alarm belonging to
another higher/middle
hierarchy has occurred!
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified
hierarchy. (
This section
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device
specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the extended tab)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Power
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 158
ALARM
The new alarm is

not displayed!
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the
extended tab
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device. (
Section 8.5.5
Extended
tab)
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 2
- Line1 error
Power
Displays all middle alarms

Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 1
- Equipment A error
Power
Displays all general alarms
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
GD110
Display scope
Equipment A
0
04/6/1 Pwr. module error
Power
8 - 159

(1) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy

To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm
hierarchy as the initial display hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are
displayed with the vertical hierarchies ignored.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
(2) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of
the hierarchy being displayed
In the following example, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the initial
display hierarchy are displayed.
All the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored.
The advanced user alarm (alarm ID) to be displayed by the device is switched
3
COMMON SETTING
All general alarms are

displayed!
This section
OVERVIEW
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example: When all the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored
When the initial display hierarchy is specified as the middle hierarchy
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
All the alarms of the

displayed hierarchy
are restored.
All the alarms of the

initial display hierarchy
are displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 160
ALARM
3 Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

Specifying a font, text color and background color can prevent from overlooking popup display.
In addition, although level and group cannot be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display
function, level and group can be identified visually by setting a display color.
(
Section 8.5.5
Text tab)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
By specifying a background color,

oversighting popup display can be prevented.
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
In addition, by specifying a text color for each

level or group, alarm's level and group can be
identified visually.
4 Display switching by device

Display data can be switched by the device value.
The display shown below is available. (
Section 8.5.5
Extended tab)
Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarm only) specified by
users
Change the comment displayed according to the target user or purpose
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and soon)
(1) Items to which a switching device can be set
Display alarm
Available switching
device settings
Hierarchy*1
Advanced user alarm
are displayed.
Level*1
Alarms at the specified level are displayed.
Group*1
Alarms of the specified group are displayed.
Priority Level Attribute
All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy

----
The display order is changed between ascending order
The display order is changed between ascending
and descending order.
order and descending order.
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group
be selected.
can be selected.
The setting of the advanced user alarm observation

Advanced User Alarm
Observation
(alarm ID) displayed by advanced alarm display can be

changed.
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an
advanced alarm display window.
General Comment
----
Group
The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be
Middle Comment
changed for each comment group.
Group
The comment displayed can be changed according to
Higher Comment
the user or purpose.
Group
*1 The hierarchy, level and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
8 - 161

Assume that the alarms below occurred.
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40
Message
Temp. error
Status
Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Fuse error
Level Group
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Ocr.
Ocr.
Rstr.
1
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
"Restored" alarm is not displayed by

advanced alarm popup display.
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device.
This section shows an example that the switching device (level) is set to GD10 and the switching
device (group) to GD11.
3
COMMON SETTING
GD10 3
GD11 0
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Message
Status
Level
Group
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
11:20
Motor error
Oil error
Ocr.
Chk.
3
3
1
2
04/06/01
10:00
Fuel error
Ocr.
Occurred
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 14:25 Motor error
GD10 3
GD11 2
5
B 348 B 348
(Alarms to be displayed)
Occurred
04/6/1 11:20 Oil error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
A 1254 A 1254
04/06/01
04/06/01
11:20
10:00
Message
Oil error
Fuel error
Status
Chk.
Ocr.
Level
Group
3
3
2
2

8 - 162
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ALARM
Section 8.5.6
(2) Changing the alarm sorting order by "Priority Level Attribute"
Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and
cannot be changed while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
(3) Advanced user alarm (alarm ID) displayed
Alarms are displayed even when its alarm ID is not checked on the "Popup
Display" item of the advanced user alarm observation window. (Alarms are
displayed regardless of whether the item is checked or not.)
When specify an alarm ID with the "Popup Display" item checked, displays the
alarm ID only.
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Display priority when not switching the display data by the device
5 Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm popup display can be written into the device (word
device).
Data that cannot be displayed by advanced alarm popup display (down time and others) can also be
written into the device. (
Section 8.5.5
External output tab)
(1) Alarm data written into the device (15 types)

Alarm ID
Occurred time
Comment group No.
Restored date
Comment No.
Restored time
Alarm status
Checked date
Occurred date
Checked time
Level
Group
Occurred frequency
Cumulative time
Down time
(2) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm popup display are written.
D200: 0601H
A 1254 A 1254
D201: 2004H
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!
The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device
Touch mode when data are written into the device

To write alarm data into the device, set "Touch Mode" on the Basic tab to "Screen
Switching" or "Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display".
8 - 163

8.5.4
Select [Common]
Click
OVERVIEW

[Advanced Alarm Popup Display] menu.
(Advanced Alarm Popup Display.)
When setting in Workspace (Project)
3
COMMON SETTING
in Workspace (Project). The setting
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Double-click
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Double-click
dialog box is displayed.

8 - 164
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The setting dialog box is displayed. Refer to the following description to perform the setting.
(
8.5.5
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the displayed advanced alarm popup display type, display contents and touch modes.
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Setting of Advanced
Alarm Popup Display
Model
Check this item when using advanced alarm popup display.

Select an alarm type to be displayed.
For the display priority when multiple alarms occur, refer to the following.
Section 8.5.6
Display Alarm
User Alarm
: Displays advanced user alarm only.
System Alarm
: Displays advanced system alarm only.
User Alarm + System Alarm
: Displays advanced user alarm or advanced system alarm
Select the number of alarms displayed.

For the alarm display priority, refer to the following.
Display Number
Section 8.5.6
Plural : Displays more than one advanced alarms in order.

Single : Displays the alarm with the highest display priority.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm.
Section 8.5.2
Fixed
Selection of display method
: Displays the comment in a line when an alarm occurs.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and
Display Type
after of the comment over multiple lines is not displayed.

Float
: Displays the comment as a flow from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment including multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting "Float," select a speed to display the comment as a flow by "Floating
Speed."
Switching Cycle
Set a cycle to switch the alarm displayed while more than one alarm has occurred (1 to 60s).
This item can be set only when the "Display Type" item is "Fixed."
If setting "Display Type" to "Float," select a speed for the flowing display.
Floating Speed
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per second.
Middle : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per second.
Low
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per second.

8 - 165

8.5.5 Setting items
1
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Basic
Set whether to enable or disable the display position switching of the advanced alarm popup display.
Display Position Switching
Section 8.5.3
Switch : The display position switching is enabled.

Fix
Number of Display
: The display position switching is disabled.
SPECIFICATIONS
Set the number of the items displayed on an alarm (1 to 2).
Attributes
Select the items displayed for advanced alarm display.

Attribute
Occurred
: Select this item when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment
: Select this item when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Select format in which occurred date/time of alarm is specified.
After selecting this item, select the display format of date and time.
Date Format*1
Date
: Select when displaying date only.
Time
: Select when displaying time only.
COMMON SETTING
Date/Time : Select when displaying both date and time.
Contents
Set the display format of date by clicking

This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Date."
4
Time Format*2
Set the display format of time by clicking

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Time."

Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed when an advanced user alarm occurs.
Section 8.5.3
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is
displayed)
General
: General alarms are initially displayed.
Middle
: Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Higher
: Higher alarms are initially displayed.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Initial Display Hierarchy
This item can be set only when "Display Alarm" is "User Alarm" or "User Alarm + System Alarm."
Select the operation when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
Section 8.5.3
Operations when touching popup display directly
None
: No operation even if touching the popup display.
Screen Switching
: If touch the advanced alarm popup display, displays the base screen of the
No. specified on "Switching Screen" or overlap window 1.

LAMP, SWITCH
Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display

: Switches the alarm hierarchy of the touched alarm or displays the detailed
screen.
Operations vary depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When displaying higher/middle alarm :The alarm hierarchy is switched to
the lower one.
: The detailed screen is displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When displaying general alarm
Set the screen displayed when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
Switching Screen
Select "Base Screen" or "Overlap Window 1," and set a screen number (1 to 32767).
Only overlap window 1 is usable for advanced alarm popup display.
When select "Overlap Window 1," set the number of the window screen.

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 166
ALARM
Touch Mode
*1 Date settings
Set the display type of date.
The display type of date set can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
Item
Description
The result of date setting is displayed as a display example.
(Preview area)
Select a sorting order of year/month/day.
Sort
yy/mm/dd: 04/01/24
dd/mm/yy: 24/01/04
mm/dd/yy: 01/24/04
Select a display type of date.
Select a display type depending on whether to use upper/lower case for English/alphabetic
expression, presence/absence of day display and a type of Japanese expression.
The display example below shows the case that "Sort" is set to "yy/mm/dd."
Type
Type 1
: 04/01/24
Type 11
Type 2
: Jan/24
Type 12
: 2004/JAN/24
: 2004/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 3
: JAN/24
Type 13
: 2004/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 4
: Jan/24(FRI)
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 5
: JAN/24(FRI)
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 6
: 04/Jan/24
Type 3 (Japanese)
Type 7
: 04/JAN/24
Type 4 (Japanese)
Type 8
: 04/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 5 (Japanese)
Type 9
: 04/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 6 (Japanese)
Type 10
: 2004/Jan/24
"Type 1 (Japanese)" to "Type 6 (Japanese)" can be selected only when setting "Sort" to "yy/mm/dd."
Select a delimiter for year, month, and day.
Delimiter
"/"
: 04/01/24
"-"
: 04-01-24
"."
Check when displaying "0" before month and day.

Fill with Zeros
8 - 167
Example: Jan. 24, 2004

When checked
: 04/01/24
When not checked
: 04/1/24

8.5.5 Setting items
: 04.01.24
*2 Time settings
OVERVIEW
Set a display type of time.

The display type of the specified time can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
The result of time setting is displayed as a display example.

Select a display type of time.
Select a display type depending on whether to use English expression, presence/absence of am
and pm and a type of Japanese expression.
Type
: 16:28
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 2
: 16:28:28
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 3
: 04:28(PM)
Type 3 (Japanese)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Type 1
Check when displaying "0" before hour, minute, and second.

Example: 5 past 6
06:05 (When checked)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(When not checked)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
6:5
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Fill with Zeros

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 168
ALARM
(Preview area)
Description
COMMON SETTING
2 Text tab
Set the text format of alarms.
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Select a font of the characters displayed.

Font
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Gothic
Stroke
16dot HQ Mincho
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
Size

Style
(
Solid
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select the target for applying color-coding.
Section 8.5.3
Fixed
Text Color
Level
Group
Comment Color
Switching*1
Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

: Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Set the color after selecting "Fixed".
: Select this item when using different colors depending on levels.
: Select this item when using different colors depending on groups.
: Select this item to display comment with the color specified for comment group when
displaying advanced user alarm. (The font, size and style are specified at the style setting
on this setting. The setting of the comment group except for "Text" is not effective.)
For advanced system alarms display, alarms are displayed in the color specified by
"Fixed/Default Color."
When "Fixed" is selected for "Text Color Switching,"

Fixed/
Select the character color when displaying text in a color only.
Default
Color*1
When "Comment Color" is selected for "Text Color Switching"

Select a character color to be used when there is no comment for advanced user alarms.
Select a character color of advanced system alarms.
Level*1
*1
Group
Select character colors for each level number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)
Select character colors for each group number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)
Display
Select a background color of the advanced alarm popup display.
Background
Check the check box to select the background color.
8 - 169

8.5.5 Setting items
*1 Relation between the specified character color and actually displayed character color
Set "Switching"
Comment Color
Displayed in the color
Advanced user alarm

specified on "Fixed/
specified for comment
specified on "Level".
specified on "Group".
group.
Higher alarms and middle
Higher alarms and middle
If there is no comment,
alarms are displayed in
alarms are displayed in
the comment area is
the color specified as
the color specified as
displayed in the color
"Level Color 1."
"Group Color 1."
specified by "Fixed/
Default Color."
Default Color."
specified as "Level Color
specified as "Group Color
specified as "Fixed/
1."
1."
Default Color"
(Level, group and comment are effective only when "User Alarm" or "User Alarm + System Alarm" is
selected on "Display Alarm" of the basic tab.)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Group
3
COMMON SETTING
Level
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 170
ALARM
Fixed
OVERVIEW
Alarms displayed
3 Extended tab
Perform the setting for switching the displayed contents of the advanced alarm popup display by using
a device.
This tab is displayed by checking the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Check the item whose display is switched by the device.

Switching Device
Section 8.5.3
Check this item when switching the alarm hierarchy displayed using the value of the device.
Hierarchy*1
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.


Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Level
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Group
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Priority Level
Attribute*2
Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.
8 - 171

8.5.5 Setting items
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Check this item when displaying the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Advanced User Alarm
The alarm of the stored alarm ID is displayed regardless of the setting of "Popup
Display" of advanced user alarm observation.
Observation
If store "0" in this device, displays only the alarms of which "Popup Display" item of
Switching
Device
SPECIFICATIONS
advanced user alarm observation is checked.

If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
Check this item when switching the comment group of the comments displayed for general
alarm, middle alarm, or higher alarm by the value of the device.
Middle Comment Group /
Higher Comment Group
After checking the item, set the switching device. (
When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group specified for advanced user alarm
observation is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
General Comment Group /
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.

This item can be selected only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
Display
To set the security function, specify a security level (1 to15).

Specify "0" when not setting the security function.
Be sure to specify a number for security (Operation) that is larger than the number for
Security
Operation
security (Display).
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 5.8 Security Function
b14 to b2
b15
b1
b0
: Specify the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0)
: General alarms
01(1)
: Middle alarms
10(2)
: Higher alarms
: Not usable
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control
identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, be sure to set this bit to "0."
0
: Switching by the switching device
1
: Switching by touching the display area
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the
following.
Section 8.5.6
(2) When switching comment display and others using the
hierarchy switching device
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b1 to b0
b2

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 172
ALARM
b15 to b3
LAMP, SWITCH
Store values in the device as follows to switch hierarchies.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*1 Hierarchies
*2 Priority level attribute

Store values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15
b14 to b4
b3 to b0
b3
b2
b1
: Specifies a sort key. ( : Reserved)

0H
: Regular (Occurred)
1H
: Occurred Data/Time
5H
: Level
6H
: Group
b14 to b4
: Not usable
b15
: Specifies ascending order or descending order. ( : Reserved)
0
H
: Descending order
8
H
: Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
8 - 173

8.5.5 Setting items
b0
1
Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm touched on the advanced alarm popup
display area into the device.
This tab is displayed by checking the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
OVERVIEW
4 External output tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Text
External Output
Extended
Item
Description
Model
Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Use External Output

Section 8.5.3
Writing alarm data into device
Ordinary
: When the popup display is touched, alarm data are written into the device.
ON
: When the device is ON and the popup display is touched, alarm data are written into
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the popup display is touched, alarm data are written into
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
the device.
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
the device.
When selecting "ON" or "OFF," set the device to be used for trigger.
(
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the device to which alarm data are written.

Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)
(
Alarm ID
Comment Group
No.
Check this item when writing the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Head Device
Check this item when writing the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm into
the device.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.
Check this item when writing the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm into the
Comment No.
device.
When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 174
ALARM
Device
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Model
Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
The following values are written.
b15 to b3
b0
Alarm
b1
b0
: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
Status*1
b2
1: Occurring
b1
: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.
b2
: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or
0: Not checked 1: Checked
not.
0: Not effective 1: Effective
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
b15 to b3
: Not usable
Occurred Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.
Occurred Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.
Restored Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.
Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.
*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.
*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.
Device
Restored
Checked Date
Checked Time
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.
Level*1
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.
Group*1
Occurred
Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the device.
Frequency*1
Cumulative
Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.
Down Time*1,*2
*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarm is displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment
group No., and comment No.).
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm
Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
8 - 175

8.5.5 Setting items
*2 Writing format of date and time
OVERVIEW
Date and time are written in word data of two words.

(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
b8 b7
to
to
b0
Day (1 to 31)
b8 b7
to
SPECIFICATIONS
b15
D255
to
Month (1 to 12)
b0
Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year
b15
to
b8 b7
to
b0
Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)
b15
D257
to
b8 b7
00H
to
b0
Hour (0 to 23)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D256
COMMON SETTING
(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

to
b8 b7
07H
(Month)
b15
to
(Day)
b8 b7
20H
D255
to b0
01H
to
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b15
D254
b0
04H
(Dominical year)
b8 b7
(Minute)
b15
D257
to
00H
b8 b7
to
56H
b0
(Second)
to
b0
12H
LAMP, SWITCH
to
24H
(Hour)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b15
D256

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 176
ALARM
b15
D254
8.5.6
Precautions
Precautions for using advanced alarm popup display are as show below.
1 Precaution for Drawing

(1) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device (set on the extended tab) is specified for the objects below,
the objects may not be displayed on the specified initial display hierarchy.
This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching
device when the screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects
above, respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Example: When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)
Setting of advanced user alarm display
Setting of advanced alarm popup display
: GD10
: GD10
: General
: Higher
Place on base screen 1
Operations when base screen 1 is displayed
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52
Comment
Occurred
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
--
-- Line 1 abend
-- Line 1 abend
Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)
2 (higher)
Different values are
written into the same device
8 - 177

8.5.6 Precautions
Comment
Line 1 abend
Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
General alarms being displayed.
Middle alarms being displayed.
Higher alarms being displayed.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) When masking is applied
A 1254
348


A 1254
348
- Line abend

middle hierarchy
Touch!
Masking
1
AND
0
Middle alarms being displayed

A 1254
A 1254
348
348
Mask value (7FFFH)
Value of hierarchy
switching device
1

-Pwr. module error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.6 Precautions
8 - 178
ALARM
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comments displayed
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Corresponding comment No.
LAMP, SWITCH
Value of hierarchy switching device
1
OVERVIEW
(2) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the extended tab) is
changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
(b) When masking is not applied

0
A 1254
A 1254
B
348
348
- Line abend

middle hierarchy
Touch!
A 1254
A 1254
348
348
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2


B
Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767
The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.
-Pwr. module error
(3) Setting for saving advanced alarm data in the memory card
The touch switch for saving alarms cannot be assigned for advanced alarm popup display.
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the store trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the store trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save advanced
alarm data.
(b) When store data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm
display was specified, and store the data.
(4) Precautions for using comment group
When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, "No
message" is displayed.
8 - 179

8.5.6 Precautions
1
(1) When an object is overlapping another object
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot
be operated.
In such a case, change the position of the advanced alarm popup display area.
Section 8.5.3
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
Changes the display position
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
3
COMMON SETTING
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch the leftmost

of the display area!

(a) When the displayed contents have not been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
For advanced user alarms, only the alarm of the alarm ID to which "Popup Display" of
advanced user alarm observation was checked is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Alarms being occurred
04/6/1 11:35 Temp. error
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
Displayed first
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
Displayed second
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
Displayed third
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(b) When the displayed data have been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Displayable alarm types and settings

8.5.6 Precautions
8 - 180
ALARM
Section 8.5.2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) When the advanced alarm popup display is not performed

Refer to the following to check the setting.
(c) When "User Alarm + System Alarm" is selected on "Display Alarm" of the basic tab
If an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm have occurred simultaneously, only
the advanced system alarm is displayed.
The advanced user alarm is displayed when all the advanced system alarms are restored.
When an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm occur
simultaneously
Posted advanced user alarms
Occurred
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Comment
04/6/1
11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
*1
*1 Not displayed until all the advanced

system alarms are restored.
Posted advanced system alarms
04/6/1 10:46 400 Unable to communicate with CPU
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 10:46:49
400 Unable to communication with CPU
Displayed first
04/6/1 10:30:30
9 AC down error
Displayed second
04/6/1 07:11:15
803 Transident error
Displayed third
Advanced system alarms are

displayed prior to others.
Restoration method of advanced system alarms

Section 8.3.2
Alarm restoration
(4) When switching the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device
If switch the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device with "Display Type" on the basic
tab specified to "Fixed", the display is updated at the intervals specified by "Switching Cycle."
Therefore, note that display may not be switched soon after switching the hierarchy.
8 - 181

8.5.6 Precautions
(5) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in
OVERVIEW
Display switching by device) it may take
(6) Display of the comment window and key window

SPECIFICATIONS
When try to open the detail display (comment

window display) while the key window is displayed.
9 AC
A 1254 A 1254
6 Del
3 +/- B 348 B 348
Enter
COMMON SETTING
8
5
2
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!
(7) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time

For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
the following.
(8) Clearing of advanced alarm popup display (Network error)

The advanced alarm popup display for a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication
unit, MELSECNET/10 communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be
cleared until the GOT is powered OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7
4
1
0
Key window
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 8.5.3
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.6 Precautions
8 - 182
ALARM
advanced user alarm observation (

a few minutes to display the data.
8.6 User Alarm Display
User alarm is a function that displays user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
When multiple devices turn on, the comments are displayed as alarm messages in the set display order.
M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON
M100 Temp. error
M100
M100 Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
Replace the fuse of

M10
1 Fuse
M101
error
the
power
module
with new one.
Detail
Detail
Remark
Comments to be displayed as user alarm

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register the comments that will be displayed on the user alarm as basic comment.
Example:
Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm list display
Displaying the number of alarms occurred
and searching a device automatically

Set by Touch Switch (Section 6.2.9)
Set on the Device tab

Alarm Status
M999
02/02/01 10:25 Machine error

02/02/01 13:25 Line 1 error
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder
display
Displays the ladder monitor

function by touch operation.
8 - 183
Temp. error
Fuse error
Alarm event count 6
A device corresponding
to a cause of an alarm is
automatically searched.
M100
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Timing belt error
The number of all alarms occurred is

displayed on the alarm list display.
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For user alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to user alarms and others

Confirm the relevant functions, when making settings.

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
As GOT may not display the overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
COMMON SETTING
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
objects within GOT]
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
1)
Setting items
2)
3)
3)
1)

Designer2]
LAMP, SWITCH
2)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

8 - 184
ALARM
8.6.1

(Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)
A 1254
Input disabled
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B 348
Key Input Signal
Key Code Input
(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b3)
(Write device)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key when
a value is entered by the ASCII input or touch switch.
D100 0043
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
ABC
348
A B C
8 - 185

Before setting user alarm
1 Number of displayed alarms

Select whether to display multiple alarm occurrences (with plural comments) or only one (with single
comment).
Number of comment: "Plural"
Display range
Number of comment: "Single"
Display range
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 4.1 Comment Registration)
3
Cancel [Supply stops] and restart supply.
The texts will be continuously displayed in the

second line.
Even if the comment size exceeds two lines, the
texts from the second line can be displayed,
providing it does not exceed the display range.
Display method for multi line comment (
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
Any line of the multi line comment can be specified to display.

Example: Display any line of the 6-line comment that has been registered
Multi line comment contents
Inspection1
Conv. insp.
Method of displaying comment
Proc. prod. insp.
Start line of display

Number of display lines
: 3rd
: 2(only when the number of
comment is set as "one")
LAMP, SWITCH
Inspection2
Inspection3
Line insp.
04/6/1 13:52:20
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30
Inspection2
Temp. error
Fuse error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
One alarm is displayed in one line.

The text out of the line will not be displayed.
If a comment is longer than two lines, only the
first line is displayed.
Remark
Machine No.1 is ove

COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 13:52:15
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
OVERVIEW
This function displays alarm occurrence time and user-registered comments as alarm messages.
The comments used as alarm messages must be registered as the basic comment in advance.
Inspection2
04/6/1 13:52:20
Processed products inspection
8
Only one line can be randomly specified to be displayed. The range of lines to be displayed can be specified.

8.6.2 Before setting user alarm
8 - 186
ALARM
8.6.2
2 Sort
Set the order to display alarm occurrences.
It can be set by the device No. order (ascending/descending) and alarm occurrence order (Oldest /Latest).
Example: Display alarms by "Latest" sort
Alarm Status
M2
M4
M0
M3
M5
M1
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35
04/6/1 04:33:12
04/6/1 02:30:16
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Timing belt error
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
3 Scroll on
Checking if the alarm comment exceeds the display range is done by scrolling the user alarm with touch
switches
Create the touch switches for user alarm.
Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Scroll up
Scroll down
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
Scroll up
8 - 187

heat
Cancel [Stop Supply] and restart the supply.
Scroll down

Scroll up
Display 1
line by
each
scrolling.
Scroll down
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
Scroll up
Scroll down
Switch to
the next
alarm display.
1
(1) Applicable screen (
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
To display the cause and corrective action of alarm in details, select a screen from the following
three types.
(a) Comment window
Display the user-registered comment in a comment window.
The comment different from that in user alarm comment can be displayed as a detailed
comment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp. error at the

power supply module
on Line 1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1
COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
OVERVIEW
4 Details of display (only for [Plural] number of comment)
Base Screen1+Comment Window
(b) Base screen

Display the specified base screen.
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
90
RUN
Base Screen1
STOP
40
RUN
STOP
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
60
RUN
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Tank A
STOP
Base Screen5
(c) Window Screen

Display the specified window screen (overlap window 1).
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Feed material from the feed

opening.
Feed opening
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base Screen1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1+Window Screen10

8 - 188
ALARM
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
(2) Screen that includes user alarm and the corresponding detailed alarm type screen.
Detailed alarm display type screen
Screen that includes user alarm
Comment window
Base screen
Overlap window 1
Window screen
Base screen
Simultaneous display
Switch
Switch
Overlap window 2
Overlap window 3
Overlap window 4
Overlap window 5
Superimpose window1
Superimpose window2
* Switch
: Switch the screen that includes user alarm to the corresponding detailed alarm display type
screen.
: Display the detailed alarm display type screen keeping the screen that includes user alarm
on the display.
(3) Specifying a comment No. to be displayed or offset value for screen No. (Offset for Datailed No.)
By setting 'Offset for Detailed No.' on the Device Tab, an offset value for details display described
below can be specified: (
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
No. of the basic comment that will be displayed on the comment window
No. of the Base screen and Window screen
While monitoring by the GOT, the comment No. or screen No. can be switched using the device.
Example: When the device for "Offset for Detailed No." is set to "D0", and the following comments
are registered
Comment No. (Basic comment)
Comment
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 1.
Check the power supply module.
Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 1.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 2.
11
12
D0
Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 2.
Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 1.
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Comment No.1 is displayed
8 - 189

D0
10
Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 2.
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Comment No.11 is displayed
(4) Display method

Select the method for details display from the following two types.
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
COMMON SETTING
Touch the user alarm directly to display the detailed information.
Temperature error at
the power supply
module on Line 1
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:26 Oil error
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Display the cursor
Cursor ON
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Move (up/down) the cursor to

the alarm for details display.
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Display the detailed information
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Cursor ON
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Replace the fuse at

04/6/1
15:51:38
Fuse error
the
power
supply
04/6/1 10:25:16
module
on LineOil
1. error
LAMP, SWITCH
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(b) Touch switch (

Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm)
Create touch switches for user alarm to display the detailed information.

8 - 190
ALARM
(a) One touch (
2
SPECIFICATIONS
By using "Offset for Detailed No." the comment on the user alarm cannot be
changed.
An offset value for comment No. (basic comment) on the user alarm should be
specified in "Offset for Comment No." on the Extended tab.
(
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
Match display the user alarm with the comment on the details screen by using
"Offset for Detailed No. and "Offset for Comment No.".
OVERVIEW
To match the user alarm display with details screen:
5 Store memory
Check "Store Memory" when collecting the information on alarm occurrence date/time even when a
screen including no user alarm is displayed.
The GOT monitors the alarm occurrence status at all times and stores the information in the GOT
internal memory.
This setting item is provided on the Trigger tab.
With the settings made, the alarm occurrence date/time is displayed as follows:
Store Memory enabled: The alarms are displayed with the date and time when the alarm actually
occurred.
Store Memory disabled: The alarms are displayed with the time and date when the screen is
displayed.
Example: The following shows differences of the user alarm display according to the "Store memory"
settings (enabled or disabled) when the screen switches and the alarm devices turn ON/
OFF at the timing below.
04/6/1 12:10:15
Display on the screen
including alarm list
display
Display Screen
No.10
Display Screen
No.20
Display Screen
No.10
ON (04/6/1 10:15:35)
M100 OFF
ON (04/6/1 11:38:08)
Alarm
Device
M101 OFF
ON (04/6/1 09:00:22)
M102 OFF
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error

04/6/1 10:15:35 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:38:08 M101 Fuse error
Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory enabled)
Alarm occurrence date and time can be

displayed correctly.
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M100 Temp. error

04/6/1 12:10:15 M101 Fuse error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M102 Oil error
Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory disabled)
Alarm occurrence time shows date and time

when the screen has changed to Screen No.10
(all alarms show the same date and time)
8 - 191

SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
The data stored in memory is cleared when the GOT is reset or powered off.
(2) The timing when the alarm occurrence date/time is cleared with the Store Memory
disabled.
When "Store Memory" is disabled, alarm occurrence time information is not
collected at any of the timings below, causing the collected alarm occurrence time
to be cleared:
The screen including the user alarm is hidden and then displayed again.
The screen is switched to the base screen while the user alarm is on the
superimpose window.
The security switching is made.
The language switching is made.
The machine No. switching is made.
The offset switching is made.
OVERVIEW
(1) The timing when the data stored in memory is cleared.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 192
ALARM
8.6.3
1 Register comments in advance.

Register alarm messages in a basic comment. (
comment)
Section 4.1.4
Registering comments as basic
2 Carry out either of the following operations:

Select the [Object]
Click
[Alarm List]
[User Alarm] from the menu.
(User Alarm).
3 Click on the position where user alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
4 Double click on the arranged user alarm to display the setting dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
5 After setting user alarm, set the touch switch for scrolling user alarm up/down and to display the alarm
detailed information.
Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Method of adjusting display range

Adjust the display range as following when the comment cannot be displayed
completely.
04/6/1
13:52:20
Temp. error
Occurrence time
(fixed to 20 digits)
Display with 160 dots
when text size is 1 x 1 times.
8 - 193

Use 16 dots as vertical size in 1 row

when text size is 1 x 1 times.
Comment
Display the longest comment for confirmation in drawing screen.
Set the longest comment No. (basic comment) in "head comment No."
(basic tab) and adjust display range to display all the comments.
After the adjustment, undo the setting of "head comment No."
1
Easy setting method


D10

Shape
3
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
2
SPECIFICATIONS

8 - 194
ALARM
OVERVIEW
8.6.4
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the number of monitor devices and view format (number of comments/sort/frame).
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
Set the number of monitor devices.

Alarm (Device)
Points*1
The devices that can be set are different on the settings made in [Device No.] of device tab.
In [Continuous] setting
: 8192 points (Up to 512 points for GT10)
In [Random] setting
: 512 points ([Random] cannot be set for GT10.)
Set the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs. (Setting range: 1 to 32767)
The comment No. (Basic comment) set here is assigned in head device of device tab.
Continuous comment No. will be set respectively according to the number of monitor devices from the comment
No. of head comment No. (Basic comment)
Head Comment
No.
Example: Head device: M100, head comment No.: 1
Monitor device
View
Comment No.(Basic comment)
M100
1 Temp. error
Head comment No.
M101
2 Fuse error
M102
3 Oil error
The comment of continued

No. is set from head comment No.
Format
Select the size of text to be displayed.
When (1 x 1) is set, the font size is 8 x 16 dots.
When displaying comments that is set to high quality font in [Basic comment] as high quality font, set the
font size to the multiple of even number.
Size
If set to the multiple of odd number, it will not be displayed as high quality font.
1 to 8
1 to 8
Number of
Comment
Set the number of comments to be displayed.

Plural
: Display plural comments in frame.
Single
: Display only one comment in frame.
*1 For GT10, 512 points can be set consecutively. (Random setting is disabled.)
(Continued to the next page )
8 - 195

8.6.4 Setting items
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
Left:
Alignment
AAAA
BB
CCCC
Center:
Right:
AAAA
BB
CCCC
OVERVIEW
Select the position to display the text.

AAAA
BB
CCCC
Select the sort of comment.

(For GT10, [Oldest] and [Latest] cannot be selected.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Ascending : display according to the order of the smallest to the biggest.

Descending : display according to the order of the biggest to the smallest
Oldest
: display according to the order of the oldest to the latest
Latest
: display according to the order of the newest to the oldest.
When monitor is set randomly, [Ascending] [Descending] will be based on the setting order of device.
Example: When making following settings in device tab.
COMMON SETTING
Display comment
Sort
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Format
Displayed in [Ascending]
M100 ON
M101 ON
M102 ON
Displayed in [Decending]
M102 ON
M101 ON
M100 ON
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Oil error
Fuse error
Temp. error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
View
When [Oldest] or [Latest] is selected, set [Store Memory] on the Trigger tab for collecting data of the
alarm occurrence date.
Check this item to display date when an alarm occurs.
Date is displayed in the form of "yy/mm/dd: hh: mm: ss"

Date Display
04/06/01 09:30:40
Space
Space
Temp. error
20 digits
Comment
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(Year is displayed with the last 2 digits, and hour is displayed in the 24-hour system.)

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Format
Frame
LAMP, SWITCH
Frame
Frame
Plate
Plate
Category
Layer
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

(
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer2 (such as Data View, Propertysheet)

8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 196
ALARM
Object Name
2 Device tab
Set the monitor device and the detailed alarm display type when an alarm occurs.
Device
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
Select the method of displaying the detailed alarm comment information.

This setting is usable only when [Plural] is selected in [Number of Comment].
(For GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
Not Display
: No detailed information to be displayed.
Comment Window *1 : A comment window is displayed to provide detailed information.
Detailed Alarm Display
A registered comment is used for the window.
Type
(Register comments as basic comment.)

Base Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on a base screen.
Window Screen
: Display the window screen (Overlap window1) by details display.
The base screen specified by detailed displayed No. of the alarm device is used.
Display the window screen that is set in the detailed No. of alarm device.
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)
Device No.
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered from the set device.

Random
: Devices are numbered at random.
Select the method of displaying the comment window/base screen/window screen used for providing
detailed information of alarm.
Detailed Display No.
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered starting from the set comment
No.(Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No.
Random
Alarm Device
: Devices are numbered at random.
Setting the screen No. for monitor device and detailed display.
Set a device to be monitored.
Device
(
Detailed No.
Number the comment (Basic comment)/base screen/window screen used for displaying the detailed
information when an alarm occurs (when the specified device condition is satisfied.)
Select the comment to be displayed in details when selecting [Comment Window] in [Detailed alarm
Detailed
Selection
display type].
The comment can be displayed when confirming the comment contents.
Check this item to store the number of alarms (the number of bit devices that have turned ON) in the word
Device for Occurring
device.
Number
After checking, set the device to store alarms.

(

8 - 197

8.6.4 Setting items
Device
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Check this item to switch the detailed information on screen according to the value of one device.
The comment No. (Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No. set as the detailed No. of alarm
device is added to the device (offset device) value set here.
(The data size of the set device is fixed to 16 bits)
For the details about offset function, refer to the following.
(
Section 5.7 Offset Function)
SPECIFICATIONS
Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the user alarm.
One Touch
(This setting is usable in the basic tab when [Plural] is set in [Comment Number])
*1 Display Method of Comment Window
(1) Number of characters available for comment window

GOT
Number of characters available for comment window
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1665, GT1595, GT1585,

GT157 , GT156 , GT155
(GT1555-V only) ,
39 characters
11 lines (429 characters)
23 characters
18 characters
GT SoftGOT1000
GT155
COMMON SETTING
Offset for Detailed No.
(GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only) , GT115 ,
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new
line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GT1030, GT1020
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY


8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 198
ALARM

3 Extended tab
Set the security, offset.
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
When the security function is used, set the security level (1 to 15).
When the security function is not used, set [Security] to "0".
Security
Check this item to switch the comment on the user alarm according to the device value.
The device (offset device) value set here is added to the comment No. (Basic comment) that has been
set in "Head Comment No." on the Basic tab.
Offset for Comment No.
(The data size of the device is fixed to 16 bits.)

For details on offset function, refer to the following.
(
Check this item to operate the user alarm by using a touch switch for which key code has been set for user
alarm.
After checking, arrange above touch switch.
Scroll On
Note that this item is not available in the following cases:

If the data list and alarm history are set to be displayed on the same screen
If multiple user alarms including the one with [Scroll On] checked are placed on a single screen.
Check this item to specify the display start line of the multiple-line comment.
Then, set the number of the line.
Line No. of Display Start
Fixed
: Set by direct input (1 to 32767)
Device
: Select this option to set the device value to the start line No.
Then, set the device. (
When comment appears as blank, check if the value set as the start line No. is within the number of
created comment lines.
8 - 199

8.6.4 Setting items
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Specify the number of lines of the multiple-line comment.

This option is available only when "Number of Comments" is set to "Single" (set in the Basic tab).
Then, set the value of each line.
Fixed
: Set by direct input. (1 to 32767)
Device
: Select this option to set the device value to the number of comment lines.
Then, set the device. (

SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Lines
Specify the device to store the comment No. of the alarm.

For one comment only, the comment No. of the displayed alarm is stored.
For multiple comments, the comment No. of the alarm at the cursor position is stored.
To display the cursor in the row of the occurred alarm, the following settings are required.
Check [Display a cursor in selected row].
Comment No. Device
Place the touch switch for the alarm display (key code switch (cursor display)) on the screen that the
COMMON SETTING
alarm list display is set.

For how to set the touch switch, refer to the following.
(
(A cursor can be displayed at alarm without setting of a touch switch.)

Setting [Comment No. Device] enables to store the comment No. of the touched alarm in a device.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
row

8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 200
ALARM
Display a cursor in selected
Check this item to display a cursor by touching the displayed alarm.
4 Trigger tab
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details about trigger setting, refer to the following.
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
Select the trigger for displaying which the object.

When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 s) in 1-second unit.
(For GT10, [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [Range], and [Bit Trigger] cannot be selected.)
Trigger Type
Ordinary
Fall*
Trigger Device
ON
Rise*1
OFF
1
Sampling*
Range*
Bit Trigger*1
Specify the device used for the trigger.

When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items
Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Trigger
Bit Number
Initial Display
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real)

Real can be selected only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Click on the Exp. button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Range
Multi Bit
Select the data size (16 bits/32 bits) of the word device.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
trigger.After setting, click on the Seting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
Check this item to hold the object data when the display condition is not met in the case [Trigger Type] is
Hold Display
set to [ON], [OFF], or [Bit Trigger]. If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not
satisfied.
Check this item to collect the alarm occurrence time while the screen where user alarm has not been set
Store Memory
is displayed. (
Section 8.6.2
Store memory)
The alarm occurrence status are always monitored and stored to the GOT internal memory.After
checking, set the cycle to collect data (1 to 3600 s) in [Trigger Type].
*1 The setting is disabled for GT10.
8 - 201

8.6.4 Setting items
8.6.5
Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Screen example 1
OVERVIEW
Touch switch for displaying user alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying user alarm.
Screen example 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch switch
Key code
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
Scroll the display up/down one line.
This function is available only when the cursor is hidden.
Scroll up by one line
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
04/06/01 13:54:45
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
00F2H
Scroll down by one line

00F3H
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Scroll down by one line!

Show/Hide the cursor.
Show cursor
FFB0H
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
Show the cursor!
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
8 - 202
ALARM
FFB1H
LAMP, SWITCH
6
Hide cursor
Touch switch
Key code
Description
The cursor moves to the previous/next page.(page by page)
Move cursor upward
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 13:54:45
04/06/01 12:23:11
04/06/01 11:11:12
Fuel error
Motor error
FFB2H
Move to the next page!

The cursor moves up/down one line. (line by line)
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
FFB3H
Move the cursor!

Display the screen for providing details on the selected alarm.
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
Display detail
FFB8H
04/06/01
15:20:41
Fuseaterror
Abnormal
temperature
04/06/01
14:25:17
Oil error
the power
supply module.
Check the power supply

module.
Display detail!
Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in
the ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder jump function)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
Enabling the touch switch to be used for displaying user alarm:

Check "Scroll On" on the Extended tab to use the touch switch for displaying user
alarm. (
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
8 - 203

1
Move cursor upward (FFB2H)/Move cursor downward (FFB3H) operate differently
depending on the display status:
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page.
If the cursor is displayed, the display is moved up/down one line.
OVERVIEW
Using switches that operate differently depending on the display status
(1) Operating by touching user alarm directly

By setting "One Touch" on the device tab, the screen for providing details on the
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
Replace
fuse at the
04/06/01 the
15:20:41
Fuse error
power supply module.
04/06/01 14:25:17
Oil error
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
3
COMMON SETTING
selected alarm. (
Display detail
(2) Setting touch switch

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 204
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
8.6.6
Precautions
This section provides the precautions to be taken when using user alarm.
1 Drawing precautions
(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on one screen
Up to 24 user alarm objects can be set.
(2) When [Store Memory] is checked
(a) Up to 16 user alarm objects can be set in the whole project when [Store Memory] is set.
(b) Up to 8192 alarm list objects can be set in the whole projects as the devices applicable for
monitoring by [Store Memory]. The preset number of alarm lists is not relevant.
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab is set to White.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen
color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab to other than White.
(4) When using GT10
Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.
(5) Precautions when selecting [Random] for [Device No.]

When selecting [Random] for [Device No.], set the same quantity of alarm devices as the value
specified for [Alarm (Device) Points].
If the number of set alarm devices is less than the value specified for [Alarm (Device) Points], all
the user alarms are not displayed on a GOT.

(1) Display of comment window
Comment
window
Key window
1000
Value input
8 - 205

8.6.6 Precautions
User alarm
(3) When used with other objects

After checking [Scroll On] in the extended tab (settings to use touch switch for user alarm), the
following objects cannot be set in the same screen.
Data list function object
Alarm history function object
(4) Touch switch for user alarm
(a) Setting screen
Make sure to set the touch switch for user alarm and user alarm in the same screen.
If not, the touch switch may operate instead of the user alarm, when both alarm history and
data list are displayed.
(b) Setting only the touch switch on another screen
To set only the touch switch for user alarm on another screen, make the setting by referring to
the following priority order:
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Displaying the alarm occurrence time

To check alarm occurrence time, display the GOT clock data.
For precautions on the clock function that controls GOT time data and relevant restrictions, refer to
the following.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Priority order corresponding to the touch switch screen

Screen for which touch switch has been set
Base screen
High
Call screen 1 to 5
Superimpose window 1
Overlap window1
Overlap window2
Overlap window3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Priority Order
Superimpose window 2
Overlap window4
Overlap window5
Low
Up
Cursor ON
Down
7
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error
Occurred
04/6/1 13:25:49
04/6/1 12:15:30
04/6/1 10:45:30
Message
Restore Check
Temp. error
13:30
Fuse error
12:28
Oil error
11:26
11:15
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Cursor OFF
LAMP, SWITCH
Example: When touch switch has been set for other screens (overlap window2)
User alarm
(Set in the overlap window1)
Alarm history
(Set in the base screen)

8.6.6 Precautions
8 - 206
ALARM
As the base screen has higher priority,

operates it as the touch switch of alarm history.
8.7 System Alarm Display
System alarm is a function used to display error codes and error messages when error occurs in the GOT,
controller or the network.
Displaying system alarm allows a user to check how the error occurred and its cause.
400 Unable to communicate with CPU

9 AC down error
803 Transient error
Error
occurance
Remark
16:40:30
Comments to display
Comments to display in system alarms do not need registration (Registered in
GOT).
8 - 207
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced system alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW
8.7.1
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
COMMON SETTING
Setting items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
2)
Setting items
2)
3)
3)
1)
1)

LAMP, SWITCH
Designer2]

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error code,
GOT error detecting signal).
1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
B 348
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
The system alarm message is cleared

8 - 208
ALARM
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
objects within GOT]
Section 2.9.1
The channel No. with a system alarm (GOT error) is
The channel No. with a system alarm (CPU error) is
stored in the device.
System alarm network error channel No. (Write device:

GS264)
The channel No. with a system alarm (network error) is
8 - 209

Before setting system alarm
OVERVIEW
1 Types of system alarm

System alarm has the following three types:
1) GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm
2) CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm
3) Network error
: A network error is displayed as an alarm
2 Method of collecting data

Even while the screen that does not include system alarm is displayed, data are always collected every
3 seconds and stored into GOT.
The error code, error message as well as error time will be displayed in system alarm.
The error code and error message for display are provided by default within GOT. Therefore, they do
not need to be created by user.
4
Occured time
(Only for GOT error display)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Error message
16:40:30
4 Method of displaying alarm
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Maximum number of alarms can be displayed

Each system alarm is displayed in one line type; up to 3 lines can be displayed.
The alarm display is updated when new alarm is detected.
Example: When new alarm (Parameter error) is detected by controller
16:40:30

104 Parameter error
803 Transient error
16:40:30
Error display of controller is refreshed.(9
6
104)
LAMP, SWITCH

9
AC down error
803 Transient error
(2) Display priority

When the display range is lower than 2 lines, alarms will be displayed in the following order.
1) GOT error
2) CPU error
3) Network error
When the number of alarm occurrence exceeds the display range, the lower priority alarms will not
be displayed.
The error code, error message and error time beyond a single line will not be displayed.
5 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions for error code
For the details, refer to the following manuals.

GT
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

9
AC down error
803 Transient error
COMMON SETTING
3 Displayed information
Error code
SPECIFICATIONS
User's Manual

8.7.2 Before setting system alarm
8 - 210
ALARM
8.7.2
8.7.3
1 Carry out either of the following operations.

Select the [Object]
Click
[Alarm List]
[System Alarm] from the menu.
(System Alarm).
2 Click on the position where System Alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged system alarm to display the setting dialog box.
4 For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
Display field adjusting method

To prevent an alarm message from being truncated on display, adjust the display
field as follows.
If the GOT screen size is smaller than the value described below, adjust the font
size.
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
16:40:30
Set in 3 rows.
(Use 48 dots as vertical size in 3 rows
when text size is 1 1 times.)
Error message (maximum 64 digits) Occurrence time (fixed to 8 digits)

Display with 576 dots when text size is 1 1 times.
Increase the size to display the occurrence time at the right end.
Easy setting method


Remark

8 - 211

D10

Shape
8.7.4
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set the display format (shape/text size) of system alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic
Extended
Item
Size
Description
Model
Select the text size (0.5 to 8) of the error message to be displayed
COMMON SETTING
Frame
selected as shape.
Format
Frame
Shape
Plate
Plate
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Shape
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Category
Layer
(
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.7.4 Setting items
8 - 212
ALARM
Object Name
LAMP, SWITCH
2 Extended tab
Set the security.
Check "Extended" at the bottom of this dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Extended
Item
Security
Description
(
8 - 213

8.7.4 Setting items
Model
8.7.5
Precaution
OVERVIEW
This section describes precautions for using system alarm.

Maximum number of system alarms that can be positioned (set) in one screen:
One system alarm can be positioned (set).
(2) Deletion of system alarms on GOT

(a) The GOT error will not be cleared even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
To clear the message, make sure to turn the following device of system information function
ON.
GOT error reset message (system signal1-1. b13)
Section 3.6 System Information Setting
(b) The message of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit,
MELSECNET/10 communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be
cleared until the GOT is powered OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
(3) Displaying alarm occurred time

For alarm occurred time, displays the GOT clock data.
For precautions and restrictions for the clock function that manages GOT clock data, refer to the
following.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Controllers for which system alarms are not displayed on GOT
Errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the system alarm of
GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
YAMATAKE temperature controller
RKC temperature controller
Inverter
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
SPECIFICATIONS
6
LAMP, SWITCH

(4) Text and background color
As the text color for system alarm is fixed to white, set the plate color to non-white.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.7.5 Precaution
8 - 214
ALARM
8.8 Alarm History Display
The times and comments of the alarms occurred are stored in the GOT incorporated memory and displayed
as a history list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit OFF to ON/word
device range).
Alarm
occurred
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.
X0:OFF
Alarm
detail
display
ON
Supply oil to the

arm of Line 1.
Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.
Up Down Check
The window for detail display is any of the comment window,

base screen, or window screen.
Alarm
checked
time
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:10
With the touch switch for alarm history

display, the alarm check time is displayed.
To create the touch switch for alarm history display, set a key code to the touch switch.
System Restoration
After
system
restoration
Up Down Check
X0:ON
Remark
OFF
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:45
12:10
The restoration time

is displayed.
Comments displayed on the alarm history display

Comments displayed on the alarm history display must be registered in advance.
Register comments in the basic comment or comment group.
8 - 215
Examples
L
Display number of alarm that have been historical
Make setting on Option (Common) tab

CSV file
Date
Date
Make setting on Option (Common) tab

OVERVIEW
Display alarm data on PC
Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
Date Time Message
Date Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp.Err.
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.

04/02/01 10:25 Atm Err.
Alarm his. number
Alarm his. number
The number of all alarms historical is displayed in alarm history.

SPECIFICATIONS
The alarm historical data saved to memory card in CSV file

format are read by spreadsheet software.
Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm history

display and searching a device automatically
Make setting with Touch Switch (Section 6.2.9)
Time Message
02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
COMMON SETTING
Date
M999
Ladder
display
Device corresponding to the a

displayed on alarm history dis
is automatically searched.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Ladder monitor function is

displayed by touch switch
8 - 216
ALARM
Memory card
8.8.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For alarm history, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to alarm history and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error

objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
2)
Setting items
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)

Designer2]
8 - 217

1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Input disabled
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
Key Input Signal
Key Code Input
(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b3)
(Write device)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key

when a value is entered by the ASCII input or touch
switch.
D100 0043
COMMON SETTING
OVERVIEW
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A B C
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 218
ALARM
8.8.2
Before setting alarm history display
Collected alarms are displayed as history.

Register messages to be displayed in the basic comment or comment group in advance.
1 Alarm collection mode

Select either of the two collection modes, historical mode or cumulative mode.
When an alarm occurs, the following information can be collected and displayed.
Occurred
Message
Restore Check Cumulate Count
1
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error
18:50
2
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error 16:30 16:20 00:20
2
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
(In the example above, 3), 4), and 5) indicate time only.)
Description
Info displayed
Historical mode
Cumulative mode
1) Occurred
The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Message
The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
3) Restore

(
8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
4) Check
Message
Pwr. module error
Restore Check
Check
Message
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00
(FFB4H)
Displays the total amount of time for which alarms were
generated in the past.
Cumulative time = t1 + t2 + t3
5) Cumulative
time
----
Status of alarm
occurrence
(X0: OFF ON)
t1
Alarm
occurred
(1st)
t2
Alarm
occurred
(2nd)
t3
Alarm
occurred
(3rd)
Time
6) Count
----
The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed.
Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs. (The
data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: 3072
GT11
: 2048
GT10
:1000
Cumulative mode
In this mode, the latest alarm status and the cumulative count and time of the alarms that occurred in the
past are calculated and displayed for each alarm type.
8 - 219

8.8.2 Before setting alarm history display
Example: Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of alarm history display for each collection mode.
ON
ON
OFF
"Temp. error"
(M10:OFF ON)
OVERVIEW
OFF
ON
11:30
12:00
1)
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user*1
15:30
3)
18:25
4)
SPECIFICATIONS
"Fuse error"
(M20:OFF ON)
19:00
5)
*1 Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
COMMON SETTING
(1) Historical mode

Not collected in the historical mode.

"Temp. error"
occurs!
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

12:00
"Temp. error" is checked.

Check (FFB4H)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

15:30 12:00
is displayed.
6
Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

15:30
A new line is added

and displayed.
12:00
Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

19:00
15:30 12:00
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

is displayed.

8 - 220
ALARM
Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
LAMP, SWITCH
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.
(2) Cumulative mode

The information on the latest alarm status,the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error

00:00
1
00:00
1

12:00 00:00
1
00:00
1
"Temp. error" is checked.
2) "Temp. error" is checked

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
Check (FFB4H)

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

15:30 12:00 04:00
1
Restoration time and

cumulative time are
displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

04:00
2

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

19:00 04:35
2
The occurrence time when

the alarm occurred again
is displayed on the same
line of the alarm frequency is
increased by one.
Restoration time is
displayed.
The time during which
the alarm has been
generated is added to
the cumulative time.
2 Collecting and holding alarm data

(1) Collecting alarm data
The GOT collects alarm data at any time and saves the data in the GOT internal memory.
Alarm data are constantly collected and updated even while the monitor screen not including alarm
history display is displayed.
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
No. 25 D1 10
D2 20
Switch to another screen
(2) Deleting alarm data

Alarm data are deleted at the following timing.
(a) Power-off or reset of the GOT
8 - 221

AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC
The alarm data updated while

the other screen was displayed
are shown.
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities
Operation
Self check
[I/O check]
GOT setup
Debug & self check
Main menu
(c) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
3
COMMON SETTING
(d) Clear trigger device

Turning on the device specified at "History Clear" (on the Option (Common) tab) deletes all the
alarms in the restored status.
(e) Key operations of the switches for alarm history display (touch switches)
Alarms in the restored status can be deleted using the following touch switches.
Delete (FFB6H): Delete the alarms in the restored status one by one.
Delete All (FFB7H): Delete all the alarms in the restored status.
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
(f)
OVERVIEW
Display
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
When the number of alarms occurred has exceeded the upper limit (when the collection mode
is "Historical")
In the case where "When number of alarm occurrences exceeds set value, delete oldest alarm
occurrences" was check-marked on the Option (common) tab, if the number of alarms
occurred has exceeded the upper limit, the older alarms are deleted from the oldest one.
[Upper limit in total number of alarms occurred]
GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000 : 3072
GT11
: 2048
GT10
: 1000
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
[Operation setting for the case where the maximum number of alarms is exceeded]
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm History dialog box (Option (Common tab))

8 - 222
ALARM
(3) Holding alarm data under power failure

Alarm data can be held even if the GOT is powered off by saving them to the memory card.
3 Detail display
(1) Usable screens (
Section 8.8.4
Device (Common) tab)
To display alarm causes and corrective actions in details, any of the following 3 screen types can
be selected.
(a) Comment window
Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the
comment window.
Temperature error
of the line 1's
power module
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Base screen 1
Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Base screen 1 + Comment window
(b) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
Tank A
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
90
40
60
Run Stop
Run Stop
Run Stop
Base screen 5
Base screen 1
(c) Window screen

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
Feed material from the opening.
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Base screen 1
8 - 223

Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 + Window screen 10
(2) Display method

Select either of the following 2 methods for detail display.
Section 8.8.4
Basic tab)
OVERVIEW
(a) One touch (
Display the detail display by touching the alarm history display item directly.
2
Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature error of
the line 1's power
module
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
(b) Touch switch (

Create a touch switch for alarm history to display the detailed data.
Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Display the cursor
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Move the cursor (using Up or Down)

to the target alarm.
04/6/1 10:25:16
Oil error
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Make the details displayed
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Down
Display
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Delete
Detail
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Up
Message

8 - 224
ALARM
Display
Occurrence
Replace
the fuse of
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
line 1's power
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
module.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
COMMON SETTING
8.8.3

Select the [Object]
Click
[Alarm History] from the menu
(Alarm History).
2 Click on the desired position completes the arrangement of the alarm history display.
Remark

D10

Shape

3 Double click on the arranged alarm history display, and make setting in the displayed dialog box with
reference to the following explanation.
The settings whose tab names are marked with (Common) in the dialog box are common settings in
project.
Project common settings

(Project setting is limited one common setting only.)
As shown in the following example, although monitor devices are set in the same way for all alarm
history displays, different display formats (number of display rows/alarm frame color) can be set for each
display.
Monitor device
(Common settings
for all alarm historial
datas)
X0: ON
X1: ON
X2: ON
X3: ON
X4: ON
X5: ON
X6: ON
X7: ON
X8: ON
Alarm history
Alarm history of X0
Alarm history of X1
Alarm history of X2
Alarm history
Alarm history of X3
Alarm history of X4
Alarm history
Alarm history of X5
Alarm history of X6
Alarm history of X7
Alarm history of X8
Base screen No. 1
Base screen No. 2
Base screen No. 3
Different settings for the number of row and frame color are available for each alarm history.
8 - 225

1
Easy setting method
Common settings of alarm history

The common settings of alarm history can be set as follows.
Select [Project]
[Alarm History] from the menu.

[Common Settings]
[Alarm History] from project workspace
3
COMMON SETTING
Select [Common]
2
SPECIFICATIONS

OVERVIEW
4 Setting touch switches for alarm history

Set the touch switches that are used for alarm history display such as cursor display, movement,
detailed alarm display.
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
4
Message
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Erase...
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Detail...
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Up
Down

8 - 226
ALARM
Occurred Time
02/03/01 10:25 Temp. Error
8.8.4
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the display details (e.g. style, format, order of the display.)
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Model
Set the number of rows displayed for each screen. (Up to 27 rows)
Example: When this is set to 3
Number of Rows
Occurred date Time
Message
Restore Check
04/11/05
10:25
Temp. error
11:25
10:45
04/11/05
12:05
Oil error
12:25
12:28
04/11/06
08:30
Fuel error
09:45
09:40
Display rows
(not including the title line)
Set the alarm row No. from which alarm display starts in the order of occurrence (1 to 1024) when the
conditions of more than one specified device are met.
If the number of generated alarms is smaller than the value set in "Display Head Row", the display is left
blank.
Example: When 4 is set
Display Head Row*1
Occurrence
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Message
M3 ON
M4 ON
Restore
11:25
12:25
Alarms occurred
1) M0 is ON
2) M1 is ON
Check
3) M2 is ON
10:45
4) M3 is ON
12:28
5) M4 is ON
Order of alarm
occurrence
Alarms of the No.4 and later are displayed.
8 - 227

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table
and the characters such as time display.
X

According to the setting of "Size" (magnification of
"Magnification of character size
character size), the actual horizontal space is as follows:

set value in Space"
SPECIFICATIONS
Space
Example:
When "Size" is set to 2 and "Space" to 8, space of 16
dots is ensured.
Select a size of the character displayed on the alarm history display (magnification of horizontal size (X)
vertical size (Y) (1 to 8).
When X
Y is 1
1, the character size is 8
16 dots (X
Y).
COMMON SETTING
Size
Check the checkbox when displaying characters in the high-quality font.

(Only when the character size is set to 2
Use High Quality Font
2, 4
4, 6
6, or 8
8 (horizontal
vertical))
Check this item when displaying characters in the 16-dot HQ Mincho font.
If not checked, characters are displayed in the 16-dot standard font.
To display HQ font characters, set the HQ font in the Basic Comment setting.
Title
Oldest
: Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the oldest data.
Latest
: Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the latest data.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Select the display order of alarm items.

Sort Setting
Select the title color.

Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the alarm history.
Touch a row you want to view the details
Occurred
Message
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error
One Touch
Restore
11:25
12:25
The details of the touched row are displayed.
Check
10:45
12:28
Check Line 1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Display Alarm Details by
Use comment scrolling

depending on message
Check the item for displaying the scrolling message that moves from right to left on the alarm history.
width
Select the setting method of the title name to be displayed items.
Title
Direct
: Select this item to input the title name in [Title(Direct)].
Comment Group
: Select this item to display the title name with a comment set for the comment
group.
After selecting, set the comment group No. for the comment displayed in the
LAMP, SWITCH
title name.
Check the items to be displayed on the alarm history display.
Occurrences
Restorations
Message
Restore
Conveyer 1 error 11:25
Conveyer 2 error 12:25
Check
10:45
12:28
Cumulate
01:00
00:20
Count
1
5
The date and time of the alarm occurred and the comment associated with the alarm are displayed.
(This item is always check-marked.)
Check the checkbox when displaying the date and time of restoration from an alarm (when the specified
device condition is changed from "met" to "not met").
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
02/11/05 10:25
02/11/05 12:05
Restorations
Cumulative Time
Checks
Occur. Frequency

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 228
ALARM
Occurred
Display style
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Model
Check the checkbox to display the time at which alarm occurrence was confirmed.
The time at which the Check switch was touched after alarm occurrence is displayed.
(
Checks
Message
Oil error
Display
Restore Check
Check
Message
Oil error
Restore Check
12:00
style
Cumulative
Time
Check the checkbox when displaying the time that elapsed from alarm occurrence until restoration in
minutes.
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
Occur
Check the checkbox when displaying how many times alarms were generated.
Frequency
View Format
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
Set the view format of the items set in [Display style].
Title(Direct)
Input the title name for each view item.

The title can be input when [Direct] is selected for [Title] only.
Set the title name for display items that is selected from comments set for the comment group.
Title(Comment)
The comment is set in the comment No. for the comment group.
The item can be input only when [Comment Group] is selected for [Title].
(Contents)
Displays the comment corresponding to the comment No. set for [Title(Comment)].
The item displays the comment only when [Comment Group] is selected for [Title].
Set the number of digits (column width) for each item.
Example: When message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
Message
Oil error
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
Displayed with a width of 12 digits
Width
Occurred
: Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
Message
: 1 to 80 digits
Restored/Checks
: Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
Cum. Time
: Fixed to 8 digits
OccurFreq
: Fixed to 8 digits
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if "Content" is "String.")
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if the "Contents" is "String.")
Color
Select the title color for each view item.

Select this item to set the view format for date and time of alarm occurrence.
Date/Time
: Displays data and time.
Date
: Displays date only.
Time
: Displays time only.
String
: Displays the specified character string.
(After selection, select the view format for data and time)
Contents*2
(After selection, select the view format for date)

(After selection, select the view format for time)
(After selection, input the character string to the [Text] below.)
Input characters to display the date and time of the alarm occurred (when triggers of specified device are
Text
satisfied) as a specified character string.

Select [String] in [Contents] to set this item.
Maximum 20 characters can be input.
Category
8 - 229

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Model
When superimposing an object with another, the object must be set to Front or Back.
(
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer2 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in
the operation log.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Object Name

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 230
ALARM
Layer
OVERVIEW
When not superimposing an object with another, set it by default (back).
*1 Display head row

If the number of alarms becomes higher than the numbers set to [Display Head Row] while alarm history
is displayed on the GOT, [Display Head Row] setting will not be valid.
To enable [Display Head Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the alarm history
display screen.
If different line No. of display start are set on plural screens, different alarm history
can be displayed for each screen.
Alarm occurred number

Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Item No. 1
Screen 1
(Line No. of display start: 1)
Item No. 2
Item No. 3
Item No. 4
Screen 2
Item No. 5
Item No. 6
Item No. 7
Screen 3
Item No. 8
Item No. 9
*2 View format of alarm date/time

View format of date
Year is displayed by the last 2 digits of the year.
Example: Nov. 25, 2004
[yy/mm/dd]
: 02/11/25 (8 digits)
[mm/dd/yy]
: 11/25/02 (8 digits)
[dd/mm/yy]
: 25/11/02 (8 digits)
[mm/dd]
: 11/25 (5 digits)
View format of time
Time is displayed by 24-hour format.
Example: 9: 50: 48a.m.
[hh: mm: ss] : 09: 50: 48 (8 digits)
[hh: mm]
: 09: 50 (5 digits)
Display format of date/time
A one-digit space is inserted between the date and time.
04/11/25_09:50:48 (17 digits)
Space (1 digit)
8 - 231

8.8.4 Setting items
1
2 Frame tab
OVERVIEW
Set the frame, ruled line/ vertical line for alarm history.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Model

Shape
selected as shape.
Format
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Frame
Plate
Frame
15963
Plate
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Frame
Check this item to draw ruled lines for alarm history.
Occurred date
Time
Restore
Check
04/11/05
10:25
11:25
10:45
04/11/05
10:25
11:25
10:45
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 232
ALARM
Message
LAMP, SWITCH
After checking, select a color for the ruled line.

Draw Ruled Line
3 Device (Common) tab

Set the collecting method of alarm data and the device.
The setting on this tab is reflected for display of all the alarm historical data.
Basic
Device (Common)
Frame
Item
Option (Common)
Extended
Description
Model
Select a collection mode of the alarm history display function.

Historical
: Corrects alarm data as history.
If an alarm in the restored status occurs again, the alarm data is collected as a new
alarm.
Cumulative
: The latest alarm status, the cumulative period of time the alarm has been
generated, and the cumulative number of times of the alarm occurrences are
calculated.
If any alarm in the restored status occurs again, the occurrence frequency
increases, and the previous alarm information (occurrence date/time, restored
time, and checked time) is updated to the latest one.
For differences in the collection modes, refer to the following.
Mode
Section 8.8.2
Alarm collection mode
Number of alarms to
monitor
Set the points of the device to be monitored.

The number of the device points you can specify differs depending on the type of the device
monitored.
(For GT10, the bit of word, word device (16 bits), word device (32 bits) cannot be set.)
Bit device
: 1 to 3072 Points (GT10: 1 to 1000 Points)
Bit device or bit specification of word device: 1 to 3072 points
Word device (16 bits)
: 1 to 1024 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Word device (32 bits)
: 1 to 512 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Watch Cycle
Set the cycle in which the GOT monitors the specified devices of the controller.
Cycle can be set from 600ms to 80s in the units of 100ms.
Detailed alarm display

type
Select a method for displaying alarm details.

Set the comment No., base screen No., or window screen No. for [Detail No.] in the alarm setting list that is
listed below [Detailed alarm display type].
(For GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
No Display
: No details are displayed.
Comment Window*1 : Created comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on the base screen.
Window Screen*6
: The detailed information is displayed on the window screen (Overlap window 1).

8 - 233

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Item
Extended
Option (Common)
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Select a data type of the device monitored.

For GT10, [Bit of Word], [Signed BIN16], [Unsigned BIN16], [Signed BIN32], [Unsigned BIN32], [BCD16],
[BCD32], and [Real] cannot be selected.)
Data Type
: Select this when monitoring a bit device by the ON/OFF change.
Bit Of Word
: Select this when monitoring a word device by ON/OFF of specified bits.
Signed BIN16
: The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN16
: The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32
: The word device value is handled as a signed 32-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN32
: The word device value is handled as an unsigned 32-bit binary.
BCD16
: The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
BCD32
: The word device value is handled as a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
Real
: The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Bit
After selecting any of the above, specify the devices monitored in the Device column of the alarm setting
Alarm setting list
Device
Alarm Range*2
COMMON SETTING
list below.
Set the devices specified for alarms, conditions for alarm occurrences, and operation when an alarm
occurs.
(
When setting a device as a word device, click the Exp. button to set the range of the word device values
for the alarm data display.
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Cmnt. No.
Message
Temp. error
Oil error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Set a comment No. used for the device specified.

Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:25 12:28
Set a comment No. of the message to be displayed in this area.
Detail
Any comment registered can be selected. If a comment is selected here, the "Cmnt. No." is switched
automatically.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Selection
The comment corresponding to the "Cmnt. No." is displayed.
Set the comment No., window screen No., or base screen No. for displaying detailed data when an alarm
occurs (when specified device conditions are satisfied).
Select whether or not to enable the alarm resetting (turning off or resetting the specified device by the
touch switch for resetting).
After checking this item, set up a reset value if the device is a word device.
(
RSTValue
Set a value written into the word device (reset value) when the GOT is reset by the touch switch for alarm
history display. (Fixed to "0" for GT10)
LAMP, SWITCH
RST
Select a mail-sending mode.

No
: No mails are sent.
Occur
: The occurred date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an alarm
Restore
: The restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an alarm is
occurs (when the conditions of the device are met).
Mail
Both
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
restored (when the conditions of the device are not met).

: The occurred or restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm occurs or an alarm is restored.
Select a device setting method.
(For GT10, [Random] and [Fixed] cannot be selected.)
Continuous :Set devices continuously starting from the device specified.
Device No.
Random
:Set devices one by one.
Fixed
:Set more than one alarm range with the same word device when the word device is set.
When "Random" is selected, it is not allowed to set a bit device and the word device bits together as
monitoring devices.

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 234
ALARM
Comment
Basic
Device (Common)
Frame
Extended
Option (Common)
Item
Description
Model
Select how to set the comment No. corresponding to the specified device.
Comment No.

Continuous :Set continuous comment numbers starting from the comment No. specified.
Random
Comment Type
:Set comment numbers one by one.
Select comment types (the basic comment or the comment group).

When selecting [Comment Group], set the comment group No.
The setting is available when selecting [Comment Group] for [Comment Type] only.
When sending a mail, select the comment column No. from the comment group to be used for the
comment.
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the mail comment row No. to 3.
Comment
Comment group No.2
Mail Comment
Comment column No.
Row No.
Comment No.
Product 1-1 Product 1-2 Product 1-3 Product 1-4 Product 1-5
Use this comment row No. when sending a mail.

Select how to set the comment window, window screen, or base screen for detail display.
Continuous :Set continuous numbers starting from the comment No., window screen No., or base
Detailed
screen No.
Display No.
Detail
Random
Comment Type
Copy*3
:Set numbers one by one.
Select comment types (the basic comment or the comment group).

When selecting [Comment Group], set the comment group No.
When copying the set data to another field, click the Copy button.
(Import)*4
Reads out the alarm history settings that have been edited in a CSV file to GT Designer2.
(Export)*4
Saves the alarm history settings that have been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file.
8 - 235

8.8.4 Setting items
*1 Displaying the comment window
Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
2) Display the detail display screen by

key input from the touch switch
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
OVERVIEW
1) Display the detail display screen by

one touch operation
Details
Window screen is displayed

(Overlap window).
SPECIFICATIONS
Comment window is displayed

(Window screen for alarm history).
Base screen is displayed.
3
Check Line 2
COMMON SETTING
Check Line 2
The specified comment is displayed.
The specified base screen or window screen is displayed.
(1) Number of characters available for comment window

Number of characters available for comment window
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GOT
GT157 , GT156 , GT155
(GT1555-V only) ,
39 characters
23 characters
18 characters
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1665, GT1595, GT1585,
GT SoftGOT1000
GT155
(GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only) , GT115 ,
Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104

GT1030, GT1020
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Check the power module
Check the power module

8.8.4 Setting items
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new
line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
8 - 236
ALARM
Check Line 2
*2 Alarm range
Edit Alarm Range dialog box
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms.
Item
Description
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms using a conditional expression.
Select any of the following conditional expressions.
Set a conditional expression by a combination of a device value ($V) and constants.
Constant
Alarm Range
Device value for alarm display ($V)

Relational operator
To set an expression other than the above 3 patterns, select "Other Range" and then click the "Exp..."
button.
When the Edit Range Expression dialog box appears, set any conditional expression.
In a conditional expression set by a user, the value of another word device can be set as a condition.
(Constant)
Enter a value in decimal.

Set a relational operator for the conditional expression.
(Relational
operator)
$V
<
: The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
==
: The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<=
: The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!=
: The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
Indicates the value of the device used for alarm display.

*1
Clicking this displays the edit range expression dialog box.
8 - 237

8.8.4 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
*1 Edit Range Expression dialog box
Description
Select a format of the conditional expression.
Style
A B (2 Terms)
: Sets a range of the condition using 2 terms.
A B C (3 Terms)
: Sets a range of the condition using 3 terms.
By clicking the A , B , or C button, set a constant or variable of the term in "Input Each Term (A-C)."
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.
<
: The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
==
: The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<=
: The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!=
: The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
COMMON SETTING
Item
SPECIFICATIONS
Set each of the terms of the conditional expression.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
:Set a constant.
Select this item, enter a value and click the Input button.
Select the data type of the numerical value by the Hex , Dec , or Oct
Input Each
button.
$V (Device Value)
:Set the word device by which an alarm is displayed.
Other Device
:Set s value of device other than the word device set for alarm display as a term
of the conditional expression.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Term (A-C)

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 238
ALARM
Fixed Value
*3 Copy
This section explains how to copy the set alarm history items to other place.
Item
Description
Source No.
Set the alarm history No. that will be copied.
Destination No.
Set the alarm history No. that will be a copy destination.
Number of Copy
Set the number of copies.
Copy Item
Check the relevant items.

Comment No.
8 - 239
Copies comment No. (Basic comment) of the source.
Detail No.
Copies the detailed display No. of the source.
Device Reset
Copies the device reset settings of the source.
Alarm Range
Copies the range setting of the source.
Send Mail
Copies the send mail settings of the source.

8.8.4 Setting items
*4 Import/Export
OVERVIEW
The exported CSV file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software.
The CSV file, after editing, can be imported to and opened by GT Designer2.
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Exported in CSV file
Editing the exported file
Add the setting using applications

such as Microsoft Excel.
R
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Importing to GT Designer2
LAMP, SWITCH
The added contents

are displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
For using languages other than Japanese and English for comments, do not import
or export CSV files.
When CSV files are imported or exported, data stored in the files may not be
correctly displayed.
8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 240
ALARM
When using languages other than Japanese and English
4 Option (Common) tab

Set the history retention (history clear, saved to memory card) for alarm history.
The settings on this tab will be reflected in all alarm history display.
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
Model
Check this item to store the number of alarms currently occurred and restored to a word device.
After checking, click on Dev... button and set the device.
Number of Alarms Occurred
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the
Device (Common) tab.
Check the checkbox when forcibly deleting the restored-state alarm data by changing the specified
device status from OFF to ON.
After checking the box, click on the Dev...
(
History Clear
button to set the device to be used as a history clear trigger.
The cycle in which the GOT monitors the history clear trigger device is the same as "Watch Cycle" set on
the Device (Common) tab.
Alarm data can be cleared by the touch switch (the switch for history clearance) as well.
(
8 - 241

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
Model
OVERVIEW
Check this item to save alarm historical data to memory card.

After checking, select the timing of data storage into a memory card.
Cycle
:The alarm history is stored by the set sampling cycle, respectively.

After checking, select the storage cycle in one-minute unit within a
Store to Memory Card*3
range from 1 minute to maximum 60 minutes.

Timing of alarm occurrence
:When alarms occur, store the alarm history.
SPECIFICATIONS
Data can be stored to memory card using the alarm history switch.
Store to CSV
Check the checkbox when saving alarm data to the memory card in the CSV file format.
File Format*1
This is selectable only when "Store to Memory Card" is check-marked.

Select the name of drive where the alarm data are saved.
Drive
Name*2
(For the GT105 , GT104 , and GT1030, the item is fixed to [D:Built-in SRAM]. For the GT1020, the
COMMON SETTING
item is fixed to [C:Built-in Flash Memory].)

Enter the name of the folder in which the CSV file is stored. (Up to 62 characters)
Folder Name*4
The default folder name can be changed by the following procedure.

1) Select [Common]
[System Environment].
2) Set a project name on "Project Folder" of "System Setting."
The file name is displayed.

File Name
Using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.CSV

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Not using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.DAT

The item can be set only when [Store to Memory Card] and [Store to CSV File Format] are checked and
when [Comment Group] is selected for [Comment Type] in the Device (Common) tab.
When storing an alarm history in a memory card, select the comment column No. from the comment
group to be used for the CSV file comment.
Comment group No.2
Comment
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the CSV file comment column No. to 3.
Column No.
Comment column No.
(CSV Storage)
Comment No.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Use this comment column No. when the CSV file is output.
Set the device to be ON while alarm data are written to the memory card.
(
Set the device by which an error is notified when alarm data writing to the memory card fails.
Device
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
restored.
Check the checkbox so that the oldest alarm history data will be deleted and new alarm data will be
When number of alarm
added when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds the upper limit (GT15, GT
occurrences exceed set
SoftGOT1000: 3072, GT11: 2048, GT10: 1000) and conditions for the specified device are met.
value, delete oldest alarm
occurrences
If unchecked, new alarm data are not added when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds
Section 8.8.6 Precautions)
the upper limit.

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 242
ALARM
*1 Saving data in the CSV format

(1) Data stored
Alarm data are converted into a CSV file data as follows.
The CSV file can be read and displayed on a PC by spreadsheet software.
Not collected in
historical mode
Number of alarms occurred

Number of restored-state alarms
Number of checked alarms
Comment Restoration Check
Cumulative Occurrence
(may be displayed differently
date/time date/time time
frequency
(e.g. "2004/5/29") depending
on the spreadsheet software
setting.)
(2) Updating stored data

Data collected on the alarm history display are overwritten to the CSV file at the user-specified
cycles (1 to 60min).
Because the alarm data deleted on the alarm history display are deleted in the CSV file as well, do
not delete the alarm to be kept in the CSV file.
Remark
When all of alarm history data are deleted

If the alarm history is stored to a CSV file after all data have been deleted with the
touch switch Delete all (FFB7H) or "History Clear," the CSV file is left blank.
Stored to a CSV file with alarm history deleted
*2 Storage drive
The following shows the applicable storage drives for each GOT type.
GOT type
GT16, GT15,
GT SoftGOT1000
GT11
8 - 243
Applicable storage drive

A: Standard CF Card, B: Extended Memory Card
A: Standard CF Card, D: Built-in SRAM

8.8.4 Setting items
Nothing is stored.
If the memory card is faulty or the files are different from those in the memory card, the GOT
internal device (error detection common information: GS252.b0) turns ON to disable the alarm
information to be stored (Device data collection is continued).
If the storage operation is done in this situation, the system alarm will occur.
If GS252.b0 turns ON, replace the memory card or check the data within the card.
OVERVIEW
*3 Storing erroneous alarm information data
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Turning ON the GOT internal device (error detection common control: GS452.b0) will turn
GS252.b0 OFF. This allows the file storage to be resumed.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
Section 2.9.1 GOT internal devices
Reading alarm
information files
Alarm information
storage
COMMON SETTING
Alarm information
storage
GOT operation
Alarm information
is not stored.
Error status
Alarm information
is stored.
Normal status
Error detection common

information (GS252.b0)
ON
OFF
Error detection common

control (GS452.b0)
ON
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm information
status
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Power ON.
Monitoring
start
Turn GS452.b0 ON using

touch switch or similar,
Alarm information
as this causes GS252.
after monitoring
starts is stored.
b0 to turn OFF.
While GS252.b0 is ON,

the alarm information
file is not stored.
OFF
Application of error detection common information

An overlap window (for file error detection) can be displayed by detecting GS252.b0
with script function.
LAMP, SWITCH
*4 Folder name
A folder name as shown below cannot be used.

Folder name starting from . (period) or \
Folder name ending at . (period) or \
Folder name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 244
ALARM
If an alarm information
file is faulty,
GS252.b0 turns ON..
Remark

(Setting example)
[Folder Name] : Project1\abc
Project1
abc
8 - 245

8.8.4 Setting items
1
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
5 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Security
Description
Model
(
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item when setting a user ID (1 to 65535).

When the user ID is set, the following operation is enabled.
User ID
To specify the used object in the operation log.

(
Check this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
Operation Log Target
(
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Specify the device where the comment number of an alarm with the cursor displayed is stored.
LAMP, SWITCH
Use the following operation to store a comment number by displaying the cursor on an alarm.
Check the [Display a cursor in selected row] item.
Use the touch switch (key code switch (cursor display)) for alarm history display.
(
row
Check this item when displaying the cursor by touching the displayed alarm.
(This allows displaying of the cursor for the alarm without setting a touch switch.)
Setting the [Comment No. Device] item stores the comment number of the touched alarm to the device.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display a cursor in selected
8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 246
ALARM
Comment No. Device
8.8.5
Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch for displaying alarm history can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying alarm history.
Touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch
Key code
Description
Show/Hide the cursor
Show cursor
FFB0H
Hide cursor
FFB1H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Show the cursor!

The cursor moves to the previous/next page. (page by page)
Move cursor upward
Occurrend
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore Check
Occurred
04/06/01 13:54
04/06/01 12:23
04/06/01 11:11
Message
Fuse error
Motor error
Restore Check
14:00
13:15
15:10
14:50
FFB2H
Moved to the next page!

The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
FFB3H
Move the cursor!
8 - 247

8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch
Key code
Description
The alarm status is changed to "checked."
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Check
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
FFB5H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Display date/time of all data (check all)
OVERVIEW
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Restore
FFB4H
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Display date/time of selected data (check)
14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
FFB6H
Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
17:15
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
3
COMMON SETTING
Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
The restored alarm is deleted!
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
Temp.15:20
error
04/06/01
module.
04/06/01
14:25
Message
Temp. error
at
power
Fuse
error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The detailed screen of the selected alarms is displayed.
Display detail
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
FFB8H
Check power module.

The detailed screen is displayed!
Resets the selected alarm data. (Changes the device value to off or the reset
Reset the selected alarm data*1
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
17:15
Check
15:10
14:50
6
LAMP, SWITCH
value according to the setting on the device tab)
FFB9H
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The selected alarm is reset!


8 - 248
ALARM
Touch switch
Key code
Description
Stores alarm data to the memory card.
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Save alarm contents to memory card
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
FFBBH
The data are saved to the memory card!

Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in
the ladder monitor screen.iOne-touch ladder jump function)
Occurrence
Message
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
*1 Resetting user alarms

To change the device value to the OFF status or the reset value by a touch switch, set "ON" in "RST" on the
Device (Common) tab.
Section 8.8.4
Device (Common) tab
Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status

Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function
differently depending on the display status.
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per
page basis).
If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).
8 - 249

Section 8.8.4
Basic
tab)
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore Check
15:10
14:50
Occurrence
Message
Replace
fuseTemp.
on error
04/06/01 the
16:51
the
power
module.
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25
Oil error
Restore Check
15:10
14:50
The detailed screen is displayed.
(2) Touch switch setting method

SPECIFICATIONS
screen of the selected alarm can be displayed. (
OVERVIEW
(1) Directly touching alarm history display data

By setting "Display Alarm Details by One Touch" on the Basic tab, the detailed
3
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 250
ALARM
Remark
8.8.6
Precautions
This section describes precautions to be taken when using alarm history display.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on one screen
Only one object can be set for the alarm history display.
(2) Usable comments
The alarm history display uses comments registered in the basic comment or comment group.
(3) Usable screen
The alarm history display can be set on the base screen only.
(4) Devices to be set
Only one set device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but set devices
have to be the same.
(5) The comment window cannot be displayed while the key window is displayed.
Erase the key window to display the comment window.
Window screen
for alarm history
Key window
1000
Numerical input Alarm history display
(6) When using other objects at the same time

(a) The following objects cannot be set on the screen where the alarm history function has been
set.
Data list function object
Alarm list (user alarm) display function object with the up/down scroll function setting
(b) Precautions for the case when the alarm history and alarm list are displayed simultaneously
If the touch switches for alarm list (user alarm) are set for any other screen, they can function
for the alarm history.
Example: When the touch switches for alarm list are set for the other screen (overlap
window2)
Delete
Up
Cursor ON
Down
04/12/01 10:25 Internal pressure error
04/12/01 13:25 Oil pressure error
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/11/05 12:35
Oil error
Rest. Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
As the base screen has higher precedence,

the touch switches function for alarm history.
8 - 251

8.8.6 Precautions
Alarm list display

(set to overlap window 1)

(set to base screen)
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab is set to White.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen
color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab to other than White.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(7) Display of occurred time, checked time, and restored time

For the occurred time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions on the clock function that is controlling GOT's clock data, refer
to the following.
(10) When using GT10

Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
To view alarm history after the setting is changed, make setting before the operation above so that
the alarm history data is stored to CSV file for backup.
By the backup, the alarm history can be viewed on personal computer even after alarms on the
GOT are cleared/overwriteen.
(To prevent data mismatch, alarm history data file (Extension: DAT) will not be displayed on the
GOT to which new project data has been downloaded.)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If alarm history setting screen is opened, and closed with the OK button, downloading the project
data to the GOT disables to view the past alarm history. (Whether the setting is changed or not on
the screen, the past alarm history cannot be viewed by the operation above.)
Furthermore, when the alarm history is stored to the memory card with the above GOT, the history
data is cleared (The file is newly created (overwritten).
Then, the CSV file is also overwritten.
COMMON SETTING
3
(9) Timing when alarm history file is newly created (overwritten)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(1) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with
application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer2.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications,
including text editors.
LAMP, SWITCH

8.8.6 Precautions
8 - 252
ALARM
8.9 Scrolling Alarm Display
The function enables user-created comments to scroll across the screen from right to left when an alarm
occurs.
A comment is repeatedly displayed until causes of the alarm are removed.
The comment display position can be selected from among the top, center, and bottom of the base screen.
1 When only one alarm occurs

The comment corresponding to the occurred alarm scrolls across the screen from right to left.
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
Error
Error occurrence
occurrence
2 When multiple alarms occur

The comments corresponding to the occurred alarms scroll across the screen from right to left in order
of alarm occurrence.
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
Error
Error1 occurrence Error2
Remark
The second or later alarm is

displayed following the first alarm.
Error2 occurrence
The GOT stops displaying comments

corresponding to the alarms that causes are removed.
Comments to be displayed with scrolling alarm display

Comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register comments to be displayed with the scrolling alarm display in the comment
group.
8 - 253
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For the scrolling alarm display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this
section.
Make the settings by referring to the following description if necessary.
(1) Functions relevant to scrolling alarm display only
Relevant to the scrolling alarm display only.
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
2
SPECIFICATIONS
8.9.1
Displaying/not displaying scrolling alarm display

Whether or not to display the scrolling alarm display can be set for each screen.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
The display position can be selected from among the top, center, and bottom rows.
10:30 Emergency stop
Setting items
[Carry out display of alarm flow]
When an alarm occurs, the scrolling alarm display appears

on the top row of the screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
A 1254 B 348
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 254
ALARM
A 1254 B 348
COMMON SETTING
(1) Functions relevant to scrolling alarm display only
8.9.2
Before setting scrolling alarm display
1 Alarm types and alarm display

(1) Alarm types
The GOT can display user alarms only.
(2) Alarm display
(a) Display timing
When an alarm occurs, the scrolling alarm display appears on the GOT.
When causes of all the alarms are removed, the scrolling alarm display disappears from the
screen.
(b) Displaying multiline comment
The second line of a comment is displayed following after the first line of the comment. (The
same operation is applied to comments with three or more lines.)
(c) Displaying alarms with font, character color, and background color set
By setting the font, character color, and background color, the user can visibly notice the
scrolling alarm display.
(
Section 8.9.4
Format tab)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
By setting the background color,

the user can visibly notice the scrolling alarm display.
04/6/110:30 Temp. error
2 Operations when directly touching scrolling alarm display

The following operations are available.
(1) Switching display positions
When objects and window screens are hidden under the scrolling alarm display, the scrolling alarm
display position can be switched by the touch operation.
Displayed on bottom of the screen
Displayed on top of the screen
Displayed on center of the screen
10:30 Temp.
error
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348
B 348
A 1254 A 1254
Temp. error
04/6/1
10:30 Temp. error
Display
position
switching

the display area*1
Display
position
switching

the display area*1

the display area*1
Display position switching
For details of *1, refer to the next page.
By touching the leftmost part of the scrolling alarm display area, the display position is switched to
the top, center, bottom of the screen, in that order.
8 - 255

8.9.2 Before setting scrolling alarm display
*1 Screen area for switching display positions
A 1254
A 1254
348
OVERVIEW
The touch operation area for switching display positions is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
348
2
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Leftmost 16 dots
3
COMMON SETTING
Mesh on the GOT screen
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The vertical touch operation area for switching display positions depends on the size of characters to be
displayed. The size of the vertical touch operation area changes in 16-dot units.
Example 1) When the character size (vertical) is 16 dots
Vertical touch operation area: 16 1 = 16 dots
Example 2) When the character size (vertical) is 24 dots
Vertical touch operation area: 16 2 = 32 dots
When a screen is switched to another screen during the scrolling alarm display, the
GOT displays the scrolling alarm display at the same position as before screen
switching. (The GOT does not display the scrolling alarm display at the position set
on the Auxiliary tab in the Screen Property dialog box.)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
Display position when switching screens
6
A 1254 A 1254
38
10:30 Temp. error

Screen
Switching
Displayed at the position before switching
regardless of the display position setting
The display position set on the Auxiliary tab in the Screen Property dialog box is
enabled when the GOT displays the scrolling alarm display for an alarm newly
occurred.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
LAMP, SWITCH
B 348 B 348

8.9.2 Before setting scrolling alarm display
8 - 256
ALARM
8.9.3
1 Select [Common]
[Floating Alarm] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark

Double-clicking the
in Workspace(Project) displays the setting dialog
box.
Double-click
8 - 257

Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the timing of collecting alarm data, devices to be specified for alarms, comments to be displayed
with alarm occurrences, and others.
OVERVIEW
8.9.4
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Format
Watch Cycle
Description
Model
Set the cycle of monitoring set devices (1 to 3600 seconds).
Alarm(Device) Points
:Select the item when monitoring a bit device by the ON/OFF change.
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
:The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.
Set the number of device points to be monitored (GT11: 1 to 3072, GT10: 1 to 512).
LAMP, SWITCH
Device Type
Bit
Signed BIN16
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select a device type of devices to be monitored. (For GT10, only [Bit] can be selected.)
Select a method to set devices. (For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)

Continuous :Select the item for setting consecutive devices starting from the set device.
Device No.
Random
:Select the item for setting devices one by one.
Fixed
:When a device type for monitoring word devices is set, select the item for setting
multiple alarm ranges for one word device.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Item

8.9.4 Setting items
8 - 258
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Format
Item
Description
Select a method to set comments of the comment group to be displayed. (For GT10, [Random]
cannot be selected.)
Comment No.
Continuous :Select the item for setting consecutive comment numbers of the comment group
Comment
starting from the set comment number.

Random
Group No.
Alarm setting list

Device
:Select the item for setting comment numbers one by one.
Set the number of the comment group.

Set devices to be specified for alarms and comments to be displayed when alarms occur.
Set devices to be specified for alarms. (
Set the ranges of the devices for displaying alarms. (For GT10, [Bit] is fixed for [Device Type], and
[ON] is fixed for [Alarm Range].)
When [Device Type] is set to [Bit]
ON : When a bit device turns on, an alarm is displayed.
Alarm Range
OFF: When a bit device turns off, an alarm is displayed.

When [Device Type] is set to any other than [Bit]
Click the Exp. button, and then set the range of the word device value for displaying an alarm.
(
Comment No.
Set comment numbers of the comment group for displaying comments when alarms occur.
Check the item to store the number of alarm occurrences in a word device.
Device for Occurring

Number
8 - 259
After checking the item, set the device that stores the number of alarm occurrences.
(

8.9.4 Setting items
Model
1
OVERVIEW
2 Format tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Format
Item
Description
Model
High
:Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Select a scrolling speed of alarms.

13)
per second.
Floating Speed
Middle
7) per
second.
Low
3) per
Font
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
second.
Select a font of characters. (For GT10, [12dot Standard] cannot be selected.)
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
Size
For details of fonts and the size, refer to the following.

(
Text
Select a display style of characters (Regular/Bold/
Format
Solid/Raised).
Section 2.3 Specifications of Applicable
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
LAMP, SWITCH
Characters)
Solid
Number of
Display Attributes
Select a color of the shadow when [Style] is set to [Solid] or [Raised].

Set the number of items to be displayed for an alarm (1 to 2).
Attribute
Display
Occurred
:Select the item to display the date and time of alarm occurrences.
Comment
:Select the item to display comments corresponding to alarms.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select an item to be displayed for the scrolling alarm display.
Select whether to display both date and time, or either of date and time when [Attribute] is set to
Attributes
[Occurred].
Contents
Date/Time :Select the item to display both date and time.

Date
:Select the item to display the date only.
Time
:Select the item to display the time only.
After selecting an item, set the date format and/or time format.

8.9.4 Setting items
8 - 260
ALARM
Style
Basic
Format
Item
Description
Date Format*1
Click
, and then set the display format of the date.
The item can be set when [Contents] is set to [Date/Time] or [Date].
Display
Attributes
Time Format*2
Click
, and then set the display format of the time.
The item can be set when [Contents] is set to [Date/Time] or [Time].

Select a color of characters to be displayed.
Fixed
:Select the item to display characters in one color only.
Comment Color
:Select the item to display comments for the scrolling alarm display in
Switching
After selecting [Fixed], set the character color.
Text
comment colors set in the comment group.
Color
Switching
When [Fixed] is selected for [Text Color Switching]

Fixed/Default
Color
Select a character color to display characters in one color only.

When [Comment Color] is selected for [Text Color Switching]
Select a character color to be displayed when comments are not registered.
Display Background
Select a background color of the scrolling alarm display area.

Check the checkbox, and then select a background color.
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.

Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
8 - 261

8.9.4 Setting items
Model
Precautions
OVERVIEW

(1) Maximum number of scrolling alarm display settings
Only one scrolling alarm display setting is available for one project.
The GOT can display the same scrolling alarm display on multiple base screens.
Whether or not to display the scrolling alarm display can be set for each base screen.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 4.4 Auxiliary Settings
Operations when directly touching scrolling alarm display
When alarm does not occur
When alarm occurs
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
The GOT does not display a part of the

window screen hidden under the scrolling
alarm display area.
When a part of the touch switch is hidden
under the scrolling alarm display area,
the touch switch may not operate by
touching the switch.
Error occurrence
When the touch switch is completely hidden
under the scrolling alarm display area, the
touch switch does not operate by touching
the switch.
(2) Displaying occurred time

The GOT clock data is used for displaying the occurred time.
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock data for the clock function, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTING
Section 8.9.2
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) When scrolling alarm display overlaps with placed objects

The user cannot operate objects, including touch switches, and window screens hidden under the
scrolling alarm display.
Change the display position of the scrolling alarm display.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.9.5 Precautions
8 - 262
ALARM
8.9.5
9.
PARTS
9.1 Parts Display
This function displays the registered parts and base screen/window screen according to the device status.
Remark
Parts displayed by Parts Display

There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts Display. The parts
to be displayed by Parts Display needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by the GT Designer2 (registered parts)
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
Section 4.3 Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card
1 Applicable parts types

Type
Description
Remarks
Parts must have been
The figures registered as parts are displayed.
registered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts

Registration
Parts
Section 4.3
Registering
BMP/JPEG Files
Figures
Text
BMP/JPEG file
for Parts in the

Memory Card
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the
device value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.
White
Mark
BMP/JPEG format parts

cannot be used.
Draw the color-changed
Blue
Red
area in white.
During parts movement
(fixed), color change
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
D100 = 0
D100 = 50
D100 = 100
Only one color is used.
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
9-1
9.1 Parts Display
Type
Description
Remarks
The figures on any base screens and window screens are displayed.
Line A operation
PARTS
Base screen
Line A operation
The objects set on the

base screens and window
Base Screen 1
screens are not displayed.
Base Screen 20
10
GRAPH, METER
Screen display
Window screen
The figure on Base Screen 20

is overlaid on Base Screen 1.
Application example
(Parts display (bit/word)
(Parts display (fixed))
Basic tab (Bit) / Basic tab (Word) Setting
Basic tab (Fixed) Setting

X10=OFF
X30=OFF
ON
12
Part No. 3 is displayed
RECIPE
Part No. 1 is displayed
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Only the white part of parts changes.
Three parts are

arranged in
cascaded way.
ON
(X10)
(X20)
(X30)
16
9.1 Parts Display
9-2
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Part No. 1
Part No. 2
Part No. 3
TRIGGER
Cascade multiple parts.
ACTIONS
11
Display different images of the same part
9.1.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For Parts display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to parts display only
Relevant to parts display only.
(2) Functions relevant to parts display and others

Inverting the grouped parts (XOR display)
When the drawing mode of parts display is set to XOR, the grouped parts can be inverted
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
(XOR display) at once.
Setting items
[While display mode of part
Inverting the grouped

figures (XOR display)
at once
Inverting each of the

grouped figures (XOR
display)
(The figures are inverted
one by one in the
overlapping order.)
Using/Not using the image files in the memory card

Whether to use the image files stored in the memory card for the objects of Parts Display/
display is XOR, grouped figures

are displayed by XOR]
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Parts Movement can be specified.
<Not checked>
<Checked>
Setting items
[The image file in a memory
card is used for the Parts Image
of Parts Display/Movement]
Displays the parts

registered in the GOT.
9-3
9.1 Parts Display

Displays the BMP/JPEG file

parts in the memory card.
(2) Functions relevant to parts display and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
PARTS
10
Setting items
GRAPH, METER
objects within GOT]
Setting for
each project
The order of displaying objects on the GOT can be adjusted to that of the overlapped objects
Setting for
each screen
on GT Designer2.
2)
Setting items
2)
3)
3)
1)
1)
12

Designer2]
TRIGGER
11
ACTIONS
Section 2.9.1 GOT internal devices)

RECIPE

Memory card image file display setting signal
(Write device: GS450.b8)
13
The image files in the memory card can be used for the objects of Parts Display/Parts
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Movement.
14
DEBUG

OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9-4
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
9.1.2
Parts displaying method
This section describes the parts displaying method of Parts Display.
1 Parts switching method

(1) Bit parts display
Section 9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display)
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to bit device
ON/OFF.
X10 OFF
X10 ON
Parts corresponding
to bit device OFF are
displayed.
Parts corresponding
to bit device ON are
displayed.
(2) Word parts display
Section 9.1.5 Setting items of word parts display)
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word device
value.
D100 1
No. 1 part is displayed.
(3) Fixed parts display
D100 10
D100 100
Section 9.1.6 Setting items of fixed parts display)
This function displays the parts/base screen/window screen at rising/falling edge of a bit device.
Only one type of part can be displayed, but the part can be overlaid on the other parts display.
Part of parts display A
Part of parts display B

Rising edge
X1
ON
OFF
Parts display B is
displayed at rising
edge of X1.
9-5
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.2 Parts displaying method
Parts display B is overlaid

on parts display A.
9
Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card
BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.
Displaying BMP/JPEG files (object units)
2 After the display triggers of the part are met in Parts Display/Parts Movement, the BMP/JPEG
file part in specified memory card is displayed.
3 Set the following items in the Basic tab and Case tab (only for word) of the Parts Display/Parts
Movement for use.
Image File Setting
Image File No. setting
GRAPH, METER
1 Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the memory card. For storage method, refer
to the following.
10
11
ACTIONS
the memory card for display.
TRIGGER
(a) When using BMP/JPEG file part in memory card

In each object setting of Parts Display/Parts Movement, specify the BMP/JPEG file stored in
PARTS
(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)
12
RECIPE
(b) Display example

The following figure shows the display example when the BMP file parts are stored in the
memory card.
13
IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
Example: Displaying the BMP image with Parts Display (Word)

Setting image file and entering part number 1 to 65536 in word device displays the BMP
image.
Word device for displaying the part: D100
0
D100
D100
500
D100
14
999
DEBUG
D100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
IMG0001.BMP
Displays BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP).

(IMG0500.BMP).

(IMG0999.BMP).
15
OTHERS
If specifying "0" to the

part number, BMP file
parts are hidden.
16
9.1 Parts Display

9-6
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(2) Display method in units of projects (using a part)

The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a number from
9001 to 9999 for the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make
the setting in the following procedure.
(a) To ordinarily select a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card
The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed ordinarily when a parts No. of
9001 to 9999 is specified.
1 Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the memory card.
Displaying BMP/JPEG files (project units)
2 Check [The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/
Movement] of the Auxiliary Setting, and then download the setting to the GOT.
Check!
3 The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed when the parts displaying
condition (Parts No.: 9001 to 9999) is met on Parts Display/Parts Movement.
4 Setting of image file and image file No. are not required.
9-7
9.1 Parts Display

Parts No.
9001 to 9999
When GS450.b8 is ON
When GS450.b8 is OFF
The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is
The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is
displayed.
displayed.
PARTS
(b) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card by using the GS450.b8
The displaying of the parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be switched to displaying of the
BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card when a parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.
10
GRAPH, METER

2 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
(c)
Display example
The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the memory
card is shown below.
IMG0001.BMP
RECIPE
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display: D100
D100
9001
D100
9500
D100
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
9000
12
IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
D100
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
9999
14
BMP file part
(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.
DEBUG
BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.
15
OTHERS
BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed
16
9.1 Parts Display

9-8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999

When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, the parts registered by the GT
Designer2 will be displayed even if the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
parts in the memory card has been made.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
corresponding parts No. in the memory card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display the BMP/JPEG file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the memory
card while displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT
Designer2, operate as follows.
2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card to be
displayed.
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card from
the beginning when using the GS450.b8.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device:
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].
*1
At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP/JPEG image
parts. (Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
9-9
9.1 Parts Display

9
3 Parts No.
When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
parts in the memory card has not been made.
Parts registered by the
BMP/JPEG file parts in
GT Designer2
the memory card
GT Designer2
the memory card
Parts No.
*1
*1
1 to 8999
*1
9000
*2
: Displayable
: Not displayable
: Hidden
When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
(
Section 9.2.8
12
Basic tab (Word))
The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
The part registered by the GT Designer2

(parts No.9123) is displayed.
RECIPE
The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.
When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the

memory card has been made.
memory card has not been made.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
*2
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 10
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
ACTIONS
11
10000 to 32767
TRIGGER
9001 to 9999
10
GRAPH, METER
*1
PARTS
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
9.1.3
Arrangement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations

Click on
[Bit Parts Display]/
Select [Object]
[Parts Display]
[Word Parts Display]/
[Fixed Parts Display]
[Bit Parts]/[Word Parts]/[Fixed Parts] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged part to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference to
the following explanation.
Easy setting method


4
Remark
Part image displayed when the part is arranged.

(1) When parts are displayed
In the case of bit parts display
Parts of which status is set in ON/OFF attribute are displayed.
(
Basic
tab [ON/OFF Attribute])
In the case of word parts display

Parts of which part No. is set in [Preview No.] are displayed.
(
Basic
tab [Preview Parts]
(2) When base screen and window screen are displayed as parts
"X" mark indicating position is displayed.
9 - 11
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.3 Arrangement and settings
9.1.4
Setting items of bit parts display
PARTS
1 Basic tab (Bit)

In basic tab, the [Parts Type] and [Parts No.] during ON/OFF are set.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
Extended
Trigger
RECIPE
12
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
13
Device
Parts Type
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Select the type of part to be displayed.

Parts Data*1
The registered part is displayed.

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device change.
After selecting this item, set the [Parts No.].
Mark Data*1
14
The type of registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.

Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
Base Screen
Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen
Displays the registered window screen as part.
DEBUG
15
Select an image file to display the image file saved in memory card as a part.
After the selection, clicking the Setting button displays the Image File Setting dialog box.
OTHERS
Displays the full path of the specified image file.
16
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
9 - 12
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Image File*2
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.

XOR
:Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping

portion of the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
(
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Display
parts
Shape (Blue)
Replace
Switch
parts
Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2
:The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.

Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base Screen] or
[Window Screen].
Display Mode
Tab [Parts Type])
Basic
Display
parts
View
Switch
parts
Format
Shape
Overwrite
Parts
New parts
:Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display
parts
Shape
Switch
parts
Parts
New parts
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.
Positioning
Top-Left
:Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center
:Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Top-Left
Center
Set display position
Point
9 - 13
9.1 Parts Display

Extended
Object Script
Trigger
Items
Description
ON
Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns ON.
OFF
Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns OFF.
Model
PARTS
Basic
Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.

The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Parts No.
10
Set zero in "Parts No." to erase the part.

Set the [Parts No.] condition when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
GRAPH, METER
device bit is ON.

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts Type].
Mark Color
(
Basic
Tab [Parts Type])
Can specify image file No.

ON/OFF
11
The allowable range of the specification depends on [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
Attribute
to 9999
3 digits : 001
to 999
2 digits : 01
to 99
1 digit
to 9
:1
TRIGGER
4 digits : 0001
Image File No.
ACTIONS
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
If [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.

To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".
12
Select the blinking pattern of the parts.

Blink
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Middle
: Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High

RECIPE
No

13
(
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Layer
14
DEBUG
15
OTHERS
Object Name
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Category
*1 How to enable transparent setting of parts
When setting the transparent color to the image data set for [Parts Type], the transparent setting for [Parts
Type] is enabled.
The following shows how to enable the transparent setting of parts.
1 Set the transparent color to the image data.
(The transparent color can be set to image data in the BMP format only.)
2 Register the image data that the transparent color is set in the parts or library.
3 Set the part or library for [Parts Type] in the Parts Display screens.
4
For how to set the transparent color to the image data, refer to the following manual.
Figures)
9 - 15
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 11.1 Drawing
9.1 Parts Display

*2 Image File Setting
PARTS
Set an image file to be displayed.
GRAPH, METER
10
ACTIONS
11
Description
TRIGGER
Item
Display the full path of the specified image file.
Image file path
If "0" is set to the image file No., the path is not displayed.
12
Drive Name
Select a drive where an image file is to be stored.
Folder Name
Select a folder where an image file is to be stored.
File Name
Specify a part of image file name (head character except for image file No.).
Digits
RECIPE
Make setting so that the whole path can be within 78 characters.
Specify the number of digits (1 to 5) for [Imege File No.] to an image file.
Check the item for setting the transparent color to the specified image file.
The transparent color can be set to BMP files.
After checking the item, click the From Image button, and then the Open dialog box is displayed. Select the
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
file that the transparent color is set.
13
After selecting the file, the Transparent Setting dialog box is displayed and specify the area that the
transparent color is set.
14
DEBUG
Transparent
OTHERS
15
Transparent: Displays the set transparent color.
16
BG Color: Change background colors for the preview.

Click the preview, and then the color of the clicked part is specified as the transparent color.
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Preview: Displays the selected image file.
2 Extended tab (Bit)

Set the security and offset.
This tab will be displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
(
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
(
Offset
9 - 17
After checking, set the offset device.
9.1 Parts Display

Model
9
Set conditions for displaying the object.
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
PARTS
3 Trigger tab (Bit)
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
13
Items
Trigger Type
Description
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
(For GT10, [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [Range], and [Bit Trigger] cannot be set.)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Trigger Device
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
RECIPE
12
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
14
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.

(
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
Data Size
Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Data Type
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).

Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range
Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
DEBUG
Word
Range
Trigger
15
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for the
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
trigger. (
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
Trigger
OTHERS
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be displayed only
at the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not satisfied.
tab [Trigger Type])
16
When [ON], [OFF], [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to
be held even though the conditions are not satisfied.
Hold Display
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 18
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Initial Display
4 Object Script tab (Bit)

For details of settings made on the Object Script tab, refer to the following.
Secton16.3.6
(2) Object Script tab of display object scripts
(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object
property and the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name
Setting item
Extended
*1
Property name
Read
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)
1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
Section 16.3.2
9 - 19
Write*1
active
-
Basic
Object property
(2)(a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.5
Setting items of word parts display
PARTS
1 Basic tab (Word)

Here the parts type and parts No. displayed corresponding to word device value is set.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
13
Description
Set the device to be monitored. (
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
The default of a written data format is signed BIN.
Device
To write by the other data format, change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab.
(
Parts Type
Parts Data*1
Extended
tab [Data Type])
14

DEBUG

Base Screen
Window Screen
15
OTHERS
Image File*1
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.5 Setting items of word parts display
9 - 20
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Mark Data*1
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

XOR
:Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping

portion of the parts.
(
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Display
parts
Shape (Blue)
Replace
Switch
parts
Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2
:The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.

Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base Screen] or
[Window Screen].
Display Mode
tab [Parts Type])
Basic
Display
parts
View
Switch
parts
Format
Shape
Overwrite
Parts
New parts
:Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display
parts
Shape
Switch
parts
Parts
New parts

Top-Left
Center
Top-Left
Center
Positioning Point
9 - 21
9.1 Parts Display

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Set the display attribute of parts.
Indirect (Device value)
PARTS
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
:Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to
the word device value.
10
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.

Parts No.
:Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/window

GRAPH, METER
screen by specifying it.

Click the Browse button to check the registered parts/base screen/
window screen.
Mark Color
Attribute (Normal Case)*2
:At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the displayed color
11
(
Image File No.
Basic
ACTIONS
to change in the white area of the registered part.

tab [Parts Type])
:Can specify image file No.The allowable range of the specification

5 digits
TRIGGER
depends on [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialogbox.

: 00001 to 65535
4 digits
: 0001
3 digits
: 001
to 9999
to 999
2 digits
: 01
to 99
1 digit
:1
to 9
12
If [Image File No.] is set to "0", the parts are deleted.

Hold
:Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base screen/

RECIPE
window screen.
Preview Parts
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Blink
Displays the part of specified No. on the GT Designer2 screen.

Category
Layer
14
(
DEBUG
15

Secton9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
OTHERS
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 22
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Object Name
*2 Parts switching method

Set on State (Case tab) except "Indirect (Device value)" in "Attribute (Normal case)" category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
State setting
"Attribute (Normal
case)" type
Set
Not set
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition
Set the state if required.
set to the state.
The displayed part is changed depending on the

monitored device value.
When trigger is satisfied
[Indirect
The part set to the state is displayed.
(Device Value)]
Set the state to change the part except the above
When trigger is not satisfied
condition.
The displayed part is changed depending on the

monitored device value.
[Parts No.]
Set the state at any time.
set to the state.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate

settings.
It cannot be switched to any other part.
The part set at the state is displayed.

[Mark Color]

The part set at "Attribute (Normal case)" is displayed.
set to the state.
Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
[Hold]

The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When "Attribute (Normal case)" is set to "Parts No."

Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab
Range Setting tab
[Device]: D10
State 1
State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]
[Range] : 1<= D10 <= 100
[Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1]
[Attribute] : Parts No.2
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1
D10 = 0
D10 = 40
D10 = 150
Part set at "Attribute"

is displayed (Part No. 1).
Part set at State 1 is

displayed (Part No. 2).

Refer to the following section for details of the state.

Section 5.4 State Setting
9 - 23
Part No. 3
9.1 Parts Display

9
2 Extended tab (Word)
PARTS
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.

This tab is displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
RECIPE
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
13
Model
Data Type
Security
Signed BIN16
: Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN16
: Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD16
: Treats the word device value as a 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
(
14
15
OTHERS
DEBUG
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 24
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(
Offset
3 Case tab (Word)

The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
This tab will be displayed when the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
For details of states, refer to the following.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1
Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).

(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State
Creates a new state.
Delete State
Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next
Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down
Changes the priority of the current state.
Select State
Displays the list of preset states.

Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select the condition to change the display according to the state.
Bit
: Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
(
Device
Word
: Select it when changing the display according to the vlaue of word device. After
selecting, set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
(
Range
Case
tab [Range])
Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
9 - 25
9.1 Parts Display

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Select the display method of parts.

:Display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word
PARTS
Indirect (Device value)
device value.
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.
Parts No.
:Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/window
10
screen by specifying it.

After selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen to be
GRAPH, METER
displayed.
Mark Color
:When [Mark] selecting in [Parts Type], select this item to switch the
Image File No.
white of the parts to other color.
Attribute
11

: 00001 to 65535
4 digits
: 0001
3 digits
: 001
to 999
2 digits
: 01
to 99
1 digit
:1
to 9
ACTIONS
5 digits
to 9999
TRIGGER
State*1

Hold
:Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base screen/
12
window screen.
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 26
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Blink
RECIPE
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example:
Monitor device
Data view format
: D100
: Signed decimal, 16-bit signed decimal
Registered parts
Part No.1
Part No.10
1 set
10 sets
Part No.100 Part No.101

Over 100 sets Complete
Action priority for

setting overlap
State No.
Display range
Display parts
conditions
High
Low
$V<=0
No.0
1<=$V<=100
Indirect
101<=$V<=199
Hold
Normal case (State 0)
No.101
*$V indicates monitor device value
State 1
When monitor device value is equal to or less than 0 ($V
0),
the parts will not be displayed.
When monitor device value is between 1 and 100

State 2
(1
$V
100), the parts corresponding to device value will be
displayed.
1 set
Over 100 sets
When monitor device value is between 101 and 199

State 3
(101
Normal case
(State 0)
9 - 27
$V
199), parts display will not be switched.
Over 100 sets
In the case when other than the conditions of state 1 to 3, part

No. 101 will be displayed.
9.1 Parts Display

Complete
9
4 Trigger tab (Word)
PARTS
The setting items of the trigger tab are the same with bit parts display.
For details of setting items, refer to the following.
Section 9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 28
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
5 Data Operation tab (Word)

Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding "Extended Function" at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal
Bit Mask
in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
Bit
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
Operation
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.

Bit Shift
Data Operation
9 - 29
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
Select an operational expression format for data operation.
9.1 Parts Display

Model
9
6 Object script tab (Word)
For details of settings made on the object script tab, refer to the following
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Setting item
Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)
14
15

OTHERS
Section 16.3.2
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Tab name
13
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
9.1.6
Setting items of fixed parts display
1 Basic tab (Fixed)

Directly specify and set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Parts Type
Parts
Model

Data*1

Mark Data*1

Refer to the following for the displayed parts by Mark.
(
Base Screen
Window Screen
Image File*1
9 - 31
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.6 Setting items of fixed parts display
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

:The parts/base screen/window screen by XOR combination is overlaid on a figure or
PARTS
XOR
other part display.

The parts/base screen/window screen is erased at the disabled display condition.
(
10
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR )
When display condition

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)
GRAPH, METER
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)
Display Mode
Shape (Blue)
Overlapped part
changes to yellow.
Part No. 1
(White)
ACTIONS
11
Part is erased.
Overwrite
TRIGGER
XOR combination of figure

+ part No. 1 colors
:The parts/base screen/window screen is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
View
The parts/base screen/window screen is kept displaying without regarding to the
Format
display condition.
12
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)
RECIPE

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)
13
Parts
Part is kept displayed.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Shape

Top-Left
Center
Top-Left
Center
DEBUG
14
Positioning Point
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 32
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

Parts No.
:Select this item to display the parts/base screen/window screen and screen during
registration.
After the selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.
Mark Color :When the registered parts are [Mark] selected in [Parts Type], select the color to which
the white part of the parts will be switched.
(
Attribute
tab [Parts Type])
Basic
Image File No.

5 digits
: 00001 to 65535
4 digits
: 0001
3 digits
: 001
to 999
2 digits
: 01
to 99
1 digit
:1
to 9
to 9999

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No
Blink
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the trigger by which data is displayed.

Trigger Type
Display

Rise
Fall
Trigger
Device
Click on Dev... button to specify the device to be set as trigger.

(

Category
Layer
(
Object Name

Secton9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
9 - 33
9.1 Parts Display

9
2 Extended tab (Fixed)
PARTS
The setting items of the Extended tab are the same with bit parts display.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 34
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
3 Object script tab (Fixed)

Secton16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Extended
*1
Read
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
9 - 35
Write*1
active
-
Basic
Property name
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7
Precautions
The following provides the precautions when using parts display function.
PARTS

(1) Maximum number of objects that may be set on one screen
1000 objects can be set for the clock display.
10
GRAPH, METER
(2) Precautions for registering parts

Refer to the following for the precautions for registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
(b) When using BMP/JPEG file parts
(4) Setting of Parts Display/Parts Movement

Do not set the display position with which any part of the BMP/JPEG file part will be out of the
screen.
If such a display position is set, the part is displayed as follows.
Check the display position on the Preview.
(a) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the GOT
The part is not displayed.
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(3) Precautions for setting the parts to be inverted (XOR display)

(a) Inverting the parts to a figure
Set the parts on the back layer.
(b) Inverting overlapped parts
Only the parts of the "fixed" attribute can be overlapped.
Place all parts on the same layer.
If the parts are placed on the front layer, the area that are not overlapped will be inverted to
the "transparent color" of the screen.
(c) Inverting parts including characters
If the parts include the text with "bold," "solid" or "raised" text style set, the text may be chipped
or displayed in the incorrect color.
ACTIONS
11
14
DEBUG
The BMP/JPEG file part is not displayed.
(b) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the memory card
Only displayable portion is displayed.
OTHERS
15
The result of inverse (XOR display) can be viewed by using the preview function of GT Designer2.
For details of the layer, refer to the following.
Section 2.6.1 Superimposition using layers
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
9 - 36
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Only displayable portion is displayed.
(5) Precautions when parts overlap with other objects

Make sure to place parts so that they will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped objects may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, place the parts on the layer different from the other objects.
Also, note that the following cases may cause a similar problem.
When the "Parts type" is "Base screen"
When the "Parts type" is "Part"
Display area
The objects overlap

with parts display.
Display area
Part (Part No. 1 is displayed.)
Part (Base screen 10 is displayed.)
Part No. 1
Base screen 10
The objects overlap

with parts display.
(6) Precautions when screen is set as parts type and "XOR" is set as display mode
(a) If the base screen or window screen is set as a parts type of parts display (bit/word) and XOR
is set as display mode, this will delete the parts on the screen and display a new screen.
(b) The area to be deleted ranges from the drawing point (screen (center, upper left)) of the parts
display to the base/window screen.
(c) If the base/window screen area including objects is deleted, the objects are hidden.
To display the objects, change the parts type from screen to part and adjust the position to
avoid overlap with other objects, or leave the screen parts type and change the display mode
to "Overwrite."
However, if "Overwrite" is set, the previously displayed parts remain. Therefore, make sure to
adjust the parts so that they will be the same in size.
(d) If the target base screen or window screen includes objects with "bold," "solid" or "raised" text
style set, characters of the displayed part may be chipped or the character color may be
incorrect.

(1) Erasing parts
To erase the part, use "Parts" or "Mark" setting in "Parts Type" category.
The part set to "Base Screen" or "Window Screen" in "Parts Type" category is not erased even if
setting to zero.
(The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after switching to another screen.)
(
Basic
tab [Parts Type])
(2) Reading the BMP/JPEG file

The monitor screen pauses during a file reading.
(3) The partway-displayed BMP/JPEG file parts
In the process of a file displaying, the display may be paused with the image partway-displayed.
In such a case, display the parts again or check the BMP/JPEG file.
(4) While displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card
Do not remove the memory card from the GOT while displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
memory card.
9 - 37
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
11
TRIGGER
(6) The validating priority of settings between GT Designer2 and GS450.b8

The BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card will be displayed regardless of the GS450.b8 if the
[The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/Movement] is
checked.
ACTIONS
(5) Discontinuing to use the BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card
Perform either of the following operations.
Change the Auxiliary Setting of the GT Designer2 and then download the project data.
Turn the GOT internal device (GS450.b8) off.
The BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card can be displayed even if the memory card is removed
without the operation above. The reason is the below.
The BMP/JPEG file part displayed on the GOT is retained in the GOT built-in memory. (Only one
BMP/JPEG file part can be retained.)
If the BMP/JPEG file part of the same parts No. is specified subsequently, the BMP/JPEG file part
retained in the GOT built-in memory will be displayed. Accordingly, the part registered by the GT
Designer2 is not displayed.
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
9 - 38
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
9.2 Parts Movement
It is the function to change parts position and display (movement) according to the value of word device.
The parts to be displayed can be switched in movement.
Parts movement can be displayed by the following 2 types of devices.
Position device
: The device storing parts move destination.
Parts switching device : The device to switch the types of parts to be displayed.
Remark
Parts displayed by Parts movement

There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts movement. The
parts to be displayed by Parts movement needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by the GT Designer2 (registered parts)
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
1 Applicable parts types

Type
Description
Remarks
Parts must have been
The figures registered as parts are displayed.
registered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts

Registration
Parts
Section 4.3
Registering BMP/
Figures
Text
JPEG Files for Parts
BMP/JPEG file
in the Memory Card

The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the device
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
Draw the color-changed area

in white.
displayed by a single part.
White
BMP/JPEG format parts

cannot be used.
value.
Blue
Red
During parts movement

(fixed), color change
Mark
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
Only one color is used.
D100 = 0
D100 = 50
D100 = 100
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
9 - 39
9.2 Parts Movement
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
Key
window
For Parts movement, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to parts movement only

Relevant to parts movement only.
PARTS
9.2.1
(2) Functions relevant to parts movement and others

11
ACTIONS
(1) Functions relevant to parts movement only

Using/Not using the image files in the memory card
Setting for
each project
Whether to use the image files stored in the memory card for the objects of Parts Display/
Setting for
each screen
TRIGGER
Parts Movement can be specified.
<Not checked>
12
<Checked>
Setting items
card is used for the Parts Image
of Parts Display/Movement]
Displays the parts

registered in the GOT.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

RECIPE
[The image file in a memory
Section 2.9.1 GOT internal devices)
(2) Functions relevant to parts movement and others

Memory card image file display setting signal
(Write device: GS450.b8)
14
The image files in the memory card can be used for the objects of Parts Display/Parts
DEBUG
Movement.
15
OTHERS

9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 40
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
9.2.2
Moving and displaying parts
1 Move way of parts (control with position device)

The following three types of move ways can be selected.
(1) Position
Display parts at the position (dot notation).
Specify the display position using 2 points indicated by the word device values in X/Y axis,
respectively.
The display position can be changed in dot unit by changing the value of position device.
2) (200, 16)
1) (30, 90)
3) (130, 170)
Position device (X coordinate): D100
1)
30
2)
200
3)
130
Position device (Y coordinate): D101
90
16
170
(a) Datum position

A part displayed on the overlap window has the datum position at the upper left corner of the
overlap window.
Example: Overlap window
Datum position
(origin)
In other cases (base screen, superimpose window, etc.), the upper left corner of the displayed
base screen is taken as the datum position.
Example: Base screen
Example: Set overlay screen, superimpose window, etc.
Datum position
(origin)
9 - 41
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.2 Moving and displaying parts
Datum position
(origin)
<Movement image>
80%
10
Starting point (minimum: 0)
GRAPH, METER
20%
D100: 100
D100: 20
D100: 0
Position device: D100
(3) Point
Display parts at preset display position (point).
Point setting is made by registering a line connecting multiple points (parts move route).
Parts are displayed at the place indicated by the point No. that is the same as the value of position
device.
<Setting image>
1
<Movement image>
12
11
ACTIONS
Destination (maximum: 100)
TRIGGER
<Setting image>
PARTS
(2) Line
Move parts along lines between starting point and destination point that have been set.
Set the start point as minimum value, and the maximum value for the destination position, in order
to display the parts using this method.
Parts move route

Point
Position device: D100
RECIPE
13
Parts movement A
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Up to 30 Parts move routes can be set in one screen. This setting is made for each screen.
The parts move route can be used for moving multiple parts.
Route No. 1------For parts movement A
Parts movement B
Route No. 2------For parts movement B
14
Parts movement C
Parts movement D
Locus
15
Movement locus that keeps the locus can be set in each move way.
OTHERS
The setting of parts movement setting dialog box (basic tab)
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 42
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
DEBUG
Route No. 3------For parts movement C, D
2 Parts switching method (control with parts switching device)

The following 3 switching methods can be selected.
(1) Bit parts movement
Section 9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement)
Switches to display 2 types of parts.

(a) Switch different parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON
M10: OFF
(b) Displays/hides parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON
(2) Word parts movement
M10: OFF
Section 9.2.6 Setting items of word parts movement)
Switches to display more than 3 types of parts.

(a) Switch to display parts of which parts No. is the same as the word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
D10
D10
D10
D10
(b) Switch parts type according to the range and condition of word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
[Display condition]
1) 50 D10 100
Part No.1
2) D10 < 100
Part No.2
1) D10
2) D10 250
3) D10
3) Parts No.0 (not displayed) at

normal case (other than above
conditions)
(3) Fixed part movement
Section 9.2.7 Setting items of fixed parts movement)
Only one type of parts is displayed.

Parts switching device is not set.
[Parts switching
word device]
: need not to be set
9 - 43
9.2 Parts Movement

9
3 Parts movement example
Execute parts movement display by position device and parts switching device.
Point1
Point2
Part No. 50
Point3
PARTS
2) [Parts switching device] : D15

[Switching way] : Parts movement
1) [Position device] : D10

[Move way] : [Point]
10
Part No. 100 :
Move to point2
Changes into the parts

of part No. 100
GRAPH, METER
Part No. 150 :

Changes into the parts
of part No. 150
Move to point3
1) [Position device]
: D10
2) [Parts switching
device] : D15
50
50
100
150
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
4 The setting order of parts movement

RECIPE
When setting the object of parts movement, select parts switching way, then parts move way.
1 Select parts switching way
Section 9.2.4 Arrangement and setting)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
The switching method cannot be changed after setting the object of parts movement.
2 Select parts move way
Set in the dialog box that is displayed after selecting parts switching way.
The move method can be changed even after setting the object of parts movement.
When "Point" is specified to the type for the parts movement (

Basic
tab)
Make sure to set parts move route in advance before setting object of parts
movement.
Section 9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
15
OTHERS
14
DEBUG
on
"Movement Type"
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 44
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Select from the menu. (
Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card

BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.
(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)
(a) When using BMP/JPEG file part in memory card
In each object setting of Parts Display/Parts Movement, specify the BMP/JPEG file stored in
the memory card for display.
1 Store BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as a part in the memory card.
For storage method, refer to the following.
2 After the display triggers of the part are met in Parts Display/Parts Movement, the BMP/JPEG
file part in specified memory card is displayed.
Set the following items in the Basic tab and Case tab (only for word) of the Parts Display/Parts
Movement for use.
Image File Setting
Image File No. setting
(2) Display method in units of projects
The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a number from
9001 to 9999 for the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make
the setting in the following procedure.
(a) To ordinarily select a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card
The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed ordinarily when a parts No. of
9001 to 9999 is specified.
9 - 45
9.2 Parts Movement


PARTS

2 Check [The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/
Movement] of the Auxiliary Setting, and then download the setting to the GOT.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Check!
12
RECIPE
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 46
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(b) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card by using the GS450.b8
The displaying of the parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be switched to displaying of the
BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card when a parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.
Parts No.
9001 to 9999
When GS450.b8 is ON
When GS450.b8 is OFF
The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is
The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is
displayed.
displayed.

(3) Display example (display method in units of projects)
The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the memory card
is shown below.
IMG0001.BMP
IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display: D100
D100
9000
When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.
9 - 47
D100
9001
BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed
9.2 Parts Movement

D100
9500
BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.
D100
9999
BMP file part

(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.

2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999

When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, the parts registered by the GT
Designer2 will be displayed even if the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
corresponding parts No. in the memory card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display the BMP/JPEG file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the memory
card while displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT
Designer2, operate as follows.
PARTS
Make setting on the status monitor.

Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].
TRIGGER
12
RECIPE
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card from
the beginning when using the GS450.b8.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device:
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card to be
displayed.
ACTIONS
11
At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP/JPEG image
parts. (Switch the screen change parts.)
15
OTHERS
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 48
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
DEBUG
14
6 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
parts in the memory card has not been made.
GT Designer2
the memory card
GT Designer2
the memory card
Parts No.
*1
*1
*1
1 to 8999
*1
9000
*2
9001 to 9999
10000 to 32767
: Displayable
*1
: Not displayable
: Hidden
When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
(
*2
Section 9.2.6
Basic tab (word))
The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.

memory card has been made.
9 - 49
9.2 Parts Movement

The part registered by the GT Designer2

(parts No.9123) is displayed.

memory card has not been made.
Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
When "Point" is specified the type for the parts movement (

"Movement Type*2" on
the Parts Move Route for positions where parts are to be displayed.
Up to 30 parts move routes can be set in one screen
The parts move route can be used for multiple parts movement.
Basic
tab), set
PARTS
9.2.3
GRAPH, METER
10
[Parts Movement]
[Parts Move Route] from the menu.
2 After parts move route dialog box appears, make the following settings and click on the OK button.
TRIGGER
1 Select [Object]
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
Description
Set route No. (0 to 29) of parts move route to be created.
Points
Set points (1 to 100) movement position (position to display parts).

Check this item to move parts in a line.
When arranging in a line, points proportion set in [Points] will be arranged automatically according to the
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Items
Route No.
14
setting of starting point and destination.
Example: Points: Set to 5

Arrange in a line
5
DEBUG
Set the start point and destination point

(2 to 4: automatic arrangement)
OTHERS
15
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
9 - 50
SCRIPT FUNCTION
3 As the mark (+) will appear on drawing screen, click on the mark to arrange Point 1.
Click on the positions as many as the number of set points for arrangement.
Click
Click
4 Point No. will appear at the set position after setting.
Remark
The correction of parts move route

(1) Change the point position
Click to select parts move route, right click on the route to [Edit Point]
The route is now in "Edit Vertex" mode. Drag a point of the selected route to
the destination position. Thus, the point position can be changed.
Vertex mode.
Edit vertex mode
Drag to change point position
(2) Change the [Points] and [Route No.]

Double click on the parts move route to display the setting dialog box.
Then change the [Points] and [Route No.] in the corresponding items.
9 - 51
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
9.2.4
Arrangement and setting
[Fixed Parts Movement.].
10
2 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
When changing the settings of parts movement

Parts movement cannot be arranged on screen when movement type is [Position],
[Point].
[Movement Type*2] within
Basic
tab.
Carry out the following method when changing the settings of the preset parts
movement.
(1) Edit using data view
Double click on the parts movement displayed in data view to display the setting
dialog box.
GRAPH, METER
[Word Parts Movement] /
[Bit Parts] / [Word Parts] / [Fixed Parts] from menu.
11
ACTIONS
[Parts Movement]
TRIGGER
[Bit Parts Movement] /
Select [Object]
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.4 Arrangement and setting
9 - 52
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Click on
PARTS
1 Carry out any of the following operations
9.2.5
Setting items of bit parts movement
1 Basic tab (bit)

Set the parts move way and the parts to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.

With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
(

Example:
Parts Switching Device
Parts Type
X10: ON
X10: OFF
Display part No.1
Display part No.10
Select the part to be moved.

Parts Data*1
Displays the registered part

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts switching
device change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark. The registered part can be checked by
Mark Data*1
clicking on Browse button.

(
Image File*1
9 - 53
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.

PARTS
Movement : Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the
screen.
Locus
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:
10
GRAPH, METER
When selecting [Movement]
Display Mode
Erase the previous display
The previous display
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
When selecting [Locus]
12
Select the base point to display the part.
View
Top-left
: Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
Device for X coordinate
13
Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left
Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Point
Destination
Starting
point
14
Destination
Starting
point
Top-left
Center
DEBUG
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
15
1
Top-left
Center
OTHERS
Positioning
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Device
for Y
coordinate
RECIPE
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 54
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Format
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Trigger
Items
Description
Model
ON
Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns ON
OFF
Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns OFF
Parts No.
Set the pat No. to be displayed.

The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
(Set the part No. when the device is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the device is ON.)
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts Type].
Mark Color
[Parts Type] within
tab
Basic
Can specify image file No.

The allowable range of the specification depends on [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
ON/OFF
Attribute
Image File
No.
5 digits
: 00001 to 65535
4 digits
: 0001
to 9999
3 digits
: 001
to 999
2 digits
: 01
to 99
1 digit
:1
to 9
If [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.

To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".
No
Blink
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the move way.

Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
(
Move Way
Line *3
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
Point
Movement
: Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
Type*2
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
(
Section 9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen))
After selecting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
(
Device
The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position
: Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point
Data Type
: Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device (signed BIN16/unsigned
BIN16). (Fixed to unsigned BIN16 when selecting [Position], [Point])
9 - 55
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
9
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Category
PARTS

10
Layer
GRAPH, METER
Object Name
11
ACTIONS

TRIGGER
*2 Movement Type
Select the movement type when moving parts.
Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
Section 9.2.2
12
Move way of parts (control with position device)
RECIPE
*3 Line
Set the line as the parts move range when the move way is set as [Line].
Execute the following operations after making settings in the setting dialog box.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1 Click on the start position in drawing screen.
14
DEBUG
2 Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 56
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2 Extended tab (bit)

It is to set the security and offset.
Check the "Extended Function" at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
(
Offset
9 - 57

9.2 Parts Movement

Model
9
dialog box.
PARTS
3 Trigger tab (bit)
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Extended
Trigger
13
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic

Trigger Type
Trigger Device

Ordinary
NO
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
14

Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Select the [Data Type] of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
DEBUG
Word
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
15
trigger.
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers
[Trigger Type] within
Trigger
tab
Trigger
OTHERS
at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
tab
When [ON], [OFF] ,[Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to
Hold Display
16
be held even though the trigger is not satisfied.

Trigger
tab
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 58
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Initial Display
4 Object script tab (Bit)

Secton16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Extended
*1
Read
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
9 - 59
Write*1
active
-
Basic
Property name
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.6
Setting items of word parts movement
Set move way of parts, the parts type and Parts No. to be displayed according to word device value.
PARTS
1 Basic tab (word)
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed. (
Model
RECIPE
12
13
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
The default of a written data format is signed BIN. To write by the other data format, change the setting in
"Data Form" on the Extended tab.
[ Data Type] within
Parts Switching Device
tab
Example:
D10: 1
D10: 2
D10: 3
Display part No.1
Display part No.2
Display part No.3
14

*1
Parts Data
DEBUG
Parts Type
Extended

Changes the white part of the part into the different color
15
according to the parts switching device change.

After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark.
Mark Data*1
The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.

OTHERS
Image File*1
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.6 Setting items of word parts movement
9 - 60
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

screen.
Locus
Example:
Display Mode
View
Top-left
: Displays the part with the reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with the reference to the center of that part.
Example:
Format
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)
Device
for Y
coordinate
Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left
Positioning
Center
Point
Destination
Starting
point
Destination
Starting
point
Top-left
Center
Top-left
Center
9 - 61
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Indirect [Device Value]
PARTS
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
: Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to
the word device value.
10
The current display is hold at setting 0 (setting 0 or 9000 when

specifying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card) in the parts
switching device.
case tab) :
GRAPH, METER
When clearing parts, make the following settings (

Set "$V==0" in [Rande] within case tab.
Set "Parts No.: 0" in [Attribute]
Example:
11
Display the parts

with parts No. 100
Parts No.
Monitor device value
: Select this time to specify and display the registered part.
TRIGGER
Attribute (Normal Case)*4
ACTIONS
D200: 100
After this, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.

Set 0 in Parts No. to erase the part.
Mark Color
: At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the displayed
12
color to change in the white area of the registered part.

[Parts Type] within
Image File No.
Basic
tab
: Can specify image file No.

The allowable range of the specification depends on [Digits] in the
RECIPE
Image File Setting dialog box.

5 digits : 00001 to 65535
to 9999
3 digits : 001
to 999
2 digits : 01
to 99
1 digit
to 9
:1
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
4 digits : 0001

: Select this item to hold current parts display.
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
14
DEBUG
No
15
OTHERS
Blink
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 62
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Hold
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the move way.
Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word devicevalues as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
(
Move Way
Line *3
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
Point
Movement
Type *2
(

The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position

Device

Line
*3
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and ending
point.
Point
Data Type
Category
Layer
(
Object Name

9 - 63
9.2 Parts Movement

Model
*2 Movement Type
PARTS
Section 9.2
*3 Line
10
GRAPH, METER
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 64
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
*4 Parts switching method

Set on State (Case tab) except "Indirect (Device value)" in "Attribute (Normal case)" category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
"Attribute
State setting
(Normal case)"
Set
type
[Indirect
(Device Value)]
Not set
Set the state if required.
set to the state.
The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
switching device value.

Set the state to change the part except the above condition.
The part set to the state is displayed.

The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
switching device value.
[Parts No.]
set to the state.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate settings.
It cannot be switched to any other part.

[Mark Color]

The part set at "Attribute (Normal case)" is displayed.
set to the state.
Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
[Hold]

The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When "Attribute (Normal case)" is set to "Parts No."

Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab
Range Setting tab
[Parts Switcing Device]: D10
State 1
State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]
[Range] : 1 <= D10 <= 100
[Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1]
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1
D10 = 0
Part set at "Attribute"

is displayed (Part No. 1).
D10 = 40

Refer to the following section for details of the state.

9 - 65
9.2 Parts Movement

Part No. 3
D10 = 150

9
2 Extended tab (word)
PARTS
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.

Check "Extended Function" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
RECIPE
Basic
Select the data type of the parts switching dvice.

: Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN 16
: Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD 16
: Treats word device value as 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Data Type
Signed BIN 16
This setting item is not available for the following devices.

Position device
Device set in ,
([Movement Type] within

Basic
Trigger
tab)
tab
([Trigger Type] within Trigger tab)
Security
14
(
DEBUG

15
OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 66
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
3 Case tab (word)

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Select the display change conditions according to state.
Bit
: Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
Device
(
Word
: Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device. After
selecting, set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
Range
9 - 67
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Select the method of displaying parts.

: Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to the
PARTS
Indirect (Device Value)
word device value.

The current display is hold at setting zero in the parts switching
device.
10
The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after switching

to another screen.
: Select this time to specify and display the registered part.
GRAPH, METER
Parts No.
After selection, set the displayed parts No.

Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
Mark Color
: Select this item to change the white part of the registered part into the
different color when the part is set to [Mark Data] in [Parts Type].
Image File No.
[Parts Type] within
Basic
11
tab)
ACTIONS
Attribute
: Can specify image file No.

The allowable range of the specification depends on [Digits] in the
State*1
TRIGGER
Image File Setting dialog box.

5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001
to 9999
3 digits : 001
to 999
2 digits : 01
to 99
1 digit
to 9
:1
12

: Select this item to hold current parts
RECIPE
display even though state condition is satisfied.

: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
No
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Blink
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 68
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Hold
*1 State
Example: Parts switching device
Data view format
Registered parts
: D100
: Signed decimal 16-bit signed decimal
:
Parts No. 1
Parts No. 10 Parts No. 11 Parts No. 12
The operation
priority for setting
State No.
Display range
Display parts
overlap conditions.
High
M10 ON
No.11
1<=$V<=9
Indirect
10<=$V
Hold
--------
No.12
Normal Case
Low
(State 0)
*$V indicates the value of monitor device.
State 1
Display parts No.11 when M10 is ON.
Display the parts corresponding to parts switching

State 2
device value when the value is between 1 and 9

(1<=$V<=9).
State 3
Normal Case
(State 0)
9 - 69
Do not switch parts display when parts switching

device value is 10 or greater (10<=$V).
Display parts No.12 in the condition other than state

1 to 3.
9.2 Parts Movement

9
4 Trigger tab (word)
PARTS
The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Section 9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 70
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
5 Data Operation tab (word)

dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
9 - 71
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
9.2 Parts Movement

Model
9
6 Object script tab (Word)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)
14
15
Section 16.3.2
OTHERS
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 72
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
13
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
9.2.7
Setting items of fixed parts movement
1 Basic tab (fixed)

Directly specify and set the parts move way as well as the parts to be display.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Parts Type
Model

Parts Data*1
Mark Data*1
Changes the white part of the part into the color set in [Mark Color].
Image
File*1
After the selection, clicking the Setting
button displays the Image File Setting dialog box.
9 - 73
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.7 Setting items of fixed parts movement
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

PARTS
screen.
Locus
Example:
10
GRAPH, METER
Display Mode
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
12
View
Top-left
: Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
Format
13
Top-left
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Device
for Y
coordinate
Device
for Y
coordinate
Center
Point
Destination
Starting
point
Destination
Starting
point
14
Center
Top-left
Top-left
15
Center

OTHERS
DEBUG
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 74
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Positioning
RECIPE
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Trigger
Items
Description
Model

Parts No.
: Select this item to display parts in registration.

Set the parts No. to be displayed after the selection.
Click on Browse button to specify the registered parts.
Mark Color : Select the color to change from white color of the registered part when the part is set
to
[Mark Data] in [Parts Type].
mark-selecting registered parts in [Parts Type].

(
Attribute
[ Parts Type] within
Basic
tab)
Image File No.:Can specify image file No.

The allowable range of the specification depends on [Digits] in the Image File Setting
dialog box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001
to 9999
3 digits : 001
to 999
2 digits : 01
to 99
1 digit
to 9
:1

No
Blink
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the movement type.

Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinator points respectively.
(
Move Way
Line
*3
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which\ starting point and end
Point
Movement
Type*2
(
The setting items differ according to the setting made in [Move Way].
Position
Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point
Device
Data Type
9 - 75
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
9
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Category
PARTS

10
Layer
GRAPH, METER
Object Name
11
ACTIONS

TRIGGER
*2 Movement Type
12
Section 9.2.2

RECIPE
*3 Line
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
14
DEBUG
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 76
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2 Extended tab (fixed)

The setting items of extended tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
3 Trigger tab (fixed)

The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
9 - 77
9.2 Parts Movement

9
4 Object script tab (Fixed)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

12

Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)
14

Section 16.3.2
15
OTHERS
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 78
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
13
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
RECIPE
9.2.8
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using parts movement function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on a screen
Up to 100 parts movement objects can be placed (set).
(2) Display position of parts

If the display position of parts out of screen is set in Designer2, parts will not be movementdisplayed. The previous display will be held.
Example: In the case of movement type [Point]
Parts out of the screen will not be displayed.
(3) Registering parts

Refer to the following for the cautions for registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
(b) When using BMP/JPEG file parts
(4) Precautions when parts overlap with other objects

Make the settings so that the part destination position will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped object may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, set the moving part on a layer different from the other object.
When the "Move way" is "Point"
Display area
The object overlap with
the part destination position.
Part movement (Part No. 1 is displayed.)

Part No.1

(1) The value stored in position device
If the value stored in position device exceeding the display range (position, out of the range of
maximum to minimum, point No.), parts will not be movement-displayed. The previous display will
be held.
9 - 79
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.8 Precautions
10. GRAPH, METER
10.1 Panelmeter
This function enables meter display (needle display) of the word device value relative to the preset upper/
lower limit value.
D100 = 1000
D100 = 2000
10
0
Ammeter
D100 = 3000
10
10
20
Ammeter
20
Ammeter
20

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For panelmeter, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to panelmeter and others
(1) Functions relevant to panelmeter and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
10 - 1
10.1 Panelmeter

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
PARTS
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
3)
1)
1)

10
GRAPH, METER
Designer2]
10.1.2 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting

Panelmeter setting method
11
ACTIONS
Basic functions of the panelmeter are set on the following tabs of

to
.
The following example is used to explain the general procedure for the panelmeter setting.
20
Scale value
Indicates current input range.
RECIPE
Ammeter
12
Conversion value
Monitors the value of D10.
10
TRIGGER
Example: Panelmeter that indicates analog/digital conversion value for 12mA

Current input range : 0 to 20mA
Digital output range : 0 to 4000
Conversion value : D10
4000
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Upper/lower limit
Sets digital output range.
1 Basic tab
Set the meter type, needle color, shape, i.e., frame and upper/lower limit.
Figure frame
14
Monitored device (D10)

Direction (Clockwise)
Needle color
DEBUG
Meter frame (top)

0
4000
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 4000, Lower limit: 0)
15
If the monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit value, the graph shows it
as the upper/lower limit value.
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 4000
D10: -50
16
D10: 4200
10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.2 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting
OTHERS
Display of value exceeding upper/lower limit
10 - 2
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
2 Scale/Text tab
Sets the scale and name plate (text) for the panelmeter.
0
-100
Scale (Scale points: 5)
Ammeter
100
4000
Scale display (Scale points: 3)

: Default value displayed.
Text (Inputs directly)
3 Extended tab
Changes the scale values and the data type of the monitored device.
10
Data type of monitored device
0
Ammeter
20
The value of scale value

(Lower limit: 0, Upper limit: 20)
4000

Click on
[Panelmeter].
Select [Object]
[Panelmeter] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the panelmeter is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged panelmeter to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape frame
10 - 3
10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.4 Setting items
PARTS
1 Basic tab
Set the type and view format (upper/lower limit value, display frame) for the panelmeter.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
(Example: Setting screen for GT10)
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the device to be monitored. (
Device
Device
13
Model
The device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary value)" as a default.
14
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.

Data Size
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(Example: Setting screen for GT15)
Select a data size (16bit/32bit) for the word device.

Select the panelmeter type.
Bottom
Left
Right
Top-left
Top-right
Bottom
Left
Right
Full circle
DEBUG
Top
Type
Bottom-left Bottom-right Top
15
View
Format
OTHERS
When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position where
device lower limit value is displayed) for the meter needle.
90
0
16
180
270
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 4
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Base Point
Basic
Scale/Text
Case
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Select the direction of the needle will move according to the monitor device value.
Direction
The base point of the panelmeter changes depending on the direction.

Clockwise
: Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise
: Counterclockwise rotation
Select the type of panelmeter display.

After the selection, click the Color button and set the needle and fill color.
Meter
Needle
Fill
Needle and Fill
Attribute*1
Needle Color*2
Set the needle color of the panelmeter.
Meter frame
Check this item to display the meter frame.

Meter Frame
Line width of the frame is fixed to 1 dot, and the color fixed to
white.
Check this item to color the meter panel face.
View
Format
Meter panel
After the check, click the button and select the panel color.
Meter Panel*1
(For GT10, after checking, set the panel color of the

panelmeter.)
This item can be set only with [Meter Frame].
Core
Check this item for core display.
Core*1
After the check, click the Color button to set the core color.
Specify the dots for the core display.

Radius
Radius
This can be specified within the range from 1 to object radius 1 dot.
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by fixed
Upper Limit
values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Sets the fixed values.
Device
: Sets the device values.

(
Lower Limit
The setting range of the upper and lower limit is specified by the data type of the monitored device.
(
Section 5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT)
Preset the data type of the device. (
Extended
tab)

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate
Frame
Needle color
Plate

10 - 5
10.1 Panelmeter
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

PARTS
Category
10
(
GRAPH, METER
Layer
Object Name
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
*1 Meter Color Setting
RECIPE
12
Items
Needle Color
Needle/
Fill Color
Fill
Attribute
BG Color
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Description
Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.
14
Pattern + Fill Color

(Example) BG Color :
Pattern :
Fill Color :
BG Color
DEBUG
Pattern
Meter Panel Attribute
Fill Color
Sets the display attribute of meter panel.
BG Color
This can be set only when [Meter Panel] is selected in the Basic tab.
15
Pattern
Fill Color
Sets the display attribute of core.
BG Color
This can be set only when [Core] is selected in the Basic tab.
OTHERS
Core Attribute
Pattern
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 6
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2 Scale/Text tab
Set the details of the panelmeter (scale upper/lower limit) and the text to be displayed at the center or
on the top, bottom, left or right.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale value to the panelmeter.
0
Scale Style
-100
100
Scale value
(Value number: 3)
Scale
(Scale points: 5)
-100
100
Scale in combination
scale value
Check this item to display the scale.

Scale
After checking, set the number of scale points (2 to101) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (2 to 101) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
The default numeric values are set within the range -100 to 100.
Select a numeric font.
The applicable numeric size depends on the selected font.
(For GT10, [12dot Standard] cannot be selected.)
Scale Value
6 x 8dot
: 1 0.5(Fixed)
12-dot Standard
: 1 1 to 8 8
16-dot Standard
: 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

(
When changing the numeric value, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
extended tab.
10 - 7
10.1 Panelmeter
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Items
Text
Object Script
Data Operation
Description
Model
Select a color for the text to be displayed.
12-dot high quality Mincho
12-dot standard font
12-dot high quality Gothic

TrueType Mincho
16-dot standard font
TrueType Gothic
Stroke
Windows
10
font

(
GRAPH, METER
Size
6 x 8dot font
PARTS
Select a font.
Font
Select an effect (Italic/Underline/Both).

Effects
Select Position
to Edit Text
Select a character set available for the specified font. (
Section 2.2
11
Selectable attributes)
This selects the display position of text.

Five patterns of text can be displayed simultaneously.
The following positions (A to E) can be set by the combined use of Select Position to Edit Text (Center/
Horizontal
Top/Bottom/Left/Right) and Horizontal/Vertical Alignment.
Alignment
Select Position to Edit Text

A: Center
B: Up
C: Bottom
D: Left
E: Right
Alignment
B
A
A
A
C
B
AE
AE
AE
C
12
RECIPE
Vertical
B
DA
DA
DA
C
Text
object frame.
Text
Frame
Text
Distance from
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and the
13
Up to 100 dots can be set.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Text
Input the text to be displayed on the panelmeter. (Up to 32 characters)

Text
key to input a new line at the end of the first line.
14
DEBUG
Press the Enter
15
OTHERS
Text
Standard Italic Underline Both
TRIGGER
Script
2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)
ACTIONS
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
3 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset values, data type of the monitor device and upper/lower limit of scale value.
(Setting screen for GT15)

Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real
: Treats word device value as floating point type real number.

(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.

Example: Change the lower limit value.
Upper
Changes automatically
50
Scale
Value
-100
100
100
Lower
Lower limit change of scale value

-100 0
Security
(
10 - 9
10.1 Panelmeter
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

Japan
PARTS
: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
10
China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.
GRAPH, METER
Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"

KANJI Region
Japan
China (GB) -Mincho
This setting is available when any of the following fonts is selected.

16-dot standard
12-dot standard
Scale/Text
11
ACTIONS
12-dot standard
Font)
12
RECIPE
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 10
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(
Offset
TRIGGER
4 Case tab
Set the change properties of the panelmeter needle color according to the device state.
For details of state, refer to the following.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Needle/
Fill

Range
Needle Color
Select the needle color that is displayed corresponding to the set condition.
Needle Color
Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.
Pattern + Fill Color
Fill Color
BG Color
(Example) BG Color :
Pattern :
Fill Color :
Attribute
Pattern
BG Color
10 - 11
10.1 Panelmeter
Model
*1 State
PARTS
10
Example: Monitored Device: D100

State No.
Display range
Needle Color
21<=$V<=60
Yellow
$V<=20
Red
GRAPH, METER
Operation priority
for setting overlap
condition
Normal case
Low
11
ACTIONS
High
Blue
(State 0)
TRIGGER
* $V indicates the monitored device value.

When the device value is between 21 and 60
(21 $V 60), the needle color will be yellow.
25
50
75
State 1
12
100
When the device value is 20 or below

($V 20), the needle color will be red.
25
50
75
RECIPE
State 2
100
When the condition is other than state 1,2 the needle

color will be blue.
25
Normal case
0
75
100
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 12
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(State 0)
50
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
5 Data operation tab

dialog box.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 13
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.1 Panelmeter
Model
9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
14
width
graph_color
3)
Meter Panel
back_color
4)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
4)
Pattern of Meter Panel
pattern
4)
BG Color of Meter Panel
pattern_bg_color
4)
Fill Color
fill_color
3)
BG Color of Fill
fill_bg_color
3)
Pattern of Fill
fill_pattern
3)
Core color
core_color
4)
10.1 Panelmeter
OTHERS
15
16
10 - 14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Needle Color
DEBUG
height
Setting dialog box

Tab name
Setting item
Basic
Extended
*1
Object property
Property name
Read
BG Color of Core
core_bg_color
4)
Core pattern
core_pattern
4)
Security
security
4)
Upper
scale_max[0]
4)
Lower
scale_min[0]
4)

Section 16.3.2
10.1.5 Precautions
The following is the precautions for using the panelmeter function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be arranged (set) for one screen
1000 objects can be set for the panelmeter.
10 - 15
10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.5 Precautions
Write*1
PARTS
10.2 Level
This function is used to fill the specified range (level) equivalent to the device value, corresponding to the to
the percentage of the difference between the upper/lower limit values.
With this function, the device value can be shown as a level in any closed figure.
11
ACTIONS
100
75
50
25
0
TRIGGER
100
75
50
25
0
D100=100
Example:
When combined with the comment display function
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input

Numerical
display
Section 7.5 Comment Display

Comment
display
Decrease
Level
Level
D100=25
D100=50
Text of comment display is changed according to
level, and displayed in XOR-combined color.
Refer to the following for setting details.
Section 10.2.4
State*1
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
D100=25
D100=50
Numeric value is displayed in the XOR-combined color.
12
RECIPE
When combined with the numerical display function
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
100
75
50
25
0
D100=50
16
10.2 Level
10 - 16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D100=0
GRAPH, METER
10

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For Level, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to Level and others
(1) Functions relevant to Level and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)

Designer2]
10 - 17
10.2 Level
A level object can be overlapped with figures and numerical/comment display objects.
The following example explains how to make the settings for overlapping a level object with figures and
numerical display objects.
Example: Level for tank Injection volume
Tank capacity : 0 to 500 liter
Injection volume: D10
Injection rate : 0 to 100%
Numerical display
50
100
50
50
Displayed in XOR-combined
color according to level.
11
Figure, scale
100
Level is displayed within

figure frame.
Draw scale if required.
50
GRAPH, METER
500
10
ACTIONS
Set by combining multiple

objects and figures.
PARTS
10.2.2 Required knowledge for level setting
TRIGGER
Level
Set level range according
to figure frame.
12
RECIPE
Injection volume
D10 value is monitored.
Upper/lower limit
Set tank capacity.
13
1 Setting figure, scale and numerical display
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Make the settings for figure, scale and numerical display before arranging the "level" object.
Scale
14
Figure
Draw the figure that overlaps with level object as shown below.
Use the boundary color (
Section 10.2.4
Basic tab)
Draw the figure in enclosed shape.
Example} Figure drawn for level display
Drawn by vertex,
circular or oval figure
DEBUG
Drawn by line
The figure in
different color from
the boundary color
is filled.
Level frame
If the figure is
of the enclosed
type, the level
display is used.
15
Level frame
OTHERS
50
Numerical display
Set the numerical value to be XOR-reversed.
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
16
10.2 Level
10 - 18
SCRIPT FUNCTION
100
2 Level and figure overlapped

100
Figure
Numerical display
50
Level
Figure and numerical object must be enclosed within the "level" frame.
Arrange level frame and figure to the same length.
If the length of level and figure are different, the value different with actual one is displayed.
[When length is the same]

Level frame
[When length is different]

Upper limit: 100
Level frame
D10: 80
Upper limit: 100

D10: 80
Direction
Lower limit: 0
Direction
Lower limit: 0
Completely filled.
80% filled.
3 Basic Tab
Set the direction, boundary color and upper/lower limit of level.
500 100
50
0
Direction (Up)
Monitor device (D10)
Boundary color (set to the same color as shape)
Upper/Lower limit (upper limit: 500, lower limit: 0)
Remark
Display the value out of the upper/lower limit

When the monitor device value exceeds upper limit, it will be displayed as the new
upper limit. When falling below lower limit, it will not be displayed.
Upper limit: 500
Lower limit: 0
D10:-100
10 - 19
10.2 Level
D10:600
PARTS
1 To enable level display inside a figure, draw a figure for the level display.
10
[Level Graph].
[Level] from the menu.
3 Click on the level arrangement position to arrange the level.

4 To display the level within a figure, adjust the dotted frame in order that it will fit the figure.
If the internal position mark (
display has been arranged.
GRAPH, METER
Select [Object]
11
)is overlapped with the figure and then reversed, this means the level
ACTIONS
Click on
TRIGGER
Level
Inter. pos.
mark data
12
Figure
RECIPE
5 Adjust the dotted line of level display in order that it will fit the outline of the figure.
6 Double click on the arranged level object to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Easy setting method
DEBUG

15
OTHERS

When internal position mark (
16
) are not overlapped with the figure
When internal position marks are not overlapped with the figure, move the internal
position mark according to the following procedure.
The level display is not applicable to the figure that is not overlapped with internal
10.2 Level
10 - 20
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
position mark.
When level display is valid
When level display is invalid
Figure of
level
Frame for
level display
area
1 Right-click the dotted frame for the level display, and then click
[Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Internal position mark data change from
2 Drag the internal position mark in order it will overlap with the figure.
Figure is reversed and
level display is valid.
10 - 21
10.2 Level
to
PARTS
1 Basic tab
Set the upper/lower limit and display attribute (color, direction) for monitor device and level.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
RECIPE
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Script
Object
Items
13
Description
Model
Device
Device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Set the device to be monitored.

The device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary value)" as a default.
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.
Data Size
14
Set the frame line color of the figure for level display.
Boundary Color
The level without the frame line is not displayed inside of the figure.
Example 1: When the boundary color isExample 2) When the boundary color differs
the same as the figure frame line colorfrom the figure frame line color
15
Format
Shape of level object
Figure
Shape of level object
OTHERS
Figure
Level display is validLevel display is invalid

Level Color
Select filling color for level display.
10.2 Level
10 - 22
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
View
DEBUG
Line of figure
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Script
Object
Items
Description
Level Pattern
Model
Select the pattern and background color for level display.

The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color

Example: Pattern Background :
Pattern
Background
Color
Level Pattern
Level color
Pattern Background
Select the direction the color changes when the monitor device value increases.
View
Format
[Right]
[Left]
[Up]
[Down]
Direction
Select whether the device value range (upper/lower limit) for level display is displayed based on the
Upper Limit
setting by fixed values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.

(
Lower Limit
The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set the
data format in advance.
Category
Layer
(
Object Name
10 - 23
10.2 Level
9
2 Extended tab
PARTS
Set the security and offset.

Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
13
Description
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Extended
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real
14
Security
(
15
OTHERS
Offset
DEBUG
16
10.2 Level
10 - 24
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
3 Case tab
Basic
Case
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous
/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Range

Level Color
Select the filling color for level.
Level Pattern
Select the pattern and background color for level display.

The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color

Pattern
Example: Pattern Background :
Background
Color
Level Pattern
Level color
10 - 25
10.2 Level
Pattern Background
Model
*1 State
PARTS
Example: evel object and comment are combined.
Set the same condition (display range) to the level display and comment display, and
change the level color and display comment simultaneously.
Level display setting
Comment display setting
Display result
GRAPH, METER
10
11
Monitor device
Direction
Upper limit
Lower limit
: D100
: Up
: 100
:0
display
Monitor device
Display mode
Register comment
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Comment
: D100
: Transparent
: Comment No. 1
Comment No. 2
Comment No. 3
Operation priority
for setting overlap
State No.
Display range
condition
High
Level
Comment display
Level color
Display comment
71<=$V
Red
Increase
$V<=30
Yellow
Decrease
Light blue
Proper
Normal case
Low
Increase
Decrease
Proper
(State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value

When the device value is 71 or greater (71 $V), the level color will
12
RECIPE
Level
Increase
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Increase
14
appear as red and the text, "Increase", will be displayed.

State 1
DEBUG
Increase
When the device value is 20 or less ($V 20), the level color will appear
15
as yellow and the text, "Decrease" will be displayed.
OTHERS
Decrease
State 2
Under the condition other than the range of state 1, 2, the level color will
appear as light blue and the text, "Proper", will be displayed as text.
Normal case
Proper
10.2 Level
10 - 26
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(State 0)
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model

Trigger Type
Trigger Device
Ordinary
OFF
Fal
Range
ON
Rise
Sampling
Bit Trigger

Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
Initial Display
trigger.
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [ON], [OFF], or [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs
Hold Display
to be held even though the trigger is not satisfied.

10 - 27
10.2 Level
9
dialog box.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

Bit Mask
Bit
Operatio
14
[Mask Pattern].
AND
OR
XOR
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
15
OTHERS
Data Operation
16
10.2 Level
10 - 28
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Shift
DEBUG
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
width
height
Basic
Extended
*1
Level Color
graph_color
3)
Level Pattern
pattern
3)
Pattern Background Color
back_color
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 29
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the level function.
PARTS
1 Maximum number of objects that can be arranged (set) for one screen
1000 objects can be set for the level display.
2 Precautions when numerical/comment display object is arranged on a level object
GRAPH, METER
(1) Precautions for arrangement

The displayed screen varies depending on whether the layer is used or not.
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings
(a) To display XOR-combined level display and numerical display/comment display
Description
11
Display example
ACTIONS
Layer
Level display is not displayed correctly

if the numerical display or comment
Numerical display
display is arranged on the back layer

and the level display is arranged on
Level
the front layer.

Used
If the numerical display or comment
12
display is arranged on the front layer
Impossible
TRIGGER
Result
10
Numerical display
the back layer, the numerical display

or comment display will not be
Level
RECIPE
inverted (XOR display not possible).

The XOR-combined numerical display
and comment display is displayed with
Numerical display
XOR display mode.
Possible
The numerical display and comment
display extended off the level range
Numerical display
are not XOR-combined.
Impossible
Level
: Cannot be displayed as expected
14
DEBUG
: Can be displayed as expected,
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Level
Not
OTHERS
15
16
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
10 - 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
used
13
(b) To display numerical value/comment unaffected by level

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
Level display is not displayed correctly

if the numerical display or comment
Numerical display
display is arranged on the back layer

Impossible
Level
the front layer.

Used
The numeric display or comment

display is free from effects of the level
display if the numeric display or
comment display is arranged on the
Possible
front layer and the level display is

arranged on the back layer.
50
The numerical display/comment

Not
used
Numerical display
Level
display is unaffected by the level with

transparent mode.
Possible
(c) To display multiple numerical displays/comment displays over level

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
More than one numerical display or
Used
comment display are displayed if they
123
are arranged on the front layer and the
Injection
level display is arranged on the back
Comment display
:Not displayed.
layer.
Possible
Numerical display
:Displayed.
Level
Only one numerical display/comment
display is displayed.
Not
used
45
The second or later numerical

displays/comment displays are not
displayed.
Impossible
Numerical display
:Displayed.
Level
Comment display
:Not displayed.
(d) With figure frame to numerical display/comment display

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
The shape is free from effects of the

level display if it is specified in the
Used
Possible
numerical display or comment display
50
Numerical display
and arranged on the front layer and if
Level
the level display is arranged on the

back layer.
Normal display may not be displayed
Not
normally.
50
Numerical display
used
Impossible
Level
10 - 31
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
(a) The numerical/comment display will be updated when the level is updated.
The settings (trigger) to update the display for numerical display/comment display is not
relevant.
To update the numerical display or comment display at the timing different from the level
display, arrange each of them on separate layers.
PARTS
(2) Precautions for use
10
(b) Numerical display/Comment display is not blinked or reversed.
GRAPH, METER
3 Display on the drawing screen

If internal position mark is not displayed on the drawing screen, the level will not be filled.
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
Internal
position
mark
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
10 - 32
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.3 Trend Graph
This function is used to collect word device data continuously and display it in trend graph.
D10 = 100
D11 = 50
D10 = 200
D11 = 100
D10 = 150
D11 = 100
200
200
200
100
100
100
Graph1 (
): D10
Graph2 (------): D11
Displays to the end of

graph display range in
order.
Continues to collect data

when the following graph
is displayed by scrolling.
About historical trend graph

Differing from the trend graph function described in this section, historical trend
graph accumulates the collected data and displays them in time sequence. Since it
displays the accumulated data, both the current and past information can be
displayed as graphs.
Section 10.8 Historical Trend Graph

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For trend graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to trend graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
10 - 33
10.3 Trend Graph


Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
PARTS
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
3)
1)
1)

10
GRAPH, METER
Designer2]
10.3.2 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
11
ACTIONS
1 Setting method of trend graph
TRIGGER
to
tab.
The basic functions of trend graph are set on the following
The following example explains the general procedures for setting trend graph.
Example: Trend graph for the comparison between Plan and Actual
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Plan (Graph 1)
: D10
Actual (Graph 2) : D11
RECIPE
12
Actual
Plan
50
-3
-2
-1
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
14
DEBUG
Scale value
X: Represents productivity.
Y: Represents elapsed time.
15
OTHERS
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
100
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 34
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1000
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, upper/lower limit, number of points and figure.
Number of graphs (2)
1000
Points (6)
Direction (Right)
Shape
0
Upper/Lower limit
(Upper limit: 1000, Lower limit: 0)
Remark
Displaying the value exceeding upper/lower limit

When the monitor device value exceeds upper/lower limit, it will be displayed as new
upper/lower limit on the graph.
D10: 1500
Upper limit: 1000
Lower limit:
0
D10: -50
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the device to be monitored, line attribute and scale.
1000
Monitored device (D10, D11)

100
Line attribute (Graph color, line type, line width)

Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
50
50
100
Scale value: Displays default value.

X (Scale points: 3)
Y (Scale points: 3)
3 Extended tab
Change the numeric value used as scale.
1000
100
50
-1
-2
-3
Scale value
X (Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 100)
Y (Lower limit: -3, upper limit: 0)
4 Trigger tab
Set the timing of collecting data.
The default timing of collecting data is set in 1 second (1000ms) cycle.
10 - 35
10.3 Trend Graph

9
2 Store memory
Item
When Store Memory is not set
PARTS
Executing following operations will clear the graph on screen or collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, enable "Store memory" so that the collected data will be held.
"Store memory" is provided on the Extended tab.
When Store Memory is set
10
Switching screens or switching to utility
Switching the base screen when a trend graph is displayed on the

superimpose window
Display is cleared. The device
Display is retained. The device
value is reset to zero.
value is retained.
Switching the security level*1

Switching the station No. device
*1 If the security level is changed on the security password screen or the device value set for a level device is switched
11
ACTIONS
without the Store Memory setting, the display is cleared and the device value is reset to zero.
GRAPH, METER
Switching language switching device
Example: Operations when switching screens
TRIGGER
Monitored device: D10, D11

Base screen 1
Device value
100
50
D10
D11
25
12
50
0
0
60
120
Switch display screen
RECIPE
Change device value
Base screen 5
D10
50
D11
25
D10
25
D11
50
D10
75
D11
90
13
Produce menu
Line 1
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Line 2
Display base screen 1 again
100
50
50
120
Display the device value

before switching to other
screen, as well as the one
displayed on other screen
on the graph.
0
0
60
120
Display current device value

only after collecting and displaying
new data.
(The trend graph is displayed when
the conditions are met again and the
device value is monitored.)
15
OTHERS
60
DEBUG
100
0
0
14
Do not store memory
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory

The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
When the project is downloaded
When the drive information is displayed
Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility
10.3 Trend Graph
16
10 - 36
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Store memory

Click on
[Trend Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Trend Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged trend graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


4
Remark

10 - 37
10.3 Trend Graph

D10

Shape
PARTS
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanation about setting trend graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper/lower limit and object shape.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Graph Type
Object Script
Description
Model
Select the graph to be set (line graph/trend graph/bar graph).

This section explains the setting for trend graph.
Number of
Set the number of lines in the graph to be displayed (1 to 8).
Pens
(Up to 4 lines for GT10)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Set the points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
up to 100 (2 to 100) points can be set.
DEBUG
(Up to 50 points for GT10)

The space between each point is automatically specified by the set points and display range of X.
Example:
Points: 5
Format
15
Points
OTHERS
Space between points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 38
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
View
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Select the direction for graph.
Right
Left
Monitored
device
value
Direction
Monitored
device
value
Elapsed time
Elapsed time
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for trend graph is displayed based on the setting by
Upper Limit
fixed values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values
Device

(
View
Lower Limit
Format
Base Value
Not available for trend graph.

Check this item to continually collect data when the screen in which trend graph is not set is displayed.
The data as many as the number of points for the graph are stored in the GOT internal memory.
Select the timing to erase the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
No Clear Trigger
: Does not clear the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
Clear ON Trigger Rise
: Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit
Store Memory
device rises (turns ON).*1

Clear ON Trigger Falls
: Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit
device falls (turns OFF).*1
When [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall] is selected, set the bit device for the clear trigger.
(

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Plate
Frame
Plate
Frame
Category
Layer
(
Object Name
10 - 39
10.3 Trend Graph

Model
The "sampling (3 s)" trigger type condition is met during the time from pressing the touch switch until the
clear trigger (M10) is turned off by the OFF delay (4 s), and the graph is deleted.
50
Touch the touch switch

where a clear trigger
is set.
11
1
ACTIONS
100
50
TRIGGER
100
10
GRAPH, METER
The timing of recognizing clear trigger in GOT is same as that set on [Trigger Type] (trigger tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set
for clear trigger must be retained longer that the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Example of data retention for a period longer than that specified for "Trigger Type"
Clear trigger
:Set the timing to "Rise" and the device to "M10".
Trigger type
:Set "Sampling (3 s)."
Touch switch
:Set the device to "M10", and the action to "bit momentary" and "OFF Delay (4 s)."
PARTS
*1 Timing for recognizing clear trigger
The previously displayed

graph is deleted.
12
RECIPE
The graph is
deleted.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 40
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Sampling (3 s)
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type/scale) of graph and monitor device.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Data Size
Model

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
Device Settings
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be set.)

Continue
: The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
Random
: One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
Device
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Set the graph attributes.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Then, make the settings as follows:
Device
Display
: Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and select a word
device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.(
Attribute View
Section
5.1 Device Setting)

Graph
: Select the graph color.
Style
: Select the graph style.
Width
: Select the graph width (1 to 7 dots).
10 - 41
10.3 Trend Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale value to the trend graph.
100
100
50
50
PARTS
Example:
10
Scale Style
0
50 100
Scale is displayed in
combination with scale
value.
GRAPH, METER
Scale
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)
0 50 100
Scale value
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to 101) and the scale color.
11
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
ACTIONS
Scale
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be displayed
in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
TRIGGER

Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 101) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
Select a numeric font.
The applicable numeric size depends on the selected font.
: 1x1(Fixed)
12-dot Standard
: 1x1 to 8x8
16-dot Standard
: 0.5x0.5 to 8x8
12

RECIPE
The default numeric values for both height and width are set to any of 0 to 100.
When changing the numeric value, set a scale value.
(
Extended
13
"Scale Value")
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be displayed
in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 42
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale Value
6 x 8dot font
3 Extended tab
Set the security and offset and the upper/lower limit of scale value.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame

Set the scale value for height (Y axis) and width (X axis).
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit of the scale value on Y
Upper
100
Changed
automatically
Scale
Value
250
50
Lower
Lower
500
50
100
50
100
Change scale value on Y

Upper: "100" "500"
Security
(
10 - 43
10.3 Trend Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
PARTS

Offset
(
10
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.

GRAPH, METER
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Basic tab)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 44
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

Set sampling (0.1 to 3600 s) with 100ms as unit when selecting [Sampling] [ON Sampling] [OFF
Trigger Type*1
Sampling].
(For GT10, [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] and [OFF Sampling] cannot be set.)
Rise
Trigger Device
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling

Initial Display
Check this item when collecting the data only when the trigger of display set for [Trigger Type] is met.
Collect data only when
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not
trigger conditions are
satisfied.
satisfied
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load
due to communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced. *2
10 - 45
10.3 Trend Graph

(1) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"

When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], there are cases that the graph is not updated at
the set sampling cycle.
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
GRAPH, METER
10
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling to one second)
one
second
one
second
one
second
Sampling set using "Trigger Type"

ON
11
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
The sampling set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on the status of the device. (The
sampling is not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1 Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2 Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.
(2) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF
Sampling"
When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], graph updating timing differs
depending on whether or not stored memory is used.
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At station No. switching
At language switching
At security level change
10.3 Trend Graph

13
14
15
OTHERS
(b) With setting store memory

At starting GOT
At project download
12
RECIPE
2)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1)
DEBUG
3)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
OFF
16
10 - 46
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Status of device set using "Trigger Device"
PARTS
*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle
*2 Conditions for which the selection of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is effective
For the graph that does not require frequent update, it is possible to reduce the number of communication
execution times by checking the [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] item.
For the graph that requires frequent update and display, it is recommended not to check the [Collect data
only when trigger conditions are satisfied] item (to enable continuous communications to obtain device
values) because screen refresh may be delayed to fail correct graph display if this item is checked.
The setting for the [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] can be used with combining
various graphs.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
100
100
50
50
0
1
Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.
Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.
Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.
100
50
0
1
10 - 47
Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph
10.3 Trend Graph

9
dialog box.
PARTS
5 Data Operation tab
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

Bit Mask
14
in [Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
15
OTHERS
Data Operation
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 48
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Shift
DEBUG
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
width
height
Basic
Extended
*1
Frame Color
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 49
10.3 Trend Graph

10.3.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the trend graph function.
PARTS

24 objects can be set for the trend graph.
(3) When setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
Do not make a setting in which the trigger is met simultaneously for 257 or more objects for which
[Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met and are not displayed correctly
(causing system alarm).
TRIGGER
(4) When using GT10

Both the trend graph and line graph cannot be set on one screen.
11
ACTIONS
(2) When using store memory

For the trend graph with store memory set, up to 16 objects can be set on the whole project.
GRAPH, METER
10
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10.3 Trend Graph

10.3.5 Precautions
10 - 50
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.4 Line Graph
This function enables multiple word device data to be collected in batch and displayed in a line graph.
400
400
200
200
D10 = 100
D11 = 50
D12 = 200
D13 = 150
D10 = 150
D11 = 100
D12 = 250
D13 = 350
Example:
Compare the data with the ones previously collected. (Display the locus)
Set on Extended tab
Updated line
400
400
400
400
200
200
200
200
0
1
0
1
Every time cascade

the collected data with
the new graph.
10 - 51
10.4 Line Graph
0
1
0
1
Clears the displaying graph by

clearing the trigger. Displays the
graph with the new collected
data.

System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
PARTS
Auxiliary
setting
For line graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
10
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
ACTIONS
11
(1) Functions relevant to line graph and others
TRIGGER
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to line graph and others

12
Setting items
Coordinates error
RECIPE
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
3)
1)
3)
1)
14

Designer2]
DEBUG
2)
15
OTHERS
2)
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 52
SCRIPT FUNCTION
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
10.4.2 Required knowledge for line graph setting

Method for line graph setting
Set the basic function of the line graph on the following tabs,
to
.
The following line graph example explains the general procedure for the line graph setting.
Example: Line graph for displaying production quantity of multi production line.
Achievement ratio: 0 to 100%
Production quantity: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (line 1): D10
(line 2)
: D11
(line 3)
: D12
(line 4)
: D13
(line 5)
: D14
6000
100
50
10 - 53
Production quantity (D10 to 14)

of each production line(1 to 5).
Scale value
Vertical : Indicates the completion ratio.
Horizontal: Indicates the No. of the production
line whose production quantity is
monitored.
Upper /lower limit
Set the production quantity.
10.4 Line Graph

1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, the upper and lower limit values, the number of points and the shape.
PARTS
Graph number (1)
6000
Points (5)
Direction (to right)
: The setting procedure of device.
10
Figure frame
Remark
GRAPH, METER
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 6000, lower limit: 0)
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit.

When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it is
displayed numerically on the graph.
ACTIONS
D10: 7
TRIGGER
Upper limit : 6000
11
Lower limit :
12
0
D10: -1000
RECIPE
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the monitored devices and the scale.
Scale
Vertical (scale points: 5)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
50
13
Monitored device
(D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)
100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
6000
25
50
75
100
Scale value: Display the default value

Vertical (scale points: 3)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
14
3 Extended tab
100
Scale value
Vertical (upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
Horizontal (upper limit: 5,
lower limit: 1)
15
OTHERS
50
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 54
SCRIPT FUNCTION
6000
DEBUG
Scale values can be changed on this tab.

Click on
[Line Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Line Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the line graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged line graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape frame
10 - 55
10.4 Line Graph

PARTS
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar).
This section provides the explanation about setting a line graph.
1 Basic tab
10
GRAPH, METER
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper and lower limit and object shape.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
13
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for line graph.

Number of
Pens
Set the number of graphs (1 to 8) to be displayed.

Set the number of lines in the graph to be displayed (1 to 8).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
14
(Up to 4 lines for GT10)

Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 500 points can be set.
(Up to 50 points for GT10)
DEBUG
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.
Example:
Format
Points : 5
15
Points
OTHERS
Space between
points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 56
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
View
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Select the setting direction for the graph.
To right
Direction
To left
Value of the
monitored device
Value of the
monitored device
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Direction of the set

monitored device
Direction of the set

monitored device
View
Format
Upper Limit
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for line graph is displayed based on the setting
by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device
Lower Limit
Base Value
Not available for line graph.
Store Memory

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
5.3.2 Object shape setting )

Frame
Plate
Plate
Flame
Category
Layer
(
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings )
Object Name
10 - 57
10.4 Line Graph

9
2 Device/Scale tab
PARTS
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type, scale) and devices to be monitored.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Data Type
Description
Model
Select a
the
data
data
size
type
(16bit/32bit)
of the wordfor
device
the word
to bedevice.
monitored.
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

Device Settings
Device
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Data Size
Object Script
14

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Then, make the settings as follows:
Display
: Click on the Dev. button and set a word device to be monitored. *1
Style
: Select the graph style.
Width
: Select the graph width.
DEBUG
Device
Graph
15
OTHERS
Attribute View
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 58
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale value to the line graph.

Example:
Scale Style
Scale display
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)
100
100
50
50
0 50 100
Scale value display
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)
0
50 100
Combine the scale display
and scale value display

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to101) and the scale color.
Scale
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.
Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 101) in [Value Number], the color in [Color] and numeric size
(0.5 to 8) in [Size].
For Font, the following items can be selected.
And, the setting enabled value for [Size] varies depending on the [Font] selected.
(For GT10, [12dot Standard] cannot be selected.)
Scale Value
6 x 8dot
:1 x 0.5 (Fix)
12dot Standard
:1 x 1 to 3 x 3
16dot Standard
:0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.

(
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity )
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set to any of 0 to 100.
When change value, set [Scale Value].
(
Extended
"Scale Value"
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.

Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
10 - 59
10.4 Line Graph

*1 Edit device dialog box
PARTS
Set the devices to be monitored in the Edit Device dialog box.
GRAPH, METER
10
Items
Description
Model
Select the setting method in [Device List] described below.

Continue
: The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head device,
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.
TRIGGER

Device Settings
ACTIONS
11
and any other device will be consecutively assigned to the second and later points.
12
Check this item to display a point using 2 devices.
Display 2
devices by
one point.
RECIPE
2 Device/point
1 device/point
2 devices/point
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Click on the desired item in the list to set the monitor device by direct input or clicking on the Dev.
button.
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 60
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device List
3 Extended tab
Set the security, offset, graph display method (locus, not-displayed value setting) and upper and lower
limit scale values.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Items
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
10 - 61
10.4 Line Graph

Basic
Extended
Device/Scale
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

PARTS
Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X axis) lines.
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y
100
Value
50
Lower limit
Lower
10
100
Changed
automatically
250
0
0
50
100
50
GRAPH, METER
Upper limit
Scale
100
Change the scale value of Y.

Upper limit : "100"
"500"
11
(
ACTIONS
Security
TRIGGER

Offset
(
12

This setting cannot be set with "Locus"
Check this item when cascading the updated line graph and the previous graph.
100
50
50
Locus
Display at the second time
Display at the third time

100
13
50
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Display at the first time

100
RECIPE
The previous graph is stored in the GOT internal memory.
Display the cascaded 1, 2, 3 data contents.
14
No Clear Trigger
: Does not erase the locus.
Clear On Trigger Rise
: Erases the locus with the rise (turns ON) of bit device.*1
Clear On Trigger Fall
: Erases the locus with the fall (turns OFF) of bit device.*1
DEBUG
Select the timing of clearing locus after the check.
When selecting [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall], set the bit device to be used for the clear trigger.
(
15
Check this item when setting the value without line connection.
After checking, set the not-displayed value.
Example:
OTHERS
When setting not-displayed valueSet "300" to the not-displayed value.

Not-Displayed Value
3 4
300
200
100
0
300
0 1
16
3 4
The line connecting 1 to 3 is not displayed.
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 62
SCRIPT FUNCTION
300
200
100
00
*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger Type] or longer
Clear Trigger
:Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type :Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
:Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear
trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
100
100
50
50
Touch the touch switch

set for the clear trigger
10 - 63
10.4 Line Graph

The graph displayed

previously is erased.
Erases
the graph
Sampling
(3 s)
OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
9
dialog box.
PARTS
4 Trigger tab
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
RECIPE
12
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
13
Trigger Type
14
The trigger is displayed as follows, when [Locus] is set on the Extended tab.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600
seconds) by second.*1
Fall
Sampling
ON sampling
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Type
Range
Trigger
15

Bit Number
Initial Display
OTHERS
Multi Bit
trigger.
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 64
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Data Size
OFF sampling
DEBUG
Rise
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Hold Display
This setting cannot be set with "Locus".

satisfied
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected.
satisfied.

(a) Causes
one
second
one
second
one
second

ON
OFF
3)
1)
2)
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
sequence program.
10 - 65
10.4 Line Graph

(a) Without setting locus

At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
GRAPH, METER
10
(b) With setting locus

At starting GOT
At project download
various graphs.
100
100
50
50
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Trigger Type
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph
12
RECIPE
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
PARTS
Sampling"
depending on whether or not locus setting is used.
14
0
2


DEBUG
15
100
OTHERS
50
0
2
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 66
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
Bit Mask
Bit
Operation
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].

AND
OR
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 67
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.4 Line Graph

Model
9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Tab name
13
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting dialog box
14
width
Extended
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)
15
16

Section 16.3.2
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 68
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Frame Color
OTHERS
Basic
DEBUG
height
10.4.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using line graph function.

For line graph, up to 32 objects can be arranged (set) for one screen.
(3) When using GT10
Both the trend graph and line graph cannot be set on one screen.
10 - 69
10.4 Line Graph

10.4.5 Precautions
9
(a) Only one object can be set for the whole project.
When the base screen arranged with line graph is multi-displayed in other base screen with
the Set overlay screen function, only the first line graph can be displayed and the second and
later will not be displayed.
(c) When arranging the trend graph on the base screen, some windows cannot be displayed on
the base screen.
The following shows the windows that cannot be displayed on each GOT.
Windows that cannot be displayed
GT15, GT11, GT10
Overlap window 2, test window
11
(d) The offset function and the station number switching function are not available.
(e) When [Vertical] is set for [Format] in [System Environment] (for GT11 only), the line graph
cannot be used. (Not displayed on the GOT even when arranged on the screen.)
Pay attention to the following when a line graph is overlaid on a shape.
The BMP/JPEG file pasted to the screen cannot exceed the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the area that is not overlapped in the line graph frame will not be displayed.
12
Example:
RECIPE
Line graph frame BMP/JPEG files

for shape
Arrange BMP/JPEG files

in the line graph frame
BMP/JPEG files exceed

the line graph frame.
14
DEBUG
When using shapes filled with color, arrange the frame of the shape (the boundary line of
paint area) within the line graph frame. Otherwise, the shape will not be painted normally
Since the shape set in the overlay screen is not displayed, it must be directly placed over
and as the background for the line graph.
Do not use the superimpose window because shapes within the superimpose window will
not be displayed as background.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Example:
15
Window screen
Set locus display
Do not set locus display

OTHERS
Base screen
16
10.4 Line Graph

10.4.5 Precautions
10 - 70
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(f)
ACTIONS
Overlap window 5
TRIGGER
GT16, GT SoftGOT1000
GRAPH, METER
10
(b) The setting is available for the base screen only.
GOT
PARTS
2 Precautions for the line graph which locus has been set.
10.5 Bar Graph
This section explains the function for collecting word device data and displaying them as a bar graph.
D10
D20
D30
100
400
200
D10
D20
D30
-200
200
400
Example:
Change bar display
Extended Tab
Bar display can be sorted in ascending/descending

order based on the device values
Sort bar display in deseending order.

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
For bar graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to bar graph and others
10 - 71
10.5 Bar Graph

Key
window
9
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
10
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
objects within GOT]
GRAPH, METER
PARTS
(1) Functions relevant to bar graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
3)
1)
1)

RECIPE
Designer2]
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
10.5.2 Required knowledge for bar graph setting

Set the basic function of the bar graph on the following tab,
to
.
The following example explains the general procedures for setting a bar graph.
Example: Bar graph displaying production quantity of multiple lines
Achievement ratio
: 0 to 100%
Production quantity
: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (Line 1) : D10
(Line 2) : D11
(Line 3) : D12
(Line 4) : D13
(Line 5) : D14
6000
DEBUG
14
15
The production of each line

(1 to 5)(D10 to 14)
OTHERS
Scale value
X: Indicates achievement ratio.
Y: Indicates line No.
0
Draws with figure and text.
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 72
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, figure frame (object shape), base value and upper and lower limit values.
6000
Figure frame
Base value
Upper/Lower limit
Remark
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit

When a monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit, it will be displayed
numerically on the graph.
D13 = 7000
Upper limit: 6000
Lower limit:
0
D11 = 1000
2 Device/Scale tab
Set monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
6000
Monitor device (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)

0
Graph color
Scale (Scale points: 5)
Scale value (Numerical value number: 3)
3 Extended tab
Scale values can be changed on this tab.
6000
Scale value (Upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
10 - 73
10.5 Bar Graph

[Bar Graph].
[Bar Graph] from the menu.
3 Double click on the arranged bar graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
11
ACTIONS
Easy setting method



12
D10

Shape frame
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
GRAPH, METER
10
2 Click on the position where the bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or use ESC key.)
TRIGGER
[Graph]
RECIPE
Select [Object]
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 74
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Click on
PARTS

This dialog box is used in common among three types of graph (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanations of setting of bar graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper limit/lower limit/base value and
object shape, i.e., frame.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Model
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for bar graph.
Number of
Set the number of graphs (1 to 8) to be displayed.
Pens*1
Points
Not available for a bar graph.

Select the setting method of monitor device.
Select either of X direction or Y direction.
View
Format
Y direction:
Direction
Monitor
device value
X direction:
In the set
order of
the device
In the set order of the device
Monitor device value
10 - 75
10.5 Bar Graph

9
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Data Operation
Items
Description
PARTS
Select whether the device value range (Base value, Lower/Upper limit) for the bar graph is displayed
Upper Limit
View
Model
based on the setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Lower Limit
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values
Device
: Sets the device values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values.

(
Format
10
Base Value
data format in advance (on the Device/Scale tab).
Store Memory
GRAPH, METER
Basic
Not available for bar graph.

Shape
11
(
Frame

Frame
TRIGGER
Format
ACTIONS
selected as shape.
Plate
12
Plate
Frame

RECIPE
13
(
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Layer
14
DEBUG
*1 Up to 4 graphs can be set for GT10.
15
OTHERS
Object Name
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 76
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Category
2 Device/Scale tab
Set graph display attribute (graph color/scale) and monitor device.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Data Size
Model

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value
Real

Device
Settings
When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
Continue
: The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random
Device
: One device to be monitored is set for each graph.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings as follows:
Device
device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.
(
Display
Graph
Attribute
Pattern
: Select the filling pattern of the graph.
View
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.
Pattern + Graph
Example:
BG
Pattern :
Graph
BG

10 - 77
10.5 Bar Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale values to the bar graph.
Scale points = 5
100
50
50
0
Scale value = 3
10
GRAPH, METER
Scale Style
100
PARTS
Example:
Scale is displayed in combination

with scale value

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to101) and the scale color.
11
ACTIONS
Setting the scale to "0" hides the scale.

Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 101) in [Value Number], the color of numeric display in [Color] and
TRIGGER
the numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].

Scale Value
6 x 8dot
: 1 x 1 (Fix)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
12

RECIPE
The default value for both X and Y axes are set to "-100 to 100".
When change the value, set [Scale Value].
(
Extended
13
tab [Scale Value])
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
When set the Scale Value to "0", the scale will not be displayed.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 78
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale
3 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset and upper/lower limit of the scale values.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame

Upper
Example: Changes lower limit of scale value.

Upper
100
100
Sets lower limit of the
scale value to "0"
Scale Value
0
Lower
Changes
automatically
Lower
Security
50
-100
(
(
Offset

10 - 79
10.5 Bar Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
9
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
PARTS
Set the graph width (1 to 500 dots) of the bar graph to be displayed.
The graph width includes the 1 dot on the boundary line (Vertical bar: Left side, Horizontal bar: Upper
side)
10
Boundary line (1 dot)
GRAPH, METER
Graph Width
Boundary line (1 dot)
Graph width: including the boundary line
Set the space between graph OP and the selected position to edit text in bar graph that is near the OP (1
11
ACTIONS
to 100 dots).
Distance from Graph
TRIGGER
Frame (Offset)
Distance from
graph frame
Distance from graph frame
12
Set the space between bar graphs (including graph width) (1 to 500 dots).
Vertical graph
Horizontal graph
RECIPE
Width + Space
Space (including graph width)
Sorting the bars.
13
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
: Sort is invalid. (Bars are displayed in the device setting order.)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
None
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.

Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
[Ascending]
Y direction
X direction
Sort
14
[Descending]
DEBUG
X direction
OTHERS
15
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 80
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Y direction
4 Trigger tab
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model

Trigger Type
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range

Select the data type of the word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
triggers.
Initial Display
10 - 81
10.5 Bar Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Hold Display
PARTS
10
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
GRAPH, METER
satisfied.
Trigger Type
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph
100
100
50
50
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
0
1


14
DEBUG

100
12
RECIPE
various graphs.
11
ACTIONS
satisfied
TRIGGER
50
15
0
3
OTHERS
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 82
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 83
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.5 Bar Graph

Model
9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Tab name
13
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting dialog box
14
width
Extended
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)
15
16

Section 16.3.2
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 84
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Frame Color
OTHERS
Basic
DEBUG
height
10.5.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the bar graph function.

For bar graph, up to 1000 objects can be arranged (set) for one screen.
10 - 85
10.5 Bar Graph

10.5.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.6 Statistics Graph
GRAPH, METER
10
The statistics pie/bar graph shows the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total data value.
1 Statistics pie graph
D10
D20
D30
33
33
34
D10
D20
D30
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
76
12
12
RECIPE
2 Statistics bar graph
13
12
76
12
Application example
Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen
Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to

device values
Set in Extended tab
Target vol.
Prod. vol.
Ma. 1
5000
2000
Ma. 2
5000
1200
Ma. 3
5000
1000
Ma. name
Device status can be displayed more effectively by

including the line graph legend.
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending

order of device values.
15
OTHERS
No.
14
DEBUG
Section 7.2 Data List
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D10
D20
D30
33
33
34
16
10 - 86
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D10
D20
D30

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For statistics graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
Make the settings by referring the following description, if necessary.
(1) Functions relevant to statistics graph and others
(1) Functions relevant to statistics graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)

Designer2]
10 - 87

10.6.2 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
PARTS
The following
to
tabs can be used for setting statistics graph basic function.
The procedure for setting the statistics graph is shown as follows.
Example: Statistics pie graph displaying the production ratio by model
Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
GRAPH, METER
Production ratio by model
75
10
25
Scale value
Display scale value
11
ACTIONS
50
1 Basic tab
TRIGGER
It is to set the graph type, division number (number of divided sections) and shape.
Graph type, division number
12
Shape
RECIPE
33.3
2 Device/Scale tab
It is to set the monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Scale value (value number: 4)
14
DEBUG
50
Scale (scale number: 4)
15
OTHERS
25
75
13
Device (D10, D11, D12)

Graph color
16

10.6.2 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
10 - 88
SCRIPT FUNCTION
66.7

Click on
[Statistics Pie Graph/Statistics Bar Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Statistics Pie Graph]/[Statistics Bar Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the statistics graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged statistics graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape frame
10 - 89

It is to set the graph type (statistics bar graph, statistics pie graph), division number (number of divided
sections) and shape.
PARTS
1 Basic tab
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Graph Type
Select the statistics graph type (statistics bar graph/statistics pie graph).
Division Number
Set the number of word devices to be monitored (2 to 32).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Select the setting direction of device to be set in [Statistics Bar Graph].
Direction
Down
D10
D11
D11
D10
D12
Right
Left
DEBUG
Up
D12
D10 D11 D12 D12 D11 D10
15

Shape
selected as shape.
(
OTHERS
Format
16

10 - 90
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Frame
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Frame
Plate
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate

Category
Layer
(
Object Name
10 - 91

Model
9
2 Device/Scale tab
PARTS
It is to set monitor device and graph display attribute (graph color, scale).
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Extended
Trigger
Items
Data Size
Data Operation
13
Object Script
Description
Model
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Device/Scale

Signed BIN
: Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
: Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD
: Treats the word device value as a BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
14
Settings
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.

Continuous
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.
DEBUG
Device

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings as follows:
Device
Device
15
device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.
(
Display
Pattern
: Select the filling pattern of the graph.
Attribute List
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.
OTHERS
Graph
Pattern + Graph color

Example: BG
16
Pattern :
Graph
BG color

10 - 92
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale value of statistics graph.

Example:
0
Scale Style
75
25
75
50
50
Scale points: 8
Scale value: 4
25
Combined display of
scale and scale value

After checking, set the number of scale points (0, 2 to101) and the scale color.
Scale
Entering "0" to Scale Points hides the scale.
Check this item to display the scale numerically.
After checking it, set the Value Number (0, 2 to 101), Color, Font and Size (0.5 to 8).
For the Font, the following options are selectable. Note that values available for the Size vary depending on
the selected font.
6x8dot
Scale Value
: 1 x 1 (Fixed)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8

(
Entering "0" to Scale Points hides the scale
10 - 93

9
3 Extended tab
PARTS
Set the security, offset and the order displaying graphs (sort).
Check the [Extended Function] at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Security
Object Script
Description
Model
(
(
Offset
14

(
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
RECIPE
12
DEBUG
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None
: Sort is invalid. (Graph sections are displayed in the device setting order.)
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
[Ascending]
Bar graph
Pie graph
[Descending]
Bar graph
Pie graph
15
OTHERS
Sort

10 - 94
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
4 Trigger tab
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding [Extended Function] at the bottom of the
dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
Select trigger for displaying the object.

Trigger Type
(For GT10, [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [Range], and [Bit Trigger] cannot be selected.)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger

Bit Number
Initial Display
trigger.
10 - 95

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Model
PARTS
Hold Display
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied
10
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
GRAPH, METER
satisfied.
various graphs.
100
100
50
50
RECIPE
Trigger Type
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph
13
0
1


14
DEBUG

100
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
satisfied
50
15
0
3
OTHERS
16

10 - 96
SCRIPT FUNCTION

dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Bit Mask
Bit
Operation
[Mask Pattern].
AND
OR
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 97
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

Model
9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Tab name
13
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting dialog box
14
width
Basic
Option
plate_color
Plate Color
scale_max[0]
4)
Security
plate_color
4)
15

OTHERS
Section 16.3.2
16

10 - 98
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Frame Color
DEBUG
height
10.6.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using statistics graph function.

For the statistics graph function, up to 32 objects can be set.

(1) When device values are negative
For statistic graph, the absolute value is displayed when monitor device value is a negative
number.
Example: When D101 is "
30"
D100=20 D101=-30
20
40
D102=50
60
80
100
Display "30"
(2) Filling
When handling extremely small data in a statistics pie graph, the start point may coincide with the
end point.
If this occurs, no filling is performed.
10 - 99

10.6.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.7 Scatter Graph
By taking the values of 2 word devices as X and Y coordinates, a corresponding point is displayed on the
graph.
1 Sample
11
(200, 100)
400
400
400
300
300
300
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
300
TRIGGER
X device: D100
Y device: D200
(300, 200)
ACTIONS
Two word device values are collected, and then displayed as a point on the graph.
This graph is updated to the new one with the previously displayed point(s) remained. (Locus)
(50, 300)
GRAPH, METER
10
100
0
100
200
300
100
200
12
300
Multiple data of 2 word device values are collected together and displayed as corresponding points.
When refreshing the data, the previously displayed point(s) can be either kept or erased depending on
the setting selection.
RECIPE
2 Batch
13
400
400
400
300
300
300
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
300
100
0
100
200
300
100
200
300
D209
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.7 Scatter Graph
10 - 100
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D109
Y device: D200
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
X device: D100

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For scatter graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to scatter graph and others
(1) Functions relevant to scatter graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)

Designer2]
10 - 101
10.7 Scatter Graph

10.7.2 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
Set basic function of the scatter graph on the following tabs

to`
The following example explains the general setting procedure.
PARTS
1 Setting method of scatter graph

.
10
Monitor conversion value

X: D100 (temperature digital output value)
Y: D200 (power consumption digital output value)
Display attribute
Switch according to operation mode.
Operation mode A: , operation mode B:
5000
2500
0
-10
11
20
50
600
TRIGGER
10000
: -10 to 50
: D100
: D200
ACTIONS
Temperature variation range

Conversion value (Digital output value of temperature)
Conversion value (Digital output value of power consumption)
GRAPH, METER
Example: A scatter graph to display power consumption and temperature during line operation
Digital output range for temperature
: 0 to 600
Digital output range for power consumption
: 0 to 10000
Power consumption variation range
: 0 to 5000W
12
Scale value
Vertical : Indicates power consumption
Horizontal: Indicates temperature
RECIPE
Upper limit/lower limit

X: Indicates temperature digital output range
Y: Indicates power consumption digital output range
1 Basic tab
13
Set the graph type, upper/lower limit values and object shapes.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Graph type (sample)
10000
Points
(Fixed to 1 when graph type is sample)
Object shape, i.e., frame
14
600
Upper/lower limit for X
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit
15
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it will be
displayed numerically on the graph.
(800, 11000)
Lower limit:
OTHERS
Upper limit: 10000
16
0
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 600
(-1000, -1500)
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 102
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
DEBUG
Upper/lower limit for Y

2 Device/Scale tab
Set the monitor devices, scale, and scale values.
10000
100
Monitor device (X: D10, Y: D11)

0
-100
-100
Scale
(Scale points Horizontal: 7, Vertical: 5)
0
100
600
Scale value
(Value number Horizontal: 3, Vertical: 3)
: Default value (Upper limit: 100, Lower limit: -100)
is displayed
Can be changed in extended tab.
3 Attribute tab
Set the type (point/line) of graph display attribute.
10000
Display attribute (point)

: Select either of point or line.
Point
100
Straight line
0
-100
-100
100
600
4 Trigger tab
Set the graph display method.
Switch display attribute
: Make setting on this to change the display attribute set in
Data collection timing
according to the condition of a specified switching device.

: Set the sampling of data to 600 seconds in this case.
The default value is set to 1 second.
Attribute switch (bit, switching device: M10)
: Switch between 2 types of display attributes
Set display attribute in the following [ON/OFF attribute].
10000
ON/OFF attribute (ON: OFF: )

: Set display attribute when M10 is ON or OFF.
0
0
600
Point is displayed as
when M10 is ON.
Point is displayed as
when M10 is OFF.
5 Extended tab
Change the scale values.
10000
5000
2500
0
-10
10 - 103
20
50
600
Scale value
Upper limit (Horizontal: 50, Vertical: 5000)
Lower limit (Horizontal: -10, Vertical: 1)
10.7 Scatter Graph

2 Store memory
Item
When Store Memory not set
When Store Memory set
Stores the device value
Stores the device value
Screen with scatter graph set
Screen with scatter graph not set

Screen with scatter graph set
Use Language Switching

Switching base screen when scatter graph is displayed on a
Erases the display.
Stores the display.
Changes the device value to 0.
Stores the device value.
superimpose window
GRAPH, METER
the utility
10
Screen with scatter graph not set
11
Switching security level

Switching station No. switching device
*1 If switch the security level on the Security-Password screen or switch the device value set for the level device when
TRIGGER
Store Memory is not set, the display is erased or the device value is changed to 0.
ACTIONS
Screen switching/Switching to
PARTS
Executing following operations will clear the graph on screen or collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, enable "Store memory" so that the collected data will be held.
"Store memory" is provided on the Extended tab.
Example: Screen switching operation

Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101
12
Store memory
100
Device value
Device value changes
50
100
D100
50
100
D101
50
25
100
50
50
100
Base screen 1
Switch to
and display
base screen 5.
Display base
screen 1 again.
50
RECIPE
D101
50
50
100
Base screen 1
Display both the device value (before being
switched to other screen) and the device val
in the display of other screen.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D100
Do not store memory

100
50
Production menu
50
14
100
Line 1
Base screen 5
Base screen 1
Only graph display current device value
after collecting and displaying new data.
15
OTHERS
(1) The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory
Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph (sample, batch).
DEBUG
Line 2
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 104
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2000 times
Sample
2000
Points
Batch
times (Round off the part after decimal point)
For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for [Operation at
frequency over time] on the Extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts data collection
Initialize and continue . . . Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter graph display and
collects data again.
Displaying an error message when the sampling number reaches the maximum
An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has
reached the maximum.
(
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display)
(2) Conditions for when the stored memory data is erased

(a) When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
(b) When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the maximum
(Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
(c) When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF
(d) When the project is downloaded
(e) When the drive information is displayed
(f) Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility
10 - 105
10.7 Scatter Graph

9
3 Accumulate/Average
PARTS
The accumulation frequency and the average/maximum/minimum of the data collected in the scatter
graph can be written to devices.
Example: X-device: D100, Y-device: D200
400
300
300
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
D100
D200
100
200
300
50
250
100
200
300
200
300
100
200
200
100
300
Contents to be written
100
200
Accumulation
300
Frequency
250
200
X
Remark
Value that has been

written
10
Average Value
200
Maximum
300
Minimum
50
Average Value
187
Maximum
250
Minimum
100
GRAPH, METER
400
300
11
ACTIONS
400
300
(1) Average value

(a) The fractions below the decimal point of the average value are rounded off.
If the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device is real,
however, fractions below the decimal point will be written.
TRIGGER
400
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(1) Upper limit of sampling number available for accumulation frequency/average value
The upper limit of the sampling number that can be counted as accumulation frequency/average
value varies according to the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device.
[Data Type of Monitor Device]
Unsigned BIN, Signed BIN, Real, BCD (32 bit) : 65535
BCD (16 bit)
: 9999
When the accumulation frequency exceeds the upper limit, please set the operation in [Operation at
frequency over time] of the extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts the sampling of data.
Initialize and continue . . . . Initializes the value of the accumulation frequency, and then recollects
data.
13
14
DEBUG
(2) Maximum and minimum values

When the value of the monitor device exceeds the upper or lower limit of the
scatter graph, the upper or lower limit value will be written as the maximum or
minimum accordingly.
RECIPE
(b) Since the average value is calculated on the basis of the average values of
every sampling, it is probable to have an error.
15
When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit, an error message
can be displayed in the alarm list (system alarm).
16
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display)
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 106
SCRIPT FUNCTION
OTHERS
Displaying an error message when the accumulation frequency value exceeds the
upper limit
(2) Initialization timing of accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum

Value "0" is written to the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum in the
following timing.
(a) When the conditions for the clear trigger (set in the Trigger tab) are satisfied
(b) When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit
(Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
(c) When switching the screen
When switching the screen (base screen, window screen) with scatter graph arranged
When switching the screen with scatter graph arranged to other screens, the current
accumulation frequency/average value will be held. However, when the screen is switched
back to the previous screen, the data will be initialized.
When switching the base screen
The scatter graph arranged in superimpose window will be initialized when the base screen
is switched over.
(d) When the security level is changed
(e) When the station number is changed
Remark
Executing "the accumulation frequency/average value write" and the "store memory"
simultaneously
If the "accumulation frequency/average value" and "store memory" are used
simultaneously, the data of accumulation frequency/average value will still be
collected even when the screen is switched to others.
However, accumulation frequency/average value can be written until the time that
the sampling number for store memory reaches the maximum.
Refer to the following for the maximum sampling number of store memory.
This section
10 - 107
Store memory
10.7 Scatter Graph


Select [Object]
[Graph]
PARTS
[Scatter Graph].
[Scatter Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the scatter graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged scatter graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
GRAPH, METER
Click on
11


D10

Shape
RECIPE
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
12
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 108
SCRIPT FUNCTION
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Easy setting method

1 Basic tab
Set the graph type, upper limit/lower limit and shape.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Graph Type
Model
Select the graph type (sample/batch).

Points
Set the points (2 to 500) to be displayed in the graph of [Batch].

Select how to update the graph display of [Batch].
Mode
: Only displays the graph of the latest data.
Locus
: Displays the latest data with the previous displayed graph overlapped.
Select whether to set the range (upper limit/lower limit of X/Y) of device displayed in scatter graph in fixed
View
Format
Replacement
value or in the value of the specified device.

X: Upper Limit/
Lower Limit
Fixed
: Set a fixed value to the upper limit/lower limit.
Device
: Set a device value as the upper limit /lower limit.
Y: Upper Limit/
(
Lower Limit
The range of the upper limit/lower limit that can be set depends on the data type of the monitor device.
Set the data type (set in the Device/Scale tab) in advance.
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change)

Frame Color
Format
Plate color
Plate Color
Frame color

10 - 109
10.7 Scatter Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model

(
Layer
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Object Name
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 110
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS
Category
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the devices to be monitored and the scale displayed in the graph.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Data Size
Model

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

Device
Select the setting method for monitoring devices when [Batch] is used.
Device Settings
Continue
: The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.
head device.
X-Device/
Input the device directly for each of X and Y axes, or click on the
Y-Device
device. (
button to set the monitor word
10 - 111
10.7 Scatter Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale values for the scatter graph.
100
50
50
0
Scale display
(X:5, Y:5)
0
50
100
Scale value display
(X:3, Y:3)
10
0
50
100
Combine the scale display
and scale value display
GRAPH, METER
Scale Style
100
PARTS
Example:

After checking, set the number of scale points (i.e. tick marks) (2 to101) and the scale color.
11
ACTIONS

After checking, set [Value Number] (2 to 101), [Font] and [Size] (0.5 to 8).
6 x 8dot
: 1 x 1 (Fix)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
12
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set within the range from -100 to 100.
When changing the numeric values, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
RECIPE
extended tab.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Scale Value
TRIGGER
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 112
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale
3 Attribute tab
Set the display attribute (type of point/line) of scatter graph.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Display Attribute
Select the display attribute (point/line) of scatter graph.
Fixed Attribute
Set display attribute for the case that [Fixed] is selected for [Attribute Switching] on the Trigger tab.
Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
Type of point :
Type
Type of line
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is positioned
close to other point/line.
10 - 113
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small)/line (1 to 7).
Color
Select the display color of the point/line.
10.7 Scatter Graph

Model
9
4 Case/Trigger tab
PARTS
Set the display attribute switching of scatter graph, updating of graph display and timing of erasure.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Device/Scale
Case/Trigger
Attribute
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model
Select the switching display attributes for the scatter graph (type, size and color of point/line)
Fixed
: The display attribute is not switched.
Bit
: The display attribute is switched depending on the bit device conditions ON/
Signed BIN16
: The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the
BCD16
: The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the
13
The display attribute set on the Attribute tab is used.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
OFF.
word device value (16-bit binary value).
word device (16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)).
When [Bit] is selected, set the display attribute in [ON/OFF Attribute] of this tab.
14
When [Signed BIN16] or [BCD16] is selected, set it on the Case tab.

Example1: Attribute switching: [Bit], Switching device: M10
M10: ON
Points are
displayed as
M10: OFF
Points are
displayed as
DEBUG
Attribute Switching
RECIPE
Basic
15
D10 = 1
Points are
displayed as
D10 = 10
Points are
displayed as
D10 < 100

Points are
displayed as
OTHERS
Example2: Attribute switching: [Signed BIN16], Switching device: D10
16
Set the device for display switching.

(
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 114
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Switching Device
Basic
Device/Scale
Case/Trigger
Attribute
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
ON/OFF Attribute
Model
Set the display attribute for ON/OFF statuses of the display-switching bit device.
Type of point :
Type
Type of line
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color

Display Trigger

(
Type*1
Display Trigger
Device
Initial Display

Ordinary
Sampling
Rise
ON sampling
Fall
OFF sampling

When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be displayed
only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
Collect data only

when trigger
Trigger
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display
trigger is not satisfied.
conditions are
satisfied
Check this item to set the trigger for erasing the display of graphs.
After checking, select the timing of erasing graph display.
Clear Trigger
*3
Rise
: Erases the graph at rise (turns ON) of bit device.
Fall
: Erases the graph at fall (turns OFF) of bit device.
The clear trigger will clear graph display stored in memory and the accumulation frequency/average
value.
Assigning a device to function as a clear trigger.
Clear Trigger
Device
When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], make sure to hold the
clear trigger device status for more than the sampling cycle set in [Trigger Type].
10 - 115
10.7 Scatter Graph


(a) Causes
GRAPH, METER
10
one
second
one
second
one
second

ON
11
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
sequence program.
Sampling"
depending on whether or not stored memory is used.
(a) Without setting store memory
At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At station No. switching
10.7 Scatter Graph

13
14
15
OTHERS
(b) With setting store memory

At starting GOT
At project download
12
RECIPE
2)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1)
DEBUG
3)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
OFF
16
10 - 116
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS
*2 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger Type] or longer
Clear Trigger
: Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type : Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear
trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
400
400
300
300
200
200
100
100
0
100
200
300
Touch the switch set for

the clear trigger
100
10 - 117
10.7 Scatter Graph

300
The graph displaed previously

erased.
Erase
the graph
Sampling
(3 s)
200
OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
PARTS
Trigger Type
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph
100
50
50
11
ACTIONS
100
TRIGGER
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
0
1

12

RECIPE

100
GRAPH, METER
10
various graphs.
13
50
14
DEBUG
15
OTHERS
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 118
SCRIPT FUNCTION
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
5 Case tab
Set the attributes according to the state of device state condition.
This tab will be displayed only when [Attribute Switching] of the Trigger tab is set to [Signed BIN16] or
[BCD16].
Refer to the following for details of state.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Items
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Range

Type of point :
Type
Type of line
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color
10 - 119
10.7 Scatter Graph

Model
*1 State
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
Example: Graph type

: Sample,
Switching device : D10
Operation priority
Display range
1
2
Type
Size
Color
8<=$V<=12
Big
White
13<=$V<=18
Small
Black
Big
Black
(State 0)
ACTIONS
Normal case
*$V indicates the value of the monitor device.

When the value of the switching device is between 8 and
12 (8<=$V<=12), it will appear as big white quadrangle
(
40
12
30
).
20
State 1
10
0
10
20
30
40
RECIPE
When the value of the switching device is between 13 and

18, it will appear as small black triangle (
).
40
30
13
20
State 2
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40
When other conditions except for the conditions of state 1

to 3 happen, it will appear as big black circle (
(State 0)
).
40
30
20
14
10
0
DEBUG
Normal case
15
OTHERS
Low
11
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
High
TRIGGER
State No.
condition.
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 120
SCRIPT FUNCTION
for setting overlap
6 Extended tab
This tab allows the following attributes to be set:
Scale values, security, offset, and the write of collection data's accumulation data.
When the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked, the tab is displayed.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model
Graph frame
Rectangle Frame
When changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.

Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and/or horizontal (X axis) line.
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Upper limit
100
100
0
Change the scale value
of the horizontal axis
Upper limit: "100" to "200"
-100
Scale
Value
Lower
Lower limit
-100
-100
Lower limit
100
-100
50
200
Upper limit
Changed automatically
Security
(
(
Offset
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Extended tab).

10 - 121
10.7 Scatter Graph

Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Extended
Case
Items
Store Memory
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Model
Check this item to enable data collection during display of the screen without a scatter graph.
Data of the points displayed in the graph are stored in the internal memory of GOT.
PARTS
Basic
Check this item when setting the not-displayed value for X and/or Y of the scatter graph.
Example: [0] is set as not-displayed value for X and Y
Not-displayed
value
400
(0, 400)
(50, 0)
300
200
200
100
100
0
(0, 400)
(50, 0)
300
GRAPH, METER
400
Value not displayed
10
Not-displayed
value
100
200
300
100
Graph of [Point]
200
300
Graph of [Line]
11
Store memory
: When exceeding the maximum display points (2000 points).
Accumulation frequency
: When accumulation frequency exceeds 65535/average value/
Interrupt
: Interrupts the data collection, and does not update the graph display.
Initialize and Continue
: After erasing the graph display and initializing the memory and
TRIGGER
maximum/minimum (9999).
Operation at frequency
over time
ACTIONS
Select the operation when the following functions exceed the maximum sampling number.
accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum,

continues data collection.
12
Check this item when writing the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum of collected
data into devices.
Then, set the interval of writing the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum into
devices by specifying the number of update times.
RECIPE
The value set as "Value not displayed" in the scatter graph display is not included.
When writing of the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum is enabled, "Store
Memory" is enabled and trigger (sampling) is set to short, this may cause the object to refresh the display
considerably slower.
13
In this case, set the writing interval to longer.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Set the head bit device to which the accumulation frequency/average value is written.
According to the data size (16bit/32bit) of the monitor device, the device range varies as follows.
Example: The device that has been set: n
Accumulation frequency
When setting 32 bit

(using 14 word)
n,
n+1
Average value
n+1
n + 2,
n+3
Maximum
n+2
n + 4,
n+5
Minimum
n+3
n + 6,
n+7
Average value
n+4
n + 8,
n+9
Maximum
n+5
n + 10, n + 11
Minimum
n+6
n + 12, n + 13
14
15
OTHERS
Device
When setting 16 bit

(using 7 word)
DEBUG
Write contents
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 122
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Accumulate/Average

dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Bit Mask
in [Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 123
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.7 Scatter Graph

Model
9
8 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

Tab name
13
Object property
Setting item
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting dialog box
12
RECIPE

14
width
Attribute
Extended
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Color
graph_color
3)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)
15
16

Section 16.3.2
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 124
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Frame Color
OTHERS
Basic
DEBUG
height
10.7.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the scatter graph function.

Up to 24 objects can be set for one screen.
(2) When using store memory
For the scatter graph with [Store Memory] set, up to 16 graph objects can be set in a whole project.
(3) Cautions when displaying superimpose window
Set the superimpose window not to overlap with a scatter graph.
The scatter graph area where the superimpose window is overlapped is not displayed.
Setting [Store Memory] enables full display of the scatter graph in such a case.
Superimpose
window
Base screen
Scatter graph is not

displayed fully when
[Store Memory] is not set.
The area overlapping with

superimpose window is also
displayed when [Store Memory] is set.
10 - 125
10.7 Scatter Graph

10.7.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.8 Historical Trend Graph

10
Usually, the collected data

is displayed in trend graph.
Display of the past data
GRAPH, METER
This function displays the device data collected by the logging function in trend graph in time sequence.
Display of the latest data
Graph display range
Graph Update
Graph display range
Graph display range
Data collected by
the logging function
TRIGGER
Graph Update
ACTIONS
11
Graph Update
12
About historical trend graph
RECIPE
To use a historical trend graph, the logging function must be set in advance.
For the setting of the logging function, refer to the following.
Section 11.3 Logging Function
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10 - 126
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For historical trend graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to the functions other than historical trend graph

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Coordinates error
Setting item
objects within GOT]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting item
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
1)

Designer2]
10 - 127

10.8.2 Required knowledge for historical trend graph setting
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Contents displayed in historical trend graph

The historical trend graph displays the data collected by the logging function and stored in the
buffering area and/or memory card in graph.
To use the stored data, the present and past information can be displayed in graph.
PARTS
1 Relationships with logging function
Logging data
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Displaying the stored data in graph
(2) The data collected by the logging function and displayed in historical trend graph
A historical trend graph can display the data set at only one logging ID.
To display multiple logging IDs, it is necessary to set multiple historical trend graphs.
12
RECIPE
2 Setting method of historical trend graph

The basic functions of historical trend graph are set on the following
to
tabs.
The following example explains the general procedure for setting historical trend graph.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Example: Historical trend graph for comparison between the planned and actual quantity
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Planned quantity (Graph 1)
: D10
Actual quantity (Graph 2)
: D11
14
Actual quantity
Planned quantity
DEBUG
Scale value
Vertical: Represents productivity.
Horizontal: Represents elapsed time.
15
OTHERS
Upper/lower limit
Sets the number of production.

10 - 128
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, the upper and lower limit values, the number of points and the shape.
1000
Points (6)
Direction (Right)
Shape
0
Upper/lower limit value
(Upper limit value: 1000, Lower limit value: 0)
Remark
Displaying values that exceed the upper or lower limit value

When the value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit value, such
a value is displayed in the upper or lower limit value on the graph.
D10:1500
Upper limit value: 1000
Lower limit value:
0
D10:-50
2 Device tab
Set the device to be monitored and the line attribute.
Devices to be monitored (D10, D11)
1000
Line attribute
(Graph color, line type, line width)
3 Scale tab
Set the scale and scale values of a graph.
1000
100
50
Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
0
0
Scale value
X (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 100)
Y (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 3)
10 - 129

(1) Displaying the cursor (

Section 10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation)
It is possible to display and move the cursor on the graph using the touch switch for which a key
code is assigned.
It is also possible to output the value of the device on which the cursor is displayed to other device.
(
Section 10.8.4
Device tab)
Graph display is stopped while the cursor is displayed.
11
ACTIONS
D100
D120
TRIGGER
D100 258
D120 231
(2) Displaying the grid (

Section 10.8.4
Scale tab)
It is possible to display the grid on the graph.
12
With grid
RECIPE
Without grid
10
GRAPH, METER
The following explains the useful functions for using the historical trend graph.
(These functions are provided only for historical trend graph and setting them is not possible for trend
graph.)
PARTS
3 Useful information
Without
With
Upper limit line
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(3) Displaying the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line (
Section 10.8.4
Extended
tab)
It is possible to display the lines that are used as reference, such as the upper limit and lower limit,
on the graph.
14
Reference line
(4) Expanding / contracting the time axis (

Section 10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend
graph operation)
It is possible to expand or contract the time axis using the touch switch for which a key code is
assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the graph is expanded/contracted.
DEBUG
Lower limit line
15
10 15 20 25 30
Contraction
15
20
25
30
16

10 - 130
SCRIPT FUNCTION
OTHERS
Expansion
(5) Outputting the time data to a device (

Section 10.8.4
Extended tab)
It is possible to output the beginning and end day/time of graph display and the day/time the cursor
is displayed using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the time data is output to a device.
19:00
21:00
23:00
(6) Displaying data at the specified time (

Section 10.8.4
Extended tab))
With a touch switch that the key code is assigned, data at the specified time can be displayed.
The graph display is stopped while the data at the specified time is displayed.
Specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008
The data at the specified time is displayed in the center.
10 - 131

PARTS
2 Click on the position where the historical trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 (After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using the ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged historical trend graph to display the setting dialog box.
3 Set with reference to the following explanation.
11


TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Easy setting method
10
GRAPH, METER
Click
(Historical Trend Graph).
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Historical Trend Graph] from the menu.
12

D10

Shape
RECIPE
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 132
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark

1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, display method and shape.
Basic
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Number of
Pens
Model
Set the number of graphs to be displayed (1 to 32).

Set the number of points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
Up to 1024 (3 to 1024) points can be set.
The space between point is automatically determined by the set number of points and the display range of X.
Example:
Points: 5
Points
Space between points = 20 dots

View
X 100 dots
Format
Select the direction for graph.
Right
Monitored
device
value
Left
Monitored
device
value
Elapsed time
Elapsed time
Direction
Up
Elapsed
time
Down
Elapsed
time
Monitored device value
Monitored device value

10 - 133

Basic
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Model
Select the graph drawing mode (Pen Record / One by One).

: The present value is displayed at the opposite side of display direction.
PARTS
Pen Record
When the graph moves beyond the display range, data is deleted from the
older one and the graph displays the latest data.
10
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
Drawing
Present value
Mode
One by One
Present value
GRAPH, METER
Direction
Present value
: The present value is displayed in the same side as the display direction.
When the graph moves beyond the display range, the graph presently
11
displayed is cleared and the graph is drawn starting from the succeeding
ACTIONS
data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
Present value
View Format
Present value
TRIGGER
Direction
Present value
12
Select the point type (Line / Point / Line+Point)
Point Type
Data Size
(Point)
(Line+Point)
RECIPE
(Line)
Select the data size (16 bits / 32 bits) of the word device.
Data Type
13
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats word device value as a BCD (binary coded decimal) value.
Real
: Treats word device value as a floating point type real number. (Only when
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Signed BIN
selecting [32 bits] for [Data Size].

Select whether the device value range (Upper limit / Lower limit) for historical trend graph is set by fixed
Upper Limit
values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Set the fixed values as the upper and lower limit values.
Device
: Set the device values as the upper and lower limit values.
(
Lower Limit
14
The range that can be set by upper and lower limit values depends on [Data Size] and [Data Type] of the
DEBUG
device to be monitored.
Shape
15
selected as shape.
(
Frame
OTHERS
Frame
Plate
16
Plate
Frame

10 - 134
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Format
Select the frame color / plate color of the shape.
Basic
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Category
Layer
(
Object Name
10 - 135

Model
9
2 Device tab
PARTS
Set the device to be monitored and displayed in graph and the attribute (color / type) of graph.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Device
12
Scale Extended
Item
Description
Model
Select the logging ID to be displayed in historical trend graph.
Logging ID
Selection is possible from logging ID and logging name.

Device
RECIPE
Basic
Select the setting method for [No. Logging Device]
Settings
Continuous
: The set continuous device points are set from head device automatically.
Random
: Set the devices one by one for the specified number of points.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Click on the item and the Device List dialog box is displayed.
In the device list dialog box, select the device to be displayed in graph from among the devices set for the
selected logging ID.
On a cell, the selected device and setting order of the logging device are displayed.
No. Logging
Device *1
14
Device
DEBUG
Device
Setting order of the logging device
Represents the order the device is displayed in the
device list dialog box.
This allows the confirmation of the order number of
the device being set in the device list dialog box.
The number is conveniently used for confirming
the setting change.
15
Select [Yes] / [No] for data operation.

Data
When the selection is [Yes], click the right column and set the calculation expression.
Operation
(
Setting for the line attribute is allowed only when the setting for [Point Type] on the Basic tab is [Line] or
OTHERS
Attribute*2
[Line+Point].

10 - 136
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Line
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function)
Click on the item and the Line Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Device
Basic
Scale Extended
Item
Description
Click on the item and the Point Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Point
Attribute*
Setting for the line attribute is allowed only when the setting for [Point Type] on the Basic tab is [Point] or
[Line+Point].
Click on the item and the Graph Information dialog box is displayed.
Graph
Information*3
The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value,
minimum value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
Device
Check this item to display the graph in the step mode.
Step Mode
Graph display without Graph display with

Step Mode checked Step Mode checked
*1 Device List dialog box

Displays the list of devices set for the selected logging ID.
Select the device to be used for historical trend graph.
A "*" symbol is displayed for the selected device.
10 - 137

Model
*2 Line Attribute / Point Attribute

Displays the dialog box used for setting the line attribute / point attribute.
PARTS
(1) Line attribute
GRAPH, METER
10
ACTIONS
11
Description
Style
Select the line style of graph.
Width
Select the line width (1 to 7 dots) of graph.
Color
Select the line color of graph.
TRIGGER
Item
12
RECIPE
(2) Point attribute
Type
Description
Select the point type of graph.
Size
Select the point size (Large / Medium / Small / Minimum / Point) of graph.
Color
Select the point color of graph.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 138
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Item
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
*3 Graph information
(1) About Graph Information dialog box
The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum
value, minimum value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
Item
Description
When a device is set, the devices are automatically set for the following items consecutively.
Device Data Storage
Check only the items to be used. (The unchecked items will not be set.)
Select the data type of the device value that stores the graph information.
Data Type
Signed BIN16
: Treats device value as a signed 16-bit binary value.
Unsigned BIN16
: Treats device value as an unsigned 16-bit binary value.
Signed BIN32
: Treats device value as a signed 32-bit binary value.
Unsigned BIN32
: Treats device value as an unsigned 32-bit binary value.
BCD16
: Treats device value as a 16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value.
BC326
: Treats device value as a 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value.
Real
: Treats device value as a floating point type real number.
Cursor Position Data
Stores the device value where the cursor is displayed.
Maximum Data
Stores the maximum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Minimum Data
Stores the minimum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Average Data
Stores the average value of the device displayed in the display range.
Type to be selected for [Data Type]

Select the same type as the device type of the logging device. When the data type of
the logging device is bit, select any of signed BIN16, unsigned BIN16 and BCD16.
When the selected type differs from the device type of the logging device, system
alarm "307 Monitor device is not set" occurs and the graph information is not stored
in the device.
10 - 139

Example: When storing the cursor displayed position value to a device

Displaying the cursor
Moving the cursor
10 15 20 25 30
This value is stored.
10 15 20 25 30
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
25
0
This value is stored.
12
RECIPE
25
0
11
The data of the graph when the graph
drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
50
14
DEBUG
50
15
OTHERS
100
75
10
16

10 - 140
SCRIPT FUNCTION
100
75
PARTS
(b) The value to be stored

When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
[Data Operation] is set with a historical trend graph, values to be stored in the devices for
[Graph Information] are values before data operations.
GRAPH, METER
(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

(a) Value storing timing
A value is stored in a device when the historical trend graph is operated by the touch switch for
the historical trend graph. (With exceptions of the timing at which the cursor is deleted or the
latest data is displayed.)
3 Scale tab
Set the graph scale, graph frame and grid.
Basic Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Model
Set the scale and scale values to the historical trend graph.
Example:
0 3
Scale
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
50 500
400
50
300
25 300
25
200
0
200
0
0
0
Display of scales
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
10 15 20 25 30
Display of scale values
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Display by combining scales

and scale values
Up
0 3
Select the position at which the [Main Scale] and/or [Scale Value] setting
Axis
should be changed. (Left / Right / Up / Down)
Position
Different setting is possible for each axis position.
Left
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
300
25
200
0
0
0
Right
10 15 20 25 30
Down

After checking, set at [Scale Points] (2 to 12) and [Color].
If the [Sub Scale] item is checked, sub scales are displayed between the set scales.
After checking, set at [Scale Points] (1 to 9) and [Color] for sub scale.
The scale intervals are automatically set according to the setting for [Scale Points].
Main Scale
Example: [Scale Points]: 4, [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale]: 5
Without sub scales
With sub scales
10 - 141

Basic Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Model

PARTS
After checking, set at [Value Number] (2 to 11), [Color], [Upper], [Lower], [Font] and [Size] (0.5 to 8).
For [Font], selection of the following items is possible.
The value that can be set for [Size] varis depending on the selected [Font].
Scale
Scale Value
6 x 8 dot
: 1 x 1 (fixed)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
10
GRAPH, METER
For details of each font and size, refer to the following.

Check these items to display the vertical/horizontal grid.

After checking, select the grid color.
11
Vertical Grid
ACTIONS
Grid is displayed according to the setting of [Main Scale] and [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale].
When the setting is made for [Top] / [Bottom], and [Left] / [Right], the setting for [Bottom] and [Left] has priority.
TRIGGER
Vertical grid
Horizontal grid
Horizontal Grid
12
Rectangle frame
RECIPE
Rectangle Frame
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

10 - 142
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
4 Extended tab
Set the security, graph assistance line, time device and cursor attribute.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display the Extended tab.
Basic
Device
Extended
Scale
Item
Description
Model
Security
User ID*1
Set the user ID (1 to 65535) of historical trend graph.
Graph Assistance Line
Check the items to display the corresponding lines (reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line) on the
graph.
After checking an item, select whether the display position is set by a fixed value or a value of the specified
device.
Fixed
: A constant is displayed as the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line.
Device
: A value of the device is displayed as the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line.
Reference
Line
(
After that, set [Type], [Size] and [Color].
Each of the reference line, upper limit line and lower limit line is displayed according to the values set in
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] on the Basic tab.
Upper Line
Upper limit value 100
Upper limit line (80)

Reference line (50)
Lower Line
Lower limit line (20)

Lower limit value
Time Device*2
Cursor
Position Time
Beginning
Position Time
Check the items to write the time of the cursor displayed position and the display range beginning/end
position time to a device. (The values are stored in BCD data.)
After checking an item, set the device where the time is stored.
(
Four points (Y/M, D/H, M/S, Day of week) of devices are set consecutively starting from the set device.
End Position
Time
Display Position Time
Check the item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function)
Device*3
After checking the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
(
Display
Three points (year and month, date and hour, minute and second) of devices are set consecutively starting
Position Time
from the set device.

10 - 143

Scale
Item
Description
Select the cursor line type.
Size
Select the cursor line width (1 to 7 dots).
PARTS
Set the cursor attribute.
Type
Select the cursor line color.
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Color
Model
14
DEBUG
Cursor Attribute
Extended
15
OTHERS
Device
16

10 - 144
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
*1 User ID
(1) When user ID setting is required
If more than one object that is operated using the switch of the same key code exists on the screen,
touching the switch may fail to call the intended operation.
In such a case, it is possible to assign an ID (user ID) to individual objects by setting the user ID so
that the ID (object) to be operated by the touch switch can be specified. Thus, intended switch
operation can be called by touching the touch switch.
When user ID is not set
When user ID is set
Historical
trend graph A
Historical
trend graph B
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
50
300
25
200
0
0
5
10 15 20 25 30
Historical
trend graph B
(User ID: 1)
(User ID: 2)
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
500
400
Historical
trend graph A
100
500
400
50
300
25
200
0
0
5
10
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
100
0
5
10
Display cursor
Display cursor
Display cursor
Display cursor
Hide cursor
Hide cursor
Hide cursor
Check Delete
Latest graph
Latest graph
Latest graph
Hide cursor
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A
(User ID: 1)
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B
(User ID: 2)
Up
The touch switch that should be used for

historical trend graph A acts for historical
trend graph B.
Down
Even if the same key code is used, the target

of operation is specified by an ID, making it
possible to call the intended operation.
(2) Touch switch setting

Input the user ID, which has been set in this step, to the [User ID for a key input] item in the Key
Code Switch dialog box.
For details of key code switch, refer to the following.
(
Section 6.2.9 Setting items of key code switch)
Touch switch setting (Action tab)
Set the user ID that has been set for an object.
10 - 145

*2 Time devices
(Year)
(Month)
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Day)
(Hour)
D102
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Minute)
(Second)
D103
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Not used)
(Day of week)
D101
10
GRAPH, METER
B7 to b0
(0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)
To monitor the devices above by numerical display.

To monitor the above devices by the numerical display and others, execute mask processing and
shift processing using the data operation function as shown below.
(
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function)
For the data type of Numerical Display (Extended tab), set [BCD] since a value is stored in BCD
data.
11
ACTIONS
B15 to b8
TRIGGER
D100
PARTS
(1) How the data is stored in the time devices

Time data is stored in upper and lower 8 bits of the set devices.
Example: When D100 is set.
12
Example: Setting example of numerical display (Data Operation tab)

RECIPE
Displaying "year" (upper 8 bits)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Set the numerical display to execute mask

processing for lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of D100
and to shift upper 8 bits (b15 to b8) of D100 to
the right by 8 bits.
DEBUG
Displaying "month" (lower 8 bits)
OTHERS
15
In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for upper 8 bits
(b15 to b8) of D100.

10 - 146
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

(a) Value storing timing
A value is stored to a device at the timing indicated below.
When the cursor is displayed on the graph.
When the displayed cursor is moved.
During the display of the cursor, when the historical trend graph is operated using a touch
switch.
(b) The value to be stored
When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
Example: When storing the time to a device
Displaying the cursor
Moving the cursor
100
75
100
75
50
50
25
0
25
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
The data of the graph when the graph

drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.
0
The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.
10 15 20 25 30
The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.
*3 Displaying data at specified time (Time specification jump function)

With the display position time devices and a touch switch, logging data at the specified time can be
displayed in the center of a historical trend graph. (The cursor is displayed at the position for the logging
data at the specified time.)
If no logging data at the specified time exists, logging data at the time closest to the specified time is
displayed.
(1) Before using time specification jump function
(a) Specifications for settable time
Item
Description
Data format
16-bit BCD (Binary coded decimal)
Data range
From January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2037
(b) Required settings

Place and set the following objects on the screen.
Item
Description
A touch switch is available from the library on GT Designer2.
Touch switch
Section 10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation)
The user can create a touch switch by setting a key code for the switch.
(
Section 6.2 Touch Switch)
Check [Display Position Time] on the Extended tab, and set the device.
Historical trend graph
(
10 - 147

Section 10.8.4
Extended tab)
PARTS
(2) Operation example

The following shows an example of operating the time specification jump function.
When setting the display position time device to D1000 and displaying data at 21:05:30 on
November 12, 2008
0 bits
Set time for the display position time devices.
Touch the touch switch that

the key code (FFD4) is set.
The data at the specified time

(21:05:30, November 12, 2008)
is displayed in the center of the graph.
GRAPH, METER
0x30
11
ACTIONS
0x05
Precautions for time specification jump function

(1) When using time specification jump function
When using the time specification jump function, the graph drawing processing
stops.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is
set.
(2) When performing other operations during the time specification jump
While the GOT searches for data at the specified time, the other operations for the
historical trend graph are unavailable.
(3) When multiple logging data at times close to the specified time exist
When no logging data at the specified time exists and multiple data at times
closest to the specified time exist, the data that the GOT detects first is displayed.
(4) When displaying the data at around the starting/ending point of the graph
When the logging data at the specified time is at around the starting or ending
point of the graph, the data may not be displayed in the center of the graph.
(5) When executing the time specification jump without specified time
When the time is not specified (all the display position time devices are 0) and the
time specification jump is executed, the graph drawing processing stops and the
latest data is displayed.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is
set.
(6) When no logging data exists
With no logging data, the time specification jump is not executed.
(7) When logging data is not in chronological order
When the logging data is not in chronological order because the GOT clock time is
changed, the data at the time closest to the specified time may not be displayed.
Do not change the GOT clock time during collecting logging data.
TRIGGER
0x21
12
RECIPE
0x12
10
Time
specification
jump
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
0x11
14
DEBUG
0x08
15
OTHERS
Year and month

(D1000)
Date and hour
(D1001)
Minute and
second (D1002)
16

10 - 148
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Display position time devices

15 bits
10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation

Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation may be read out from the library of GT
Designer2.
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be created by the user by setting a key
code to a touch switch.
Touch switches used for historical trend graph operation

Touch switch
Key code
Description
Shows / hides the cursor.
Show Cursor
The cursor is displayed at the center of the graph.

FFF0H
0 3
Hide cursor
FFF1H
Show
Cursor
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Displays the cursor.

Moves the cursor in the direction toward the new / past data.
Cursor
0 3
Cursor Next
FFF2H
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Moves the cursor

toward the new data.
New data side
Cursor
0 3
Cursor Previous
FFF3H
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Moves the cursor toward

the old data.
Old data side
10 - 149

Key code
Description
Moves the graph right and left
Graph
Graph Previous
FFF5H
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
10
10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph

Graph Next Page
PARTS
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
500
400
New data side
Graph
Scroll
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
Graph Previous
Page Scroll
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
500
400
FFF7H
10 15 20 25 30
11
ACTIONS
FFF6H
10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph

New data side
Expands (2 times) or reduces (1/2 times) the time axis of the graph taking the axis of the new data
Time Axis
12
as the reference.
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
Time Axis
12
18
15
21
24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
Reduction
Zoom
In
10 15 20 25 30
RECIPE
FFF8H
0
15
20
25
30
13
Zoom
Out
FFF9H
Reference
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Expansion
Displays the latest data.
Latest Data
FFFFH
Latest
Data
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
14
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Displays the latest data.

Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices in the center of the graph.
(Time specification jump function)
Jump
FFD4H
15
Specified
Jump
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
OTHERS
0 3
Time Specification
GRAPH, METER
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
TRIGGER
FFF4H
DEBUG
Graph Next
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
16
Specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008
The data at the specified

time is displayed in the center.

10 - 150
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Touch switch
10.8.6 Precautions
(1) Maximum number of historical trend graphs that can set for one project
Setting is possible for up to 32 points.
(2) Maximum number of historical trend graphs that can be arranged (set) for one screen
Arrangement (setting) is possible for up to 8 points.
(3) Changing the set logging device or using the data of other project
If the set logging device is changed or the data of other project data is used after setting the
historical trend graph, consistency between the device set for logging and the device in historical
trend graph may be lost.
In such a case, it is necessary to set the device for historical trend graph again.
The historical trend graph is not displayed unless the device type agrees with each other.
(4) Setting [Graph Assistance Line] by a device
Since the graph assistance lines are displayed only for reference, abnormal state such that the
lower limit value exceeds the upper limit value or the upper limit value becomes smaller than the
lower limit value does not cause an error.
Upper limit line
Lower limit line

Upper limit line
Reference line
Reference line
Lower limit line
(5) Devices set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information]

For devices to be set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information], use GOT internal devices.
If a device of a controller is specified, monitoring speed may be lowered.
(6) Logging setting when historical trend graph is used
When historical trend graph is used, setting for [Number of Logs a File] (
(1) Basic tab) in logging setting must be larger than a value set for [Points] (
Section 11.3.4
Section 10.8.4
Basic tab) of historical trend graph.
2 Precautions for OS
When historical trend graph is used, install the Option OS (Logging) to the GOT.
3 Precautions for hardware

When using the historical trend graph with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GT16, no option function board is required.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.
2.13 Precautions for Option Function Board
10 - 151

10.8.6 Precautions
(4) About logging files

(a) Do not delete a logging file in the midst from the logging files stored with serial numbers assigned.
The data in the midst will be lost.
GRAPH, METER
(3) Operation using a touch switch

If any of the operations below is performed using a touch switch, graph drawing is stopped.
Show cursor, Hide cursor and Cursor Next, Cursor Previous
Graph Previous, Graph Next, Graph Previous Page Scroll, Graph Next Page Scroll
Time Axis Expansion, Time Axis Reduction
The graph, for which drawing has been stopped, is drawn again when the Latest Data (FFEFH)
switch is touched.
11
ACTIONS
(2) Actions during logging data processing

While the logging data is being stored to a memory card, display of historical trend graph stops until
the storing processing finishes.
10
TRIGGER
(1) Differences in display speed from trend graph

The historical trend graph monitors the data collected by the logging function via the buffering area
/ memory card.
Accordingly, the data display speed is reduced from that of trend graph which directly monitors the
controller devices.
PARTS
12
(b) When displaying the past information, it may take much time.
RECIPE
(5) When using the security function

Pay attention to the following when using the security function.
(6) When the set overlay screen function or a window screen is used
When multiple historical trend graphs, having the same setting, are displayed due to the set overlay
screen function or the display of a window screen, the displayed contents may not be
synchronized.
It is recommend not to display multiple historical trend graphs having the same setting by using the
security function above.
(7) If the displayed logging data disappears
If the logging data displayed by Historical Trend Graph disappears due to such as logging data
deletion or memory card removal, the display position is automatically corrected to the existing data
when the graph is operated. (The display position may seem to be changed suddenly.)
Note that the logging data may be automatically deleted depending on logging mode or setting.
For the timing that logging data is deleted, refer to the following.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
14
DEBUG
(b) When the historical trend graph becomes to be displayed due to changing of the secarity level
If the status of the historical trend graph is changed from hide to display due to security level
change, "0" is stored to the device.
To store the cursor position status to the device, display the cursor again.
13
15
OTHERS
(a) When setting to store the status of the cusor position to a device
If the historical trend graph becomes to be hidden due to changing of the security level, the
device value at the cursor position is retained as it is. (only when the cursor is displayed.)

10.8.6 Precautions
10 - 152
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Section 11.3.2 Before setting logging

Man Hinh GOT. 2

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Man Hinh GOT. 2

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

1

5.8 Security Function

Security level is not set.

5.8 Security Function

The authority of security level

Switch to Mt. screen

Display login/logout screen (Operator authentication),

Screen example for each security level

5.8 Security Function

Line 1 control screen

Line 1 control screen

The object function on the screen cannot be used,

because the security level is in a low status

Display the screen for

Line 1 control screen

The first touch: Log out of the GOT.

The second touch: The screen for login is

Security level authentication

The screen for changing security levels is

Input the operator

(1) Operation example

Setting the security level of each

screen/object in this section)

Input the external

Operator authentication (Password

Input the external authentication ID of the

security level 4 using the external authentication

Input the password

Security level authentication

(Continued to next page)

security level 4 to login.

(From previous page)

Display the object function corresponding to security

Display touch switch

[Security level 10]

Numeric value can be

600 The input cursor is displayed in

Security level: 2 Cursor skips the numerical input

(b) Displaying window screen with changing security levels

Production volume screen

5.8 Security Function

Line 1 control screen

Base screen 1 (security level 4)

Window screen 2 (security level 8)

Do not display the window screen.

Display window screen

Line 1 control screen

Touch a touch switch, and then the screen for

changing security levels is displayed.

The second touch: The screen for login is

Security level authentication

The screen for changing security levels is

Change method of the security level in

Operator authentication (Password

Input a fingerprint of the

Input the password

Operator authentication (External authentication):

Operator authentication (Fingerprint

Input a fingerprint of the security level 4 user

Input the external

Security level authentication

(Continued to next page)

Input the operator